stumbling on happiness 
by daniel gilbert 


Stumbling
on Happiness
DANIEL GILBERT
Alfred A. Knopf New York 2006
CONTENTS
Title Page
Dedication
Epigraph
Acknowledgments
Foreword
PART I PROSPECTION
1. Journey to Elsewhen
PART II SUBJECTIVITY
2. The View from in Here
3. Outside Looking In
PART III REALISM
4. In the Blind Spot of the Mind’s Eye
5. The Hound of Silence
PART IV PRESENTISM
6. The Future Is Now
7. Time Bombs
PART V RATIONALIZATION
8. Paradise Glossed
9. Immune to Reality
PART VI CORRIGIBILITY
10. Once Bitten
11. Reporting Live from Tomorrow
Afterword
Notes
A Note about the Author
Permissions Acknowledgments
Illustration Credits
Copyright Page
For Oli, under the apple tree
One cannot divine nor forecast the conditions that will make
happiness; one only stumbles upon them by chance, in a lucky
hour, at the world’s end somewhere, and holds fast to the days, as
to fortune or fame.
Willa Cather, “Le Lavandou,” 1902
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
THIS IS THE PART OF THE BOOK in which the author typically claims that nobody
writes a book by himself and then names all the people who presumably wrote
the book for him. It must be nice to have friends like that. Alas, all the people
who wrote this book are me, so let me instead thank those who by their gifts
enabled me to write a book without them.
First and foremost, I thank the students and colleagues who did so much of the
research described in these pages and let me share in the credit. They include
Danny Axsom, Mike Berkovits, Stephen Blumberg, Ryan Brown, David
Centerbar, Erin Driver-Linn, Liz Dunn, Jane Ebert, Mike Gill, Sarit Golub,
Karim Kassam, Debbie Kermer, Boaz Keysar, Jaime Kurtz, Matt Lieberman, Jay
Meyers, Carey Morewedge, Kristian Myrseth, Becca Norwick, Kevin Ochsner,
Liz Pinel, Jane Risen, Todd Rogers, Ben Shenoy, and Thalia Wheatley. How did
I get lucky enough to work with all of you?
I owe a very special debt of gratitude to my friend and longtime collaborator
Tim Wilson of the University of Virginia, whose creativity and intelligence have
been constant sources of inspiration, envy, and research grants. The previous
sentence is the only one in this book that I could possibly have written without
him.
Several colleagues read chapters, made suggestions, provided information or
in some other way spared the wild geese a good chasing. They include Sissela
Bok, Allan Brandt, Patrick Cavanagh, Nick Epley, Nancy Etcoff, Tom Gilovich,
Richard Hackman, John Helliwell, Danny Kahneman, Boaz Keysar, Jay
Koehler, Steve Kosslyn, David Laibson, Andrew Oswald, Steve Pinker, Rebecca
Saxe, Jonathan Schooler, Nancy Segal, Dan Simons, Robert Trivers, Dan
Wegner, and Tim Wilson. Thank you all.
My agent, Katinka Matson, dared me to stop yapping about this book and to
start writing it, and although she isn’t the only person who ever told me to stop
yapping, she’s the only one I still like. My editor at Knopf, Marty Asher, has a
beautiful ear and a big blue pencil, and if you don’t think this book is a pleasure
to read, then you should have seen it before he got ahold of it.
I wrote much of this book while on sabbatical leaves that were subsidized by
the President and Fellows of Harvard College, the John Simon Guggenheim
Memorial Foundation, the James McKeen Cattell Foundation, the American
Philosophical Society, the National Institute of Mental Health, and the
University of Chicago Graduate School of Business. I thank these institutions for
investing in my disappearance.
And finally, the mush. I am grateful for the coincidence of having a wife and a
best friend who are both named Marilynn Oliphant. No one should have to
pretend to be interested in every half-baked thought that pops into my head. No
one should, but someone does. The members of the Gilbert and Oliphant clans—
Larry, Gloria, Sherry, Scott, Diana, Mister Mikey, Jo, Danny, Shona, Arlo,
Amanda, Big Z, Sarah B., Wren, and Daylyn—share joint custody of my heart,
and I thank them all for giving that heart a home. Finally, allow me to remember
with gratitude and affection two souls whom even heaven does not deserve: my
mentor, Ned Jones, and my mother, Doris Gilbert.
Now let’s go stumbling.
July 18, 2005
Cambridge, Massachusetts
FOREWORD
How sharper than a serpent’s tooth it is
To have a thankless child.
Shakespeare, King Lear
WHAT WOULD YOU DO right now if you learned that you were going to die in ten
minutes? Would you race upstairs and light that Marlboro you’ve been hiding in
your sock drawer since the Ford administration? Would you waltz into your
boss’s office and present him with a detailed description of his personal defects?
Would you drive out to that steakhouse near the new mall and order a T-bone,
medium rare, with an extra side of the really bad cholesterol? Hard to say, of
course, but of all the things you might do in your final ten minutes, it’s a pretty
safe bet that few of them are things you actually did today.
Now, some people will bemoan this fact, wag their fingers in your direction,
and tell you sternly that you should live every minute of your life as though it
were your last, which only goes to show that some people would spend their
final ten minutes giving other people dumb advice. The things we do when we
expect our lives to continue are naturally and properly different than the things
we might do if we expected them to end abruptly. We go easy on the lard and
tobacco, smile dutifully at yet another of our supervisor’s witless jokes, read
books like this one when we could be wearing paper hats and eating pistachio
macaroons in the bathtub, and we do each of these things in the charitable
service of the people we will soon become. We treat our future selves as though
they were our children, spending most of the hours of most of our days
constructing tomorrows that we hope will make them happy. Rather than
indulging in whatever strikes our momentary fancy, we take responsibility for
the welfare of our future selves, squirreling away portions of our paychecks each
month so they can enjoy their retirements on a putting green, jogging and
flossing with some regularity so they can avoid coronaries and gum grafts,
enduring dirty diapers and mind-numbing repetitions of The Cat in the Hat so
that someday they will have fat-cheeked grandchildren to bounce on their laps.
Even plunking down a dollar at the convenience store is an act of charity
intended to ensure that the person we are about to become will enjoy the
Twinkie we are paying for now. In fact, just about any time we want something
—a promotion, a marriage, an automobile, a cheeseburger—we are expecting
that if we get it, then the person who has our fingerprints a second, minute, day,
or decade from now will enjoy the world they inherit from us, honoring our
sacrifices as they reap the harvest of our shrewd investment decisions and
dietary forbearance.
Yeah, yeah. Don’t hold your breath. Like the fruits of our loins, our temporal
progeny are often thankless. We toil and sweat to give them just what we think
they will like, and they quit their jobs, grow their hair, move to or from San
Francisco, and wonder how we could ever have been stupid enough to think
they’d like that. We fail to achieve the accolades and rewards that we consider
crucial to their well-being, and they end up thanking God that things didn’t work
out according to our shortsighted, misguided plan. Even that person who takes a
bite of the Twinkie we purchased a few minutes earlier may make a sour face
and accuse us of having bought the wrong snack. No one likes to be criticized, of
course, but if the things we successfully strive for do not make our future selves
happy, or if the things we unsuccessfully avoid do, then it seems reasonable (if
somewhat ungracious) for them to cast a disparaging glance backward and
wonder what the hell we were thinking. They may recognize our good intentions
and begrudgingly acknowledge that we did the best we could, but they will
inevitably whine to their therapists about how our best just wasn’t good enough
for them.
How can this happen? Shouldn’t we know the tastes, preferences, needs, and
desires of the people we will be next year—or at least later this afternoon?
Shouldn’t we understand our future selves well enough to shape their lives—to
find careers and lovers whom they will cherish, to buy slipcovers for the sofa
that they will treasure for years to come? So why do they end up with attics and
lives that are full of stuff that we considered indispensable and that they consider
painful, embarrassing, or useless? Why do they criticize our choice of romantic
partners, second-guess our strategies for professional advancement, and pay
good money to remove the tattoos that we paid good money to get? Why do they
experience regret and relief when they think about us, rather than pride and
appreciation? We might understand all this if we had neglected them, ignored
them, mistreated them in some fundamental way—but damn it, we gave them
the best years of our lives! How can they be disappointed when we accomplish
our coveted goals, and why are they so damned giddy when they end up in
precisely the spot that we worked so hard to steer them clear of? Is there
something wrong with them?
Or is there something wrong with us?
WHEN I WAS TEN YEARS OLD, the most magical object in my house was a book on
optical illusions. Its pages introduced me to the Müller-Lyer lines whose arrowtipped ends made them appear as though they were different lengths even though
a ruler showed them to be identical, the Necker cube that appeared to have an
open side one moment and then an open top the next, the drawing of a chalice
that suddenly became a pair of silhouetted faces before flickering back into a
chalice again (see figure 1). I would sit on the floor in my father’s study and
stare at that book for hours, mesmerized by the fact that these simple drawings
could force my brain to believe things that it knew with utter certainty to be
wrong. This is when I learned that mistakes are interesting and began planning a
life that contained several of them. But an optical illusion is not interesting
simply because it causes everyone to make a mistake; rather, it is interesting
because it causes everyone to make the same mistake. If I saw a chalice, you saw
Elvis, and a friend of ours saw a paper carton of moo goo gai pan, then the
object we were looking at would be a very fine inkblot but a lousy optical
illusion. What is so compelling about optical illusions is that everyone sees the
chalice first, the faces next, and then—flicker flicker—there’s that chalice again.
The errors that optical illusions induce in our perceptions are lawful, regular, and
systematic. They are not dumb mistakes but smart mistakes—mistakes that
allow those who understand them to glimpse the elegant design and inner
workings of the visual system.
Fig. 1.
The mistakes we make when we try to imagine our personal futures are also
lawful, regular, and systematic. They too have a pattern that tells us about the
powers and limits of foresight in much the same way that optical illusions tell us
about the powers and limits of eyesight. That’s what this book is all about.
Despite the third word of the title, this is not an instruction manual that will tell
you anything useful about how to be happy. Those books are located in the selfhelp section two aisles over, and once you’ve bought one, done everything it
says to do, and found yourself miserable anyway, you can always come back
here to understand why. Instead, this is a book that describes what science has to
tell us about how and how well the human brain can imagine its own future, and
about how and how well it can predict which of those futures it will most enjoy.
This book is about a puzzle that many thinkers have pondered over the last two
millennia, and it uses their ideas (and a few of my own) to explain why we seem
to know so little about the hearts and minds of the people we are about to
become. The story is a bit like a river that crosses borders without benefit of
passport because no single science has ever produced a compelling solution to
the puzzle. Weaving together facts and theories from psychology, cognitive
neuroscience, philosophy, and behavioral economics, this book allows an
account to emerge that I personally find convincing but whose merits you will
have to judge for yourself.
Writing a book is its own reward, but reading a book is a commitment of time
and money that ought to pay clear dividends. If you are not educated and
entertained, you deserve to be returned to your original age and net worth. That
won’t happen, of course, so I’ve written a book that I hope will interest and
amuse you, provided you don’t take yourself too seriously and have at least ten
minutes to live. No one can say how you will feel when you get to the end of this
book, and that includes the you who is about to start it. But if your future self is
not satisfied when it arrives at the last page, it will at least understand why you
mistakenly thought it would be.
1
PART I
Prospection
prospection (pro•spe•kshen)
The act of looking forward in time or
considering the future.
CHAPTER 1
Journey to Elsewhen
O, that a man might know
The end of this day’s business ere it come!
Shakespeare, Julius Caesar
PRIESTS VOW TO REMAIN CELIBATE, physicians vow to do no harm, and letter
carriers vow to swiftly complete their appointed rounds despite snow, sleet, and
split infinitives. Few people realize that psychologists also take a vow,
promising that at some point in their professional lives they will publish a book,
a chapter, or at least an article that contains this sentence: “The human being is
the only animal that . . .” We are allowed to finish the sentence any way we like,
but it has to start with those eight words. Most of us wait until relatively late in
our careers to fulfill this solemn obligation because we know that successive
generations of psychologists will ignore all the other words that we managed to
pack into a lifetime of well-intentioned scholarship and remember us mainly for
how we finished The Sentence. We also know that the worse we do, the better
we will be remembered. For instance, those psychologists who finished The
Sentence with “can use language” were particularly well remembered when
chimpanzees were taught to communicate with hand signs. And when
researchers discovered that chimps in the wild use sticks to extract tasty termites
from their mounds (and to bash one another over the head now and then), the
world suddenly remembered the full name and mailing address of every
psychologist who had ever finished The Sentence with “uses tools.” So it is for
good reason that most psychologists put off completing The Sentence for as long
as they can, hoping that if they wait long enough, they just might die in time to
avoid being publicly humiliated by a monkey.
I have never before written The Sentence, but I’d like to do so now, with you
as my witness. The human being is the only animal that thinks about the future.
Now, let me say up front that I’ve had cats, I’ve had dogs, I’ve had gerbils, mice,
goldfish, and crabs (no, not that kind), and I do recognize that nonhuman
animals often act as though they have the capacity to think about the future. But
as bald men with cheap hairpieces always seem to forget, acting as though you
have something and actually having it are not the same thing, and anyone who
looks closely can tell the difference. For example, I live in an urban
neighborhood, and every autumn the squirrels in my yard (which is
approximately the size of two squirrels) act as though they know that they will
be unable to eat later unless they bury some food now. My city has a relatively
well-educated citizenry, but as far as anyone can tell its squirrels are not
particularly distinguished. Rather, they have regular squirrel brains that run
food-burying programs when the amount of sunlight that enters their regular
squirrel eyes decreases by a critical amount. Shortened days trigger burying
behavior with no intervening contemplation of tomorrow, and the squirrel that
stashes a nut in my yard “knows” about the future in approximately the same
way that a falling rock “knows” about the law of gravity—which is to say, not
really. Until a chimp weeps at the thought of growing old alone, or smiles as it
contemplates its summer vacation, or turns down a Fudgsicle because it already
looks too fat in shorts, I will stand by my version of The Sentence. We think
about the future in a way that no other animal can, does, or ever has, and this
simple, ubiquitous, ordinary act is a defining feature of our humanity.
1
The Joy of Next
If you were asked to name the human brain’s greatest achievement, you might
think first of the impressive artifacts it has produced—the Great Pyramid of
Giza, the International Space Station, or perhaps the Golden Gate Bridge. These
are great achievements indeed, and our brains deserve their very own ticker-tape
parade for producing them. But they are not the greatest. A sophisticated
machine could design and build any one of these things because designing and
building require knowledge, logic, and patience, of which sophisticated
machines have plenty. In fact, there’s really only one achievement so remarkable
that even the most sophisticated machine cannot pretend to have accomplished
it, and that achievement is conscious experience. Seeing the Great Pyramid or
remembering the Golden Gate or imagining the Space Station are far more
remarkable acts than is building any one of them. What’s more, one of these
remarkable acts is even more remarkable than the others. To see is to experience
the world as it is, to remember is to experience the world as it was, but to
imagine—ah, to imagine is to experience the world as it isn’t and has never
been, but as it might be. The greatest achievement of the human brain is its
ability to imagine objects and episodes that do not exist in the realm of the real,
and it is this ability that allows us to think about the future. As one philosopher
noted, the human brain is an “anticipation machine,” and “making future” is the
most important thing it does.
2
But what exactly does “making future” mean? There are at least two ways in
which brains might be said to make future, one of which we share with many
other animals, the other of which we share with none. All brains—human brains,
chimpanzee brains, even regular food-burying squirrel brains—make predictions
about the immediate, local, personal, future. They do this by using information
about current events (“I smell something”) and past events (“Last time I smelled
this smell, a big thing tried to eat me”) to anticipate the event that is most likely
to happen to them next (“A big thing is about to ———”).
3 But notice two
features of this so-called prediction. First, despite the comic quips inside the
parentheses, predictions such as these do not require the brain making them to
have anything even remotely resembling a conscious thought. Just as an abacus
can put two and two together to produce four without having thoughts about
arithmetic, so brains can add past to present to make future without ever thinking
about any of them. In fact, it doesn’t even require a brain to make predictions
such as these. With just a little bit of training, the giant sea slug known as
Aplysia parvula can learn to predict and avoid an electric shock to its gill, and as
anyone with a scalpel can easily demonstrate, sea slugs are inarguably brainless.
Computers are also brainless, but they use precisely the same trick the sea slug
does when they turn down your credit card because you were trying to buy
dinner in Paris after buying lunch in Hoboken. In short, machines and
invertebrates prove that it doesn’t take a smart, self-aware, conscious brain to
make simple predictions about the future.
The second thing to notice is that predictions such as these are not particularly
far-reaching. They are not predictions in the same sense that we might predict
the annual rate of inflation, the intellectual impact of postmodernism, the heat
death of the universe, or Madonna’s next hair color. Rather, these are predictions
about what will happen in precisely this spot, precisely next, to precisely me, and
we call them predictions only because there is no better word for them in the
English language. But the use of that term—with its inescapable connotations of
calculated, thoughtful reflection about events that may occur anywhere, to
anyone, at any time—risks obscuring the fact that brains are continuously
making predictions about the immediate, local, personal future of their owners
without their owners’ awareness. Rather than saying that such brains are
predicting, let’s say that they are nexting.
Yours is nexting right now. For example, at this moment you may be
consciously thinking about the sentence you just read, or about the key ring in
your pocket that is jammed uncomfortably against your thigh, or about whether
the War of 1812 really deserves its own overture. Whatever you are thinking,
your thoughts are surely about something other than the word with which this
sentence will end. But even as you hear these very words echoing in your very
head, and think whatever thoughts they inspire, your brain is using the word it is
reading right now and the words it read just before to make a reasonable guess
about the identity of the word it will read next, which is what allows you to read
so fluently.
4 Any brain that has been raised on a steady diet of film noir and
cheap detective novels fully expects the word night to follow the phrase It was a
dark and stormy, and thus when it does encounter the word night, it is especially
well prepared to digest it. As long as your brain’s guess about the next word
turns out to be right, you cruise along happily, left to right, left to right, turning
black squiggles into ideas, scenes, characters, and concepts, blissfully unaware
that your nexting brain is predicting the future of the sentence at a fantastic rate.
It is only when your brain predicts badly that you suddenly feel avocado.
That is, surprised. See?
Now, consider the meaning of that brief moment of surprise. Surprise is an
emotion we feel when we encounter the unexpected—for example, thirty-four
acquaintances in paper hats standing in our living room yelling “Happy
birthday!” as we walk through the front door with a bag of groceries and a full
bladder—and thus the occurrence of surprise reveals the nature of our
expectations. The surprise you felt at the end of the last paragraph reveals that as
you were reading the phrase it is only when your brain predicts badly that you
suddenly feel . . . , your brain was simultaneously making a reasonable
prediction about what would happen next. It predicted that sometime in the next
few milliseconds your eyes would come across a set of black squiggles that
encoded an English word that described a feeling, such as sad or nauseous or
even surprised. Instead, it encountered a fruit, which woke you from your
dogmatic slumbers and revealed the nature of your expectations to anyone who
was watching. Surprise tells us that we were expecting something other than
what we got, even when we didn’t know we were expecting anything at all.
Because feelings of surprise are generally accompanied by reactions that can
be observed and measured—such as eyebrow arching, eye widening, jaw
dropping, and noises followed by a series of exclamation marks—psychologists
can use surprise to tell them when a brain is nexting. For example, when
monkeys see a researcher drop a ball down one of several chutes, they quickly
look to the bottom of that chute and wait for the ball to reemerge. When some
experimental trickery causes the ball to emerge from a different chute than the
one in which it was deposited, the monkeys display surprise, presumably
because their brains were nexting.
5 Human babies have similar responses to
weird physics. For example, when babies are shown a video of a big red block
smashing into a little yellow block, they react with indifference when the little
yellow block instantly goes careening off the screen. But when the little yellow
block hesitates for just a moment or two before careening away, babies stare like
bystanders at a train wreck—as though the delayed careening had violated some
prediction made by their nexting brains.
6 Studies such as these tell us that
monkey brains “know” about gravity (objects fall down, not sideways) and that
baby human brains “know” about kinetics (moving objects transfer energy to
stationary objects at precisely the moment they contact them and not a few
seconds later). But more important, they tell us that monkey brains and baby
human brains add what they already know (the past) to what they currently see
(the present) to predict what will happen next (the future). When the actual next
thing is different from the predicted next thing, monkeys and babies experience
surprise.
Our brains were made for nexting, and that’s just what they’ll do. When we
take a stroll on the beach, our brains predict how stable the sand will be when
our foot hits it, and then adjust the tension in our knee accordingly. When we
leap to catch a Frisbee, our brains predict where the disc will be when we cross
its flight path, and then bring our hands to precisely that point. When we see a
sand crab scurry behind a bit of driftwood on its way to the water, our brains
predict when and where the critter will reappear, and then direct our eyes to the
precise point of its reemergence. These predictions are remarkable in both the
speed and accuracy with which they are made, and it is difficult to imagine what
our lives would be like if our brains quit making them, leaving us completely “in
the moment” and unable to take our next step. But while these automatic,
continuous, nonconscious predictions of the immediate, local, personal future are
both amazing and ubiquitous, they are not the sorts of predictions that got our
species out of the trees and into dress slacks. In fact, these are the kinds of
predictions that frogs make without ever leaving their lily pads, and hence not
the sort that The Sentence was meant to describe. No, the variety of future that
we human beings manufacture—and that only we manufacture—is of another
sort entirely.
The Ape That Looked Forward
Adults love to ask children idiotic questions so that we can chuckle when they
give us idiotic answers. One particularly idiotic question we like to ask children
is this: “What do you want to be when you grow up?” Small children look
appropriately puzzled, worried perhaps that our question implies they are at
some risk of growing down. If they answer at all, they generally come up with
things like “the candy guy” or “a tree climber.” We chuckle because the odds
that the child will ever become the candy guy or a tree climber are vanishingly
small, and they are vanishingly small because these are not the sorts of things
that most children will want to be once they are old enough to ask idiotic
questions themselves. But notice that while these are the wrong answers to our
question, they are the right answers to another question, namely, “What do you
want to be now?” Small children cannot say what they want to be later because
they don’t really understand what later means.
7 So, like shrewd politicians, they
ignore the question they are asked and answer the question they can. Adults do
much better, of course. When a thirtyish Manhattanite is asked where she thinks
she might retire, she mentions Miami, Phoenix, or some other hotbed of social
rest. She may love her gritty urban existence right now, but she can imagine that
in a few decades she will value bingo and prompt medical attention more than
art museums and squeegee men. Unlike the child who can only think about how
things are, the adult is able to think about how things will be. At some point
between our high chairs and our rocking chairs, we learn about later.
8
Later! What an astonishing idea. What a powerful concept. What a fabulous
discovery. How did human beings ever learn to preview in their imaginations
chains of events that had not yet come to pass? What prehistoric genius first
realized that he could escape today by closing his eyes and silently transporting
himself into tomorrow? Unfortunately, even big ideas leave no fossils for carbon
dating, and thus the natural history of later is lost to us forever. But
paleontologists and neuroanatomists assure us that this pivotal moment in the
drama of human evolution happened sometime within the last 3 million years,
and that it happened quite suddenly. The first brains appeared on earth about 500
million years ago, spent a leisurely 430 million years or so evolving into the
brains of the earliest primates, and another 70 million years or so evolving into
the brains of the first protohumans. Then something happened—no one knows
quite what, but speculation runs from the weather turning chilly to the invention
of cooking—and the soon-to-be-human brain experienced an unprecedented
growth spurt that more than doubled its mass in a little over two million years,
transforming it from the one-and-a-quarter-pound brain of Homo habilis to the
nearly three-pound brain of Homo sapiens.
9
Now, if you were put on a hot-fudge diet and managed to double your mass in
a very short time, we would not expect all of your various body parts to share
equally in the gain. Your belly and buttocks would probably be the major
recipients of newly acquired flab, while your tongue and toes would remain
relatively svelte and unaffected. Similarly, the dramatic increase in the size of
the human brain did not democratically double the mass of every part so that
modern people ended up with new brains that were structurally identical to the
old ones, only bigger. Rather, a disproportionate share of the growth centered on
a particular part of the brain known as the frontal lobe, which, as its name
implies, sits at the front of the head, squarely above the eyes (see figure 2). The
low, sloping brows of our earliest ancestors were pushed forward to become the
sharp, vertical brows that keep our hats on, and the change in the structure of our
heads occurred primarily to accommodate this sudden change in the size of our
brains. What did this new bit of cerebral apparatus do to justify an architectural
overhaul of the human skull? What is it about this particular part that made
nature so anxious for each of us to have a big one? Just what good is a frontal
lobe?
Fig. 2. The frontal lobe is the recent addition to the human brain that allows us to imagine the future.
Until fairly recently, scientists thought it was not much good at all, because
people whose frontal lobes were damaged seemed to do pretty well without
them. Phineas Gage was a foreman for the Rutland Railroad who, on a lovely
autumn day in 1848, ignited a small explosion in the vicinity of his feet,
launching a three-and-a-half-foot-long iron rod into the air, which Phineas
cleverly caught with his face. The rod entered just beneath his left cheek and
exited through the top of his skull, boring a tunnel through his cranium and
taking a good chunk of frontal lobe with it (see figure 3). Phineas was knocked
to the ground, where he lay for a few minutes. Then, to everyone’s astonishment,
he stood up and asked if a coworker might escort him to the doctor, insisting all
the while that he didn’t need a ride and could walk by himself, thank you. The
doctor cleaned some dirt from his wound, a coworker cleaned some brain from
the rod, and in a relatively short while, Phineas and his rod were back about their
business.
10 His personality took a decided turn for the worse—and that fact is
the source of his fame to this day—but the more striking thing about Phineas
was just how normal he otherwise was. Had the rod made hamburger of another
brain part—the visual cortex, Broca’s area, the brain stem—then Phineas might
have died, gone blind, lost the ability to speak, or spent the rest of his life doing
a convincing impression of a cabbage. Instead, for the next twelve years, he
lived, saw, spoke, worked, and traveled so uncabbagely that neurologists could
only conclude that the frontal lobe did little for a fellow that he couldn’t get
along nicely without.
11 As one neurologist wrote in 1884, “Ever since the
occurrence of the famous American crowbar case it has been known that
destruction of these lobes does not necessarily give rise to any symptoms.”
12
Fig. 3. An early medical sketch showing where the tamping iron entered and exited Phineas Gage’s
skull.
But the neurologist was wrong. In the nineteenth century, knowledge of brain
function was based largely on the observation of people who, like Phineas Gage,
were the unfortunate subjects of one of nature’s occasional and inexact
neurological experiments. In the twentieth century, surgeons picked up where
nature left off and began to do more precise experiments whose results painted a
very different picture of frontal lobe function. In the 1930s, a Portuguese
physician named António Egas Moniz was looking for a way to quiet his highly
agitated psychotic patients when he heard about a new surgical procedure called
frontal lobotomy, which involved the chemical or mechanical destruction of
parts of the frontal lobe. This procedure had been performed on monkeys, who
were normally quite angry when their food was withheld, but who reacted to
such indignities with unruffled patience after experiencing the operation. Egas
Moniz tried the procedure on his human patients and found that it had a similar
calming effect. (It also had the calming effect of winning Egas Moniz the Nobel
Prize for Medicine in 1949.) Over the next few decades, surgical techniques
were improved (the procedure could be performed under local anesthesia with an
ice pick) and unwanted side effects (such as lowered intelligence and bedwetting) were diminished. The destruction of some part of the frontal lobe
became a standard treatment for cases of anxiety and depression that resisted
other forms of therapy.
13 Contrary to the conventional medical wisdom of the
previous century, the frontal lobe did make a difference. The difference was that
some folks seemed better off without it.
But while some surgeons were touting the benefits of frontal lobe damage,
others were noticing the costs. Although patients with frontal lobe damage often
performed well on standard intelligence tests, memory tests, and the like, they
showed severe impairments on any test—even the very simplest test—that
involved planning. For instance, when given a maze or a puzzle whose solution
required that they consider an entire series of moves before making their first
move, these otherwise intelligent people were stumped.
14 Their planning deficits
were not limited to the laboratory. These patients might function reasonably well
in ordinary situations, drinking tea without spilling and making small talk about
the drapes, but they found it practically impossible to say what they would do
later that afternoon. In summarizing scientific knowledge on this topic, a
prominent scientist concluded: “No prefrontal symptom has been reported more
consistently than the inability to plan. . . . The symptom appears unique to
dysfunction of the prefrontal cortex . . . [and] is not associated with clinical
damage to any other neural structure.”
15
Now, this pair of observations—that damage to certain parts of the frontal
lobe can make people feel calm but that it can also leave them unable to plan—
seem to converge on a single conclusion. What is the conceptual tie that binds
anxiety and planning? Both, of course, are intimately connected to thinking
about the future. We feel anxiety when we anticipate that something bad will
happen, and we plan by imagining how our actions will unfold over time.
Planning requires that we peer into our futures, and anxiety is one of the
reactions we may have when we do.
16 The fact that damage to the frontal lobe
impairs planning and anxiety so uniquely and precisely suggests that the frontal
lobe is the critical piece of cerebral machinery that allows normal, modern
human adults to project themselves into the future. Without it we are trapped in
the moment, unable to imagine tomorrow and hence unworried about what it
may bring. As scientists now recognize, the frontal lobe “empowers healthy
human adults with the capacity to consider the self’s extended existence
throughout time.”
17 As such, people whose frontal lobe is damaged are described
by those who study them as being “bound to present stimuli,”
18 or “locked into
immediate space and time,”
19 or as displaying a “tendency toward temporal
concreteness.”
20
In other words, like candy guys and tree climbers, they live in a
world without later.
The sad case of the patient known as N.N. provides a window into this world.
N.N. suffered a closed head injury in an automobile accident in 1981, when he
was thirty years old. Tests revealed that he had sustained extensive damage to
his frontal lobe. A psychologist interviewed N.N. a few years after the accident
and recorded this conversation:
PSYCHOLOGIST: What will you be doing tomorrow?
N.N.: I don’t know.
PSYCHOLOGIST: Do you remember the question?
N.N.: About what I’ll be doing tomorrow?
PSYCHOLOGIST: Yes, would you describe your state of mind when you try to
think about it?
N.N.: Blank, I guess . . . It’s like being asleep . . . like being in a room with
nothing there and having a guy tell you to go find a chair, and there’s
nothing there . . . like swimming in the middle of a lake. There’s nothing to
hold you up or do anything with.
21
N.N.’s inability to think about his own future is characteristic of patients with
frontal lobe damage. For N.N., tomorrow will always be an empty room, and
when he attempts to envision later, he will always feel as the rest of us do when
we try to imagine nonexistence or infinity. Yet, if you struck up a conversation
with N.N. on the subway, or chatted with him while standing in line at the post
office, you might not know that he was missing something so fundamentally
human. After all, he understands time and the future as abstractions. He knows
what hours and minutes are, how many of the latter there are in the former, and
what before and after mean. As the psychologist who interviewed N.N. reported:
“He knows many things about the world, he is aware of this knowledge, and he
can express it flexibly. In this sense he is not greatly different from a normal
adult. But he seems to have no capacity of experiencing extended subjective
time. . . . He seems to be living in a ‘permanent present.’ ”
22
A permanent present—what a haunting phrase. How bizarre and surreal it
must be to serve a life sentence in the prison of the moment, trapped forever in
the perpetual now, a world without end, a time without later. Such an existence
is so difficult for most of us to imagine, so alien to our normal experience, that
we are tempted to dismiss it as a fluke—an unfortunate, rare, and freakish
aberration brought on by traumatic head injury. But in fact, this strange existence
is the rule and we are the exception. For the first few hundred million years after
their initial appearance on our planet, all brains were stuck in the permanent
present, and most brains still are today. But not yours and not mine, because two
or three million years ago our ancestors began a great escape from the here and
now, and their getaway vehicle was a highly specialized mass of gray tissue,
fragile, wrinkled, and appended. This frontal lobe—the last part of the human
brain to evolve, the slowest to mature, and the first to deteriorate in old age—is a
time machine that allows each of us to vacate the present and experience the
future before it happens. No other animal has a frontal lobe quite like ours,
which is why we are the only animal that thinks about the future as we do. But if
the story of the frontal lobe tells us how people conjure their imaginary
tomorrows, it doesn’t tell us why.
Twisting Fate
In the late 1960s, a Harvard psychology professor took LSD, resigned his
appointment (with some encouragement from the administration), went to India,
met a guru, and returned to write a popular book called Be Here Now, whose
central message was succinctly captured by the injunction of its title.
23 The key
to happiness, fulfillment, and enlightenment, the ex-professor argued, was to
stop thinking so much about the future.
Now, why would anyone go all the way to India and spend his time, money,
and brain cells just to learn how not to think about the future? Because, as
anyone who has ever tried to learn meditation knows, not thinking about the
future is much more challenging than being a psychology professor. Not to think
about the future requires that we convince our frontal lobe not to do what it was
designed to do, and like a heart that is told not to beat, it naturally resists this
suggestion. Unlike N.N., most of us do not struggle to think about the future
because mental simulations of the future arrive in our consciousness regularly
and unbidden, occupying every corner of our mental lives. When people are
asked to report how much they think about the past, present, and future, they
claim to think about the future the most.
24 When researchers actually count the
items that float along in the average person’s stream of consciousness, they find
that about 12 percent of our daily thoughts are about the future.
25
In other words,
every eight hours of thinking includes an hour of thinking about things that have
yet to happen. If you spent one out of every eight hours living in my state you
would be required to pay taxes, which is to say that in some very real sense, each
of us is a part-time resident of tomorrow.
Why can’t we just be here now? How come we can’t do something our
goldfish find so simple? Why do our brains stubbornly insist on projecting us
into the future when there is so much stuff to think about right here today?
Prospection and Emotion
The most obvious answer to that question is that thinking about the future can be
pleasurable. We daydream about slamming the game-winning homer at the
company picnic, posing with the lottery commissioner and the door-sized check,
or making snappy patter with the attractive teller at the bank—not because we
expect or even want these things to happen, but because merely imagining these
possibilities is itself a source of joy. Studies confirm what you probably suspect:
When people daydream about the future, they tend to imagine themselves
achieving and succeeding rather than fumbling or failing.
26
Indeed, thinking about the future can be so pleasurable that sometimes we’d
rather think about it than get there. In one study, volunteers were told that they
had won a free dinner at a fabulous French restaurant and were then asked when
they would like to eat it. Now? Tonight? Tomorrow? Although the delights of
the meal were obvious and tempting, most of the volunteers chose to put their
restaurant visit off a bit, generally until the following week.
27 Why the selfimposed delay? Because by waiting a week, these people not only got to spend
several hours slurping oysters and sipping Château Cheval Blanc ’47, but they
also got to look forward to all that slurping and sipping for a full seven days
beforehand. Forestalling pleasure is an inventive technique for getting double the
juice from half the fruit. Indeed, some events are more pleasurable to imagine
than to experience (most of us can recall an instance in which we made love with
a desirable partner or ate a wickedly rich dessert, only to find that the act was
better contemplated than consummated), and in these cases people may decide to
delay the event forever. For instance, volunteers in one study were asked to
imagine themselves requesting a date with a person on whom they had a major
crush, and those who had had the most elaborate and delicious fantasies about
approaching their heartthrob were least likely to do so over the next few
months.
28
We like to frolic in the best of all imaginary tomorrows—and why shouldn’t
we? After all, we fill our photo albums with pictures of birthday parties and
tropical vacations rather than car wrecks and emergency-room visits because we
want to be happy when we stroll down Memory Lane, so why shouldn’t we take
the same attitude toward our strolls up Imagination Avenue? Although
imagining happy futures may make us feel happy, it can also have some
troubling consequences. Researchers have discovered that when people find it
easy to imagine an event, they overestimate the likelihood that it will actually
occur.
29 Because most of us get so much more practice imagining good than bad
events, we tend to overestimate the likelihood that good events will actually
happen to us, which leads us to be unrealistically optimistic about our futures.
For instance, American college students expect to live longer, stay married
longer, and travel to Europe more often than average.
30 They believe they are
more likely to have a gifted child, to own their own home, and to appear in the
newspaper, and less likely to have a heart attack, venereal disease, a drinking
problem, an auto accident, a broken bone, or gum disease. Americans of all ages
expect their futures to be an improvement on their presents,
31 and although
citizens of other nations are not quite as optimistic as Americans, they also tend
to imagine that their futures will be brighter than those of their peers.
32 These
overly optimistic expectations about our personal futures are not easily undone:
Experiencing an earthquake causes people to become temporarily realistic about
their risk of dying in a future disaster, but within a couple of weeks even
earthquake survivors return to their normal level of unfounded optimism.
33
Indeed, events that challenge our optimistic beliefs can sometimes make us more
rather than less optimistic. One study found that cancer patients were more
optimistic about their futures than were their healthy counterparts.
34
Of course, the futures that our brains insist on simulating are not all wine,
kisses, and tasty bivalves. They are often mundane, irksome, stupid, unpleasant,
or downright frightening, and people who seek treatment for their inability to
stop thinking about the future are usually worrying about it rather than reveling
in it. Just as a loose tooth seems to beg for wiggling, we all seem perversely
compelled to imagine disasters and tragedies from time to time. On the way to
the airport we imagine a future scenario in which the plane takes off without us
and we miss the important meeting with the client. On the way to the dinner
party we imagine a future scenario in which everyone hands the hostess a bottle
of wine while we greet her empty-handed and embarrassed. On the way to the
medical center we imagine a future scenario in which our doctor inspects our
chest X-ray, frowns, and says something ominous such as “Let’s talk about your
options.” These dire images make us feel dreadful—quite literally—so why do
we go to such great lengths to construct them?
Two reasons. First, anticipating unpleasant events can minimize their impact.
For instance, volunteers in one study received a series of twenty electric shocks
and were warned three seconds before the onset of each one.
35 Some volunteers
(the high-shock group) received twenty high-intensity shocks to their right
ankles. Other volunteers (the low-shock group) received three high-intensity
shocks and seventeen low-intensity shocks. Although the low-shock group
received fewer volts than the high-shock group did, their hearts beat faster, they
sweated more profusely, and they rated themselves as more afraid. Why?
Because volunteers in the low-shock group received shocks of different
intensities at different times, which made it impossible for them to anticipate
their futures. Apparently, three big jolts that one cannot foresee are more painful
than twenty big jolts that one can.
36
The second reason why we take such pains to imagine unpleasant events is
that fear, worry, and anxiety have useful roles to play in our lives. We motivate
employees, children, spouses, and pets to do the right thing by dramatizing the
unpleasant consequences of their misbehaviors, and so too do we motivate
ourselves by imagining the unpleasant tomorrows that await us should we decide
to go light on the sunscreen and heavy on the éclairs. Forecasts can be
“fearcasts”
37 whose purpose is not to predict the future so much as to preclude it,
and studies have shown that this strategy is often an effective way to motivate
people to engage in prudent, prophylactic behavior.
38
In short, we sometimes
imagine dark futures just to scare our own pants off.
Prospection and Control
Prospection can provide pleasure and prevent pain, and this is one of the reasons
why our brains stubbornly insist on churning out thoughts of the future. But it is
not the most important reason. Americans gladly pay millions—perhaps even
billions—of dollars every year to psychics, investment advisors, spiritual
leaders, weather forecasters, and other assorted hucksters who claim they can
predict the future. Those of us who subsidize these fortune-telling industries do
not want to know what is likely to happen just for the joy of anticipating it. We
want to know what is likely to happen so that we can do something about it. If
interest rates are going to skyrocket next month, then we want to shift our money
out of bonds right now. If it is going to rain this afternoon, then we want to grab
an umbrella this morning. Knowledge is power, and the most important reason
why our brains insist on simulating the future even when we’d rather be here
now, enjoying a goldfish moment, is that our brains want to control the
experiences we are about to have.
But why should we want to have control over our future experiences? On the
face of it, this seems about as nonsensical as asking why we should want to have
control over our television sets and our automobiles. But indulge me. We have a
large frontal lobe so that we can look into the future, we look into the future so
that we can make predictions about it, we make predictions about it so that we
can control it—but why do we want to control it at all? Why not just let the
future unfold as it will and experience it as it does? Why not be here now and
there then? There are two answers to this question, one of which is surprisingly
right and the other of which is surprisingly wrong.
The surprisingly right answer is that people find it gratifying to exercise
control—not just for the futures it buys them, but for the exercise itself. Being
effective—changing things, influencing things, making things happen—is one of
the fundamental needs with which human brains seem to be naturally endowed,
and much of our behavior from infancy onward is simply an expression of this
penchant for control.
39 Before our butts hit the very first diaper, we already have
a throbbing desire to suck, sleep, poop, and make things happen. It takes us a
while to get around to fulfilling the last of these desires only because it takes us a
while to figure out that we have fingers, but when we do, look out world.
Toddlers squeal with delight when they knock over a stack of blocks, push a
ball, or squash a cupcake on their foreheads. Why? Because they did it, that’s
why. Look, Mom, my hand made that happen. The room is different because I
was in it. I thought about falling blocks, and poof, they fell. Oh boy! Sheer
doing!
The fact is that human beings come into the world with a passion for control,
they go out of the world the same way, and research suggests that if they lose
their ability to control things at any point between their entrance and their exit,
they become unhappy, helpless, hopeless, and depressed.
40 And occasionally
dead. In one study, researchers gave elderly residents of a local nursing home a
houseplant. They told half the residents that they were in control of the plant’s
care and feeding (high-control group), and they told the remaining residents that
a staff person would take responsibility for the plant’s well-being (low-control
group).
41 Six months later, 30 percent of the residents in the low-control group
had died, compared with only 15 percent of the residents in the high-control
group. A follow-up study confirmed the importance of perceived control for the
welfare of nursing-home residents but had an unexpected and unfortunate end.
42
Researchers arranged for student volunteers to pay regular visits to nursinghome residents. Residents in the high-control group were allowed to control the
timing and duration of the student’s visit (“Please come visit me next Thursday
for an hour”), and residents in low-control group were not (“I’ll come visit you
next Thursday for an hour”). After two months, residents in the high-control
group were happier, healthier, more active, and taking fewer medications than
those in the low-control group. At this point the researchers concluded their
study and discontinued the student visits. Several months later they were
chagrined to learn that a disproportionate number of residents who had been in
the high-control group had died. Only in retrospect did the cause of this tragedy
seem clear. The residents who had been given control, and who had benefited
measurably from that control while they had it, were inadvertently robbed of
control when the study ended. Apparently, gaining control can have a positive
impact on one’s health and well-being, but losing control can be worse than
never having had any at all.
Our desire to control is so powerful, and the feeling of being in control so
rewarding, that people often act as though they can control the uncontrollable.
For instance, people bet more money on games of chance when their opponents
seem incompetent than competent—as though they believed they could control
the random drawing of cards from a deck and thus take advantage of a weak
opponent.
43 People feel more certain that they will win a lottery if they can
control the number on their ticket,
44 and they feel more confident that they will
win a dice toss if they can throw the dice themselves.
45 People will wager more
money on dice that have not yet been tossed than on dice that have already been
tossed but whose outcome is not yet known,
46 and they will bet more if they,
rather than someone else, are allowed to decide which number will count as a
win.
47
In each of these instances, people behave in a way that would be utterly
absurd if they believed that they had no control over an uncontrollable event. But
if somewhere deep down inside they believed that they could exert control—
even one smidgen of an iota of control—then their behavior would be perfectly
reasonable. And deep down inside, that’s precisely what most of us seem to
believe. Why isn’t it fun to watch a videotape of last night’s football game even
when we don’t know who won? Because the fact that the game has already been
played precludes the possibility that our cheering will somehow penetrate the
television, travel through the cable system, find its way to the stadium, and
influence the trajectory of the ball as it hurtles toward the goalposts! Perhaps the
strangest thing about this illusion of control is not that it happens but that it
seems to confer many of the psychological benefits of genuine control. In fact,
the one group of people who seem generally immune to this illusion are the
clinically depressed,
48 who tend to estimate accurately the degree to which they
can control events in most situations.
49 These and other findings have led some
researchers to conclude that the feeling of control—whether real or illusory—is
one of the wellsprings of mental health.
50 So if the question is “Why should we
want to control our futures?” then the surprisingly right answer is that it feels
good to do so—period. Impact is rewarding. Mattering makes us happy. The act
of steering one’s boat down the river of time is a source of pleasure, regardless
of one’s port of call.
Now, at this point you probably believe two things. First, you probably
believe that if you never heard the phrase “the river of time” again, it would be
too soon. Amen. Second, you probably believe that even if the act of steering a
metaphorical boat down a clichéd river is a source of pleasure and well-being,
where the boat goes matters much, much more. Playing captain is a joy all its
own, but the real reason why we want to steer our ships is so that we can get
them to Hanalei instead of Jersey City. The nature of a place determines how we
feel upon arrival, and our uniquely human ability to think about the extended
future allows us to choose the best destinations and avoid the worst. We are the
apes that learned to look forward because doing so enables us to shop among the
many fates that might befall us and select the best one. Other animals must
experience an event in order to learn about its pleasures and pains, but our
powers of foresight allow us to imagine that which has not yet happened and
hence spare ourselves the hard lessons of experience. We needn’t reach out and
touch an ember to know that it will hurt to do so, and we needn’t experience
abandonment, scorn, eviction, demotion, disease, or divorce to know that all of
these are undesirable ends that we should do our best to avoid. We want—and
we should want—to control the direction of our boat because some futures are
better than others, and even from this distance we should be able to tell which
are which.
This idea is so obvious that it barely seems worth mentioning, but I’m going
to mention it anyway. Indeed, I am going to spend the rest of this book
mentioning it because it will probably take more than a few mentions to
convince you that what looks like an obvious idea is, in fact, the surprisingly
wrong answer to our question. We insist on steering our boats because we think
we have a pretty good idea of where we should go, but the truth is that much of
our steering is in vain—not because the boat won’t respond, and not because we
can’t find our destination, but because the future is fundamentally different than
it appears through the prospectiscope. Just as we experience illusions of eyesight
(“Isn’t it strange how one line looks longer than the other even though it isn’t?”)
and illusions of hindsight (“Isn’t it strange how I can’t remember taking out the
garbage even though I did?”), so too do we experience illusions of foresight—
and all three types of illusion are explained by the same basic principles of
human psychology.
Onward
To be perfectly honest, I won’t just be mentioning the surprisingly wrong
answer; I’ll be pounding and pummeling it until it gives up and goes home. The
surprisingly wrong answer is apparently so sensible and so widely believed that
only a protracted thrashing has any hope of expunging it from our conventional
wisdom. So before the grudge match begins, let me share with you my plan of
attack.
• In Part II, “Subjectivity,” I will tell you about the science of happiness.
We all steer ourselves toward the futures that we think will make us happy,
but what does that word really mean? And how can we ever hope to achieve
solid, scientific answers to questions about something as gossamer as a
feeling?
• We use our eyes to look into space and our imaginations to look into
time. Just as our eyes sometimes lead us to see things as they are not, our
imaginations sometimes lead us to foresee things as they will not be.
Imagination suffers from three shortcomings that give rise to the illusions
of foresight with which this book is chiefly concerned. In Part III,
“Realism,” I will tell you about the first shortcoming: Imagination works so
quickly, quietly, and effectively that we are insufficiently skeptical of its
products.
• In Part IV, “Presentism,” I will tell you about the second shortcoming:
Imagination’s products are . . . well, not particularly imaginative, which is
why the imagined future often looks so much like the actual present.
• In Part V, “Rationalization,” I will tell you about the third
shortcoming: Imagination has a hard time telling us how we will think
about the future when we get there. If we have trouble foreseeing future
events, then we have even more trouble foreseeing how we will see them
when they happen.
• Finally, in Part VI, “Corrigibility,” I will tell you why illusions of
foresight are not easily remedied by personal experience or by the wisdom
we inherit from our grandmothers. I will conclude by telling you about a
simple remedy for these illusions that you will almost certainly not accept.
By the time you finish these chapters, I hope you will understand why most of us
spend so much of our lives turning rudders and hoisting sails, only to find that
Shangri-la isn’t what and where we thought it would be.
PART II
Subjectivity
subjectivity (sub•dzėk•ti•vĭtee)
The fact that experience is unobservable to
everyone but the person having it.
CHAPTER 2
The View from in Here
But, O, how bitter a thing it is to look into happiness
through another man’s eyes!
Shakespeare, As You Like It
LORI AND REBA SCHAPPEL may be twins, but they are very different people. Reba
is a somewhat shy teetotaler who has recorded an award-winning album of
country music. Lori, who is outgoing, wisecracking, and rather fond of
strawberry daiquiris, works in a hospital and wants someday to marry and have
children. They occasionally argue, as sisters do, but most of the time they get on
well, complimenting each other, teasing each other, and finishing each other’s
sentences. In fact, there are just two unusual things about Lori and Reba. The
first is that they share a blood supply, part of a skull, and some brain tissue,
having been joined at the forehead since birth. One side of Lori’s forehead is
attached to one side of Reba’s, and they have spent every moment of their lives
locked together, face-to-face. The second unusual thing about Lori and Reba is
that they are happy—not merely resigned or contented, but joyful, playful, and
optimistic.
1 Their unusual life presents many challenges, of course, but as they
often note, whose doesn’t? When asked about the possibility of undergoing
surgical separation, Reba speaks for both of them: “Our point of view is no,
straight out no. Why would you want to do that? For all the money in China,
why? You’d be ruining two lives in the process.”
2
So here’s the question: If this were your life rather than theirs, how would you
feel? If you said, “Joyful, playful, and optimistic,” then you are not playing the
game and I am going to give you another chance. Try to be honest instead of
correct. The honest answer is “Despondent, desperate, and depressed.” Indeed, it
seems clear that no right-minded person could really be happy under such
circumstances, which is why the conventional medical wisdom has it that
conjoined twins should be separated at birth, even at the risk of killing one or
both. As a prominent medical historian wrote: “Many singletons, especially
surgeons, find it inconceivable that life is worth living as a conjoined twin,
inconceivable that one would not be willing to risk all—mobility, reproductive
ability, the life of one or both twins—to try for separation.”
3
In other words, not
only does everyone know that conjoined twins will be dramatically less happy
than normal people, but everyone also knows that conjoined lives are so utterly
worthless that dangerous separation surgeries are an ethical imperative. And yet,
standing against the backdrop of our certainty about these matters are the twins
themselves. When we ask Lori and Reba how they feel about their situation, they
tell us that they wouldn’t have it any other way. In an exhaustive search of the
medical literature, the same medical historian found the “desire to remain
together to be so widespread among communicating conjoined twins as to be
practically universal.”
4 Something is terribly wrong here. But what?
There seem to be just two possibilities. Someone—either Lori and Reba, or
everyone else in the world—is making a dreadful mistake when they talk about
happiness. Because we are the everyone else in question, it is only natural that
we should be attracted to the former conclusion, dismissing the twins’ claim to
happiness with offhand rejoinders such as “Oh, they’re just saying that” or
“They may think they’re happy, but they’re not” or the ever popular “They don’t
know what happiness really is” (usually spoken as if we do). Fair enough. But
like the claims they dismiss, these rejoinders are also claims—scientific claims
and philosophical claims—that presume answers to questions that have vexed
scientists and philosophers for millennia. What are we all talking about when we
make such claims about happiness?
Dancing About Architecture
There are thousands of books on happiness, and most of them start by asking
what happiness really is. As readers quickly learn, this is approximately
equivalent to beginning a pilgrimage by marching directly into the first available
tar pit, because happiness really is nothing more or less than a word that we
word makers can use to indicate anything we please. The problem is that people
seem pleased to use this one word to indicate a host of different things, which
has created a tremendous terminological mess on which several fine scholarly
careers have been based. If one slops around in this mess long enough, one
comes to see that most disagreements about what happiness really is are
semantic disagreements about whether the word ought to be used to indicate this
or that, rather than scientific or philosophical disagreements about the nature of
this and that. What are the this and the that that happiness most often refers to?
The word happiness is used to indicate at least three related things, which we
might roughly call emotional happiness, moral happiness, and judgmental
happiness.
Feeling Happy
Emotional happiness is the most basic of the trio—so basic, in fact, that we
become tongue-tied when we try to define it, as though some bratty child had
just challenged us to say what the word the means and in the process made a
truly compelling case for corporal punishment. Emotional happiness is a phrase
for a feeling, an experience, a subjective state, and thus it has no objective
referent in the physical world. If we ambled down to the corner pub and met an
alien from another planet who asked us to define that feeling, we would either
point to the objects in the world that tend to bring it about, or we would mention
other feelings that it is like. In fact, this is the only thing we can do when we are
asked to define a subjective experience.
Consider, for instance, how we might define a very simple subjective
experience, such as yellow. You may think yellow is a color, but it isn’t. It’s a
psychological state. It is what human beings with working visual apparatus
experience when their eyes are struck by light with a wavelength of 580
nanometers. If our alien friend at the pub asked us to define what we were
experiencing when we claimed to be seeing yellow, we would probably start by
pointing to a school bus, a lemon, a rubber ducky, and saying, “See all those
things? The thing that is common to the visual experiences you have when you
look at them is called yellow.” Or we might try to define the experience called
yellow in terms of other experiences. “Yellow? Well, it is sort of like the
experience of orange, with a little less of the experience of red.” If the alien
confided that it could not figure out what the duck, the lemon, and the school bus
had in common, and that it had never had the experience of orange or red, then it
would be time to order another pint and change the topic to the universal sport of
ice hockey, because there is just no other way to define yellow. Philosophers like
to say that subjective states are “irreducible,” which is to say that nothing we
point to, nothing we can compare them with, and nothing we can say about their
neurological underpinnings can fully substitute for the experiences themselves.
5
The musician Frank Zappa is reputed to have said that writing about music is
like dancing about architecture, and so it is with talking about yellow. If our new
drinking buddy lacks the machinery for color vision, then our experience of
yellow is one that it will never share—or never know it shares—no matter how
well we point and talk.
6
Emotional happiness is like that. It is the feeling common to the feelings we
have when we see our new granddaughter smile for the first time, receive word
of a promotion, help a wayward tourist find the art museum, taste Belgian
chocolate toward the back of our tongue, inhale the scent of our lover’s
shampoo, hear that song we used to like so much in high school but haven’t
heard in years, touch our cheek to kitten fur, cure cancer, or get a really good
snootful of cocaine. These feelings are different, of course, but they also have
something in common. A piece of real estate is not the same as a share of stock,
which is not the same as an ounce of gold, but all are forms of wealth that
occupy different points on a scale of value. Similarly, the cocaine experience is
not the kitten-fur experience, which is not the promotion experience, but all are
forms of feeling that occupy different points on a scale of happiness. In each of
these instances, an encounter with something in the world generates a roughly
similar pattern of neural activity,
7 and thus it makes sense that there is something
common to our experiences of each—some conceptual coherence that has led
human beings to group this hodgepodge of occurrences together in the same
linguistic category for as long as anyone can remember. Indeed, when
researchers analyze how all the words in a language are related to the others,
they inevitably find that the positivity of the words—that is, the extent to which
they refer to the experience of happiness or unhappiness—is the single most
important determinant of their relationships.
8 Despite Tolstoy’s fine efforts, most
speakers consider war to be more closely related to vomit than it is to peace.
Happiness, then, is the you-know-what-I-mean feeling. If you are a human
being who lives in this century and shares some of my cultural conditioning,
then my pointing and comparing will have been effective and you will know
exactly which feeling I mean. If you are an alien who is still struggling with
yellow, then happiness is going to be a real challenge. But take heart: I would be
similarly challenged if you told me that on your planet there is a feeling common
to the acts of dividing numbers by three, banging one’s head lightly on a
doorknob, and releasing rhythmic bursts of nitrogen from any orifice at any time
except on Tuesday. I would have no idea what that feeling is, and I could only
learn the name and hope to use it politely in conversation. Because emotional
happiness is an experience, it can only be approximately defined by its
antecedents and by its relation to other experiences.
9 The poet Alexander Pope
devoted about a quarter of his Essay on Man to the topic of happiness, and
concluded with this question: “Who thus define it, say they more or less / Than
this, that happiness is happiness?”
10
Emotional happiness may resist our efforts to tame it by description, but when
we feel it, we have no doubt about its reality and its importance. Everyone who
has observed human behavior for more than thirty continuous seconds seems to
have noticed that people are strongly, perhaps even primarily, perhaps even
single-mindedly, motivated to feel happy. If there has ever been a group of
human beings who prefer despair to delight, frustration to satisfaction, and pain
to pleasure, they must be very good at hiding because no one has ever seen them.
People want to be happy, and all the other things they want are typically meant
to be means to that end. Even when people forgo happiness in the moment—by
dieting when they could be eating, or working late when they could be sleeping
—they are usually doing so in order to increase its future yield. The dictionary
tells us that to prefer is “to choose or want one thing rather than another because
it would be more pleasant,” which is to say that the pursuit of happiness is built
into the very definition of desire. In this sense, a preference for pain and
suffering is not so much a diagnosable psychiatric condition as it is an
oxymoron.
Psychologists have traditionally made striving toward happiness the
centerpiece of their theories of human behavior because they have found that if
they don’t, their theories don’t work so well. As Sigmund Freud wrote:
The question of the purpose of human life has been raised countless times;
it has never yet received a satisfactory answer and perhaps does not admit
of one. . . . We will therefore turn to the less ambitious question of what
men show by their behavior to be the purpose and intention of their lives.
What do they demand of life and wish to achieve in it? The answer to this
can hardly be in doubt. They strive after happiness; they want to become
happy and to remain so. This endeavor has two sides, a positive and a
negative aim. It aims, on the one hand, at an absence of pain and
displeasure, and, on the other, at the experiencing of strong feelings of
pleasure.
11
Freud was an articulate champion of this idea but not its originator, and the same
observation appears in some form or another in the psychological theories of
Plato, Aristotle, Hobbes, Mill, Bentham, and others. The philosopher and
mathematician Blaise Pascal was especially clear on this point:
All men seek happiness. This is without exception. Whatever different
means they employ, they all tend to this end. The cause of some going to
war, and of others avoiding it, is the same desire in both, attended with
different views. The will never takes the least step but to this object. This is
the motive of every action of every man, even of those who hang
themselves.
12
Feeling Happy Because
If every thinker in every century has recognized that people seek emotional
happiness, then how has so much confusion arisen over the meaning of the
word? One of the problems is that many people consider the desire for happiness
to be a bit like the desire for a bowel movement: something we all have, but not
something of which we should be especially proud. The kind of happiness they
have in mind is cheap and base—a vacuous state of “bovine contentment”
13
that
cannot possibly be the basis of a meaningful human life. As the philosopher John
Stuart Mill wrote, “It is better to be a human being dissatisfied than a pig
satisfied; better to be Socrates dissatisfied than a fool satisfied. And if the fool,
or the pig, are a different opinion, it is because they only know their own side of
the question.”
14
The philosopher Robert Nozick tried to illustrate the ubiquity of this belief by
describing a fictitious virtual-reality machine that would allow anyone to have
any experience they chose, and that would conveniently cause them to forget
that they were hooked up to the machine.
15 He concluded that no one would
willingly choose to get hooked up for the rest of his life because the happiness
he would experience with such a machine would not be happiness at all.
“Someone whose emotion is based upon egregiously unjustified and false
evaluations we will be reluctant to term happy, however he feels.”
16
In short,
emotional happiness is fine for pigs, but it is a goal unworthy of creatures as
sophisticated and capable as we.
Now, let’s take a moment to think about the difficult position that someone
who holds this view is in, and let’s guess how they might resolve it. If you
considered it perfectly tragic for life to be aimed at nothing more substantive and
significant than a feeling, and yet you could not help but notice that people spend
their days seeking happiness, then what might you be tempted to conclude?
Bingo! You might be tempted to conclude that the word happiness does not
indicate a good feeling but rather that it indicates a very special good feeling that
can only be produced by very special means—for example, by living one’s life
in a proper, moral, meaningful, deep, rich, Socratic, and non-piglike way. Now
that would be the kind of feeling one wouldn’t be ashamed to strive for. In fact,
the Greeks had a word for this kind of happiness—eudaimonia—which
translates literally as “good spirit” but which probably means something more
like “human flourishing” or “life well lived.” For Socrates, Plato, Aristotle,
Cicero, and even Epicurus (a name usually associated with piggish happiness),
the only thing that could induce that kind of happiness was the virtuous
performance of one’s duties, with the precise meaning of virtuous left for each
philosopher to work out for himself. The ancient Athenian legislator Solon
suggested that one could not say that a person was happy until the person’s life
had ended because happiness is the result of living up to one’s potential—and
how can we make such a judgment until we see how the whole thing turns out?
A few centuries later, Christian theologians added a nifty twist to this classical
conception: Happiness was not merely the product of a life of virtue but the
reward for a life of virtue, and that reward was not necessarily to be expected in
this lifetime.
17
For two thousand years philosophers have felt compelled to identify happiness
with virtue because that is the sort of happiness they think we ought to want.
And maybe they’re right. But if living one’s life virtuously is a cause of
happiness, it is not happiness itself, and it does us no good to obfuscate a
discussion by calling both the cause and the consequence by the same name. I
can produce pain by pricking your finger with a pin or by electrically stimulating
a particular spot in your brain, and the two pains will be identical feelings
produced by different means. It would do us no good to call the first of these
real pain and the other fake pain. Pain is pain, no matter what causes it. By
muddling causes and consequences, philosophers have been forced to construct
tortured defenses of some truly astonishing claims—for example, that a Nazi war
criminal who is basking on an Argentinean beach is not really happy, whereas
the pious missionary who is being eaten alive by cannibals is. “Happiness will
not tremble,” Cicero wrote in the first century BC, “however much it is
tortured.”
18 That statement may be admired for its moxie, but it probably doesn’t
capture the sentiments of the missionary who was drafted to play the role of the
entrée.
Happiness is a word that we generally use to indicate an experience and not
the actions that give rise to it. Does it make any sense to say, “After a day spent
killing his parents, Frank was happy”? Indeed it does. We hope there never was
such a person, but the sentence is grammatical, well formed, and easily
understood. Frank is a sick puppy, but if he says he is happy and he looks happy,
is there a principled reason to doubt him? Does it make any sense to say, “Sue
was happy to be in a coma”? No, of course not. If Sue is unconscious, she cannot
be happy no matter how many good deeds she did before calamity struck. Or
how about this one: “The computer obeyed all Ten Commandments and was
happy as a clam”? Again, sorry, but no. There is some remote possibility that
clams can be happy because there is some remote possibility that clams have the
capacity to feel. There may be something it is like to be a clam, but we can be
fairly certain that there is nothing it is like to be a computer, and hence the
computer cannot be happy no matter how many of its neighbor’s wives it failed
to covet.
19 Happiness refers to feelings, virtue refers to actions, and those actions
can cause those feelings. But not necessarily and not exclusively.
Feeling Happy About
The you-know-what-I-mean feeling is what people ordinarily mean by
happiness, but it is not the only thing they mean. If philosophers have muddled
the moral and emotional meanings of the word happiness, then psychologists
have muddled the emotional and judgmental meanings equally well and often.
For example, when a person says, “All in all, I’m happy about the way my life
has gone,” psychologists are generally willing to grant that the person is happy.
The problem is that people sometimes use the word happy to express their
beliefs about the merits of things, such as when they say, “I’m happy they caught
the little bastard who broke my windshield,” and they say things like this even
when they are not feeling anything vaguely resembling pleasure. How do we
know when a person is expressing a point of view rather than making a claim
about her subjective experience? When the word happy is followed by the words
that or about, speakers are usually trying to tell us that we ought to take the word
happy as an indication not of their feelings but rather of their stances. For
instance, when our spouse excitedly reveals that she has just been asked to spend
six months at the company’s new branch in Tahiti while we stay home and mind
the kids, we may say, “I’m not happy, of course, but I’m happy that you’re
happy.” Sentences such as these make high school English teachers apoplectic,
but they are actually quite sensible if we can just resist the temptation to take
every instance of the word happy as an instance of emotional happiness. Indeed,
the first time we utter the word, we are letting our spouse know that we are most
certainly not having the you-know-what-I-mean feeling (emotional happiness),
and the second time we utter the word we are indicating that we approve of the
fact that our spouse is (judgmental happiness). When we say we are happy about
or happy that, we are merely noting that something is a potential source of
pleasurable feeling, or a past source of pleasurable feeling, or that we realize it
ought to be a source of pleasurable feeling but that it sure doesn’t feel that way
at the moment. We are not actually claiming to be experiencing the feeling or
anything like it. It would be more appropriate for us to tell our spouse, “I am not
happy, but I understand you are, and I can even imagine that were I going to
Tahiti and were you remaining home with these juvenile delinquents, I’d be
experiencing happiness rather than admiring yours.” Of course, speaking like
this requires that we forsake all possibility of human companionship, so we opt
for the common shorthand and say we are happy about things even when we are
feeling thoroughly distraught. That’s fine, just as long as we keep in mind that
we don’t always mean what we say.
New Yeller
If we were to agree to reserve the word happiness to refer to that class of
subjective emotional experiences that are vaguely described as enjoyable or
pleasurable, and if we were to promise not to use that same word to indicate the
morality of the actions one might take to induce those experiences or to indicate
our judgments about the merits of those experiences, we might still wonder
whether the happiness one gets from helping a little old lady across the street
constitutes a different kind of emotional experience—bigger, better, deeper—
than the happiness one gets from eating a slice of banana-cream pie. Perhaps the
happiness one experiences as a result of good deeds feels different from that
other sort. In fact, while we’re at it, we might as well wonder whether the
happiness one gets from eating banana-cream pie feels different from the
happiness one gets from eating coconut-cream pie. Or from eating a slice of this
banana-cream pie rather than a slice of that one. How can we tell whether
subjective emotional experiences are different or the same?
The truth is that we can’t—no more than we can tell whether the yellow
experience we have when we look at a school bus is the same yellow experience
that others have when they look at the same school bus. Philosophers have flung
themselves headlong at this problem for quite some time with little more than
bruises to show for it,
20 because when all is said and done, the only way to
measure precisely the similarity of two things is for the person who is doing the
measuring to compare them side by side—that is, to experience them side by
side. And outside of science fiction, no one can actually have another person’s
experience. When we were children, our mothers taught us to call that lookingat-the-school-bus experience yellow, and being compliant little learners, we did
as we were told. We were pleased when it later turned out that everyone else in
the kindergarten claimed to experience yellow when they looked at a bus too.
But these shared labels may mask the fact that our actual experiences of yellow
are quite different, which is why many people do not discover that they are
color-blind until late in life when an ophthalmologist notices that they do not
make the distinctions that others seem to make. So while it seems rather unlikely
that human beings have radically different experiences when they look at a
school bus, when they hear a baby cry, or when they smell a former skunk, it is
possible, and if you want to believe it, then you have every right and no one who
values her time should try to reason with you.
Remembering Differences
I hope you aren’t giving up that easily. Perhaps the way to determine whether a
pair of happinesses actually feel different is to forget about comparing the
experiences of different minds and just ask someone who has experienced them
both. I may never know if my experience of yellow is different from your
experience of yellow, but surely I can tell that my experience of yellow is
different from my experience of blue when I mentally compare the two. Right?
Unfortunately, this strategy is more complicated than it looks. The nub of the
problem is that when we say that we are mentally comparing two of our own
subjective experiences, we are not actually having the two experiences at the
same time. Rather, we are at best having one of them, having already had the
other, and when an interrogator asks us which experience made us happier or
whether the two happinesses were the same, we are at best comparing something
we are currently experiencing with our memory of something we experienced in
the past. This would be unobjectionable were it not for the fact that memories—
especially memories of experiences—are notoriously unreliable, a fact that has
been demonstrated by both magicians and scientists. First the magic. Look at the
six royal cards in figure 4, and pick your favorite. No, don’t tell me. Keep it to
yourself. Just look at your card, and say the name once or twice (or write it
down) so that you’ll remember it for a few pages.
Fig. 4.
Good. Now consider how scientists have approached the problem of
remembered experience. In one study, researchers showed volunteers a color
swatch of the sort one might pick up in the paint aisle of the local hardware store
and allowed them to study it for five seconds.
21 Some volunteers then spent
thirty seconds describing the color (describers), while other volunteers did not
describe it (nondescribers). All volunteers were then shown a lineup of six color
swatches, one of which was the color they had seen thirty seconds earlier, and
were asked to pick out the original swatch. The first interesting finding was that
only 73 percent of the nondescribers were able to identify it accurately. In other
words, fewer than three quarters of these folks could tell if this experience of
yellow was the same as the experience of yellow they had had just a half-minute
before. The second interesting finding was that describing the color impaired
rather than improved performance on the identification task. Only 33 percent of
the describers were able to accurately identify the original color. Apparently, the
describers’ verbal descriptions of their experiences “overwrote” their memories
of the experiences themselves, and they ended up remembering not what they
had experienced but what they had said about what they experienced. And what
they had said was not clear and precise enough to help them recognize it when
they saw it again thirty seconds later.
Most of us have been in this position. We tell a friend that we were
disappointed with the house chardonnay at that trendy downtown bistro, or with
the way the string quartet handled our beloved Bartók’s Fourth, but the fact is
that we are unlikely to be recalling how the wine actually tasted or how the
quartet actually sounded when we make this pronouncement. Rather, we are
likely to be recalling that as we left the concert, we mentioned to our companion
that both the wine and the music had a promising start and a poor finish.
Experiences of chardonnays, string quartets, altruistic deeds, and banana-cream
pie are rich, complex, multidimensional, and impalpable. One of the functions of
language is to help us palp them—to help us extract and remember the important
features of our experiences so that we can analyze and communicate them later.
The New York Times online film archive stores critical synopses of films rather
than the films themselves, which would take up far too much space, be far too
difficult to search, and be thoroughly useless to anyone who wanted to know
what a film was like without actually seeing it. Experiences are like movies with
several added dimensions, and were our brains to store the full-length feature
films of our lives rather than their tidy descriptions, our heads would need to be
several times larger. And when we wanted to know or tell others whether the
tour of the sculpture garden was worth the price of the ticket, we would have to
replay the entire episode to find out. Every act of memory would require
precisely the amount of time that the event being remembered had originally
taken, which would permanently sideline us the first time someone asked if we
liked growing up in Chicago. So we reduce our experiences to words such as
happy, which barely do them justice but which are the things we can carry
reliably and conveniently with us into the future. The smell of the rose is
unresurrectable, but if we know it was good and we know it was sweet, then we
know to stop and smell the next one.
Perceiving Differences
Our remembrance of things past is imperfect, thus comparing our new happiness
with our memory of our old happiness is a risky way to determine whether two
subjective experiences are really different. So let’s try a slightly modified
approach. If we cannot remember the feeling of yesterday’s banana-cream pie
well enough to compare it with the feeling of today’s good deed, perhaps the
solution is to compare experiences that are so close together in time that we can
actually watch them change. For instance, if we were to do a version of the
color-swatch experiment in which we reduced the amount of time that passed
between the presentation of the original swatch and the presentation of the
lineup, surely people would have no problem identifying the original swatch,
right? So what if we reduced the time to, say, twenty-five seconds? Or fifteen?
Ten? How about a fraction of one? And what if, as a bonus, we made the
identification task a bit easier by showing volunteers a color swatch for a few
seconds, taking it away for just a fraction of a second, and then showing them
one test swatch (instead of a lineup of six) and asking them to tell us whether the
single test swatch is the same as the original. No intervening verbal description
to confuse their memories, no rival test swatches to confuse their eyes, and only
a sliver of a slice of a moment between the presentation of the original and test
swatches. Gosh. Given how simple we’ve made the task, shouldn’t we predict
that everyone will pass it with, um, flying colors?
Yes, but only if we enjoy being wrong. In a study conceptually similar to the
one we just designed, researchers asked volunteers to look at a computer screen
and read some odd-looking text.
22 What made the text so odd was that it
alternated between uppercase and lowercase, so that it lOoKeD lIkE tHiS. Now,
as you may know, when people seem to be staring directly at something, their
eyes are actually flickering slightly away from the thing they are staring at three
or four times per second, which is why eyeballs look jiggly if you study them up
close. The researchers used an eye-tracking device that tells a computer when
the volunteer’s eyes are fixated on the object on the screen and when they have
briefly jiggled away. Whenever the volunteers’ eyeballs jiggled away from the
text for a fraction of a second, the computer played a trick on them: It changed
the case of every letter in the text they were reading so that the text that lOoKeD
lIkE tHiS suddenly LoOkEd LiKe ThIs. Amazingly, volunteers did not notice
that the text was alternating between different styles several times each second
as they read it. Subsequent research has shown that people fail to notice a wide
range of these “visual discontinuities,” which is why filmmakers can suddenly
change the style of a woman’s dress or the color of a man’s hair from one cut to
the next, or cause an item on a table to disappear entirely, all without ever
waking the audience.
23
Interestingly, when people are asked to predict whether
they would notice such visual discontinuities, they are quite confident that they
would.
24
And it isn’t just the subtle changes we miss. Even dramatic changes to the
appearance of a scene are sometimes overlooked. In an experiment taken straight
from the pages of Candid Camera, researchers arranged for a researcher to
approach pedestrians on a college campus and ask for directions to a particular
building.
25 While the pedestrian and the researcher conferred over the
researcher’s map, two construction workers, each holding one end of a large
door, rudely cut between them, temporarily obstructing the pedestrian’s view of
the researcher. As the construction workers passed, the original researcher
crouched down behind the door and walked off with the construction workers,
while a new researcher, who had been hiding behind the door all along, took his
place and picked up the conversation. The original and substitute researchers
were of different heights and builds and had noticeably different voices, haircuts,
and clothing. You would have no trouble telling them apart if they were standing
side by side. So what did the Good Samaritans who had stopped to help a lost
tourist make of this switcheroo? Not much. In fact, most of the pedestrians failed
to notice—failed to notice that the person to whom they were talking had
suddenly been transformed into an entirely new individual.
Are we to believe, then, that people cannot tell when their experience of the
world has changed right before their eyes? Of course not. If we take this research
to its logical extreme we end up as extremists generally do: mired in absurdity
and handing out pamphlets. If we could never tell when our experience of the
world had changed, how could we know that something was moving, how could
we tell whether to stop or go at an intersection, and how could we count beyond
one? These experiments tell us that the experiences of our former selves are
sometimes as opaque to us as the experiences of other people, but more
important, they tell us when this is most and least likely to be the case. What was
the critical ingredient that allowed each of the foregoing studies to produce the
results it did? In each instance, volunteers were not attending to their own
experience of a particular aspect of a stimulus at the moment of its transition. In
the color-swatch study, the swatches were swapped in another room during the
thirty-second break; in the reading study, the text was changed when the
volunteer’s eye had momentarily jiggled away; in the door study, the researchers
switched places only when a large piece of wood was obstructing the volunteer’s
view. We would not expect these studies to show the same results if burnt umber
became fluorescent mauve, or if this became t h a t, or if an accountant from
Poughkeepsie became Queen Elizabeth II while the volunteer was looking right
at her, or him, or whatever. And indeed, research has shown that when
volunteers are paying close attention to a stimulus at the precise moment that it
changes, they do notice that change quickly and reliably.
26 The point of these
studies is not that we are hopelessly inept at detecting changes in our experience
of the world but rather that unless our minds are keenly focused on a particular
aspect of that experience at the very moment it changes, we will be forced to rely
on our memories—forced to compare our current experience to our recollection
of our former experience—in order to detect the change.
Magicians have known all this for centuries, of course, and have traditionally
used their knowledge to spare the rest of us the undue burden of money. A few
pages back you chose a card from a group of six. What I didn’t tell you at the
time was that I have powers far beyond those of mortal men, and therefore I
knew which card you were going to pick before you picked it. To prove it, I have
removed your card from the group. Take a look at figure 5 and tell me I’m not
amazing. How did I do it? This trick is much more exciting, of course, when you
don’t know beforehand that it’s a trick and you don’t have to wade through
several pages of text to hear the punchline. And it doesn’t work at all if you
compare the two figures side by side, because you instantly see that none of the
cards in figure 4 (including the one you picked) appears in figure 5. But when
there is some possibility that the magician knows your chosen card—either by
sleight of hand, shrewd deduction, or telepathy—and when your jiggly eyes are
not looking directly at the first group of six as it transforms into the second
group of five, the illusion can be quite powerful. Indeed, when the trick first
appeared on a website, some of the smartest scientists I know hypothesized that
a newfangled technology was allowing the server to guess their card by tracking
the speed and acceleration of their keystrokes. I personally removed my hand
from the mouse just to make sure that its subtle movements were not being
measured. It did not occur to me until the third time through that while I had
seen the first group of six cards, I had only remembered my verbal label for the
card I had chosen, and hence had failed to notice that all the other cards had
changed as well.
27 What’s important to note for our purposes is that card tricks
like this work for precisely the same reason that people find it difficult to say
how happy they were in their previous marriages.
Fig. 5.
Happy Talk
Reba and Lori Schappell claim to be happy, and that disturbs us. We are rocksolid certain that it just can’t be true, and yet, it looks as though there is no
foolproof method for comparing their happiness with our own. If they say they
are happy, then on what basis can we conclude that they are wrong? Well, we
might try the more lawyerly tactic of questioning their ability to know, evaluate,
or describe their own experience. “They may think they’re happy,” we could say,
“but that’s only because they don’t know what happiness really is.” In other
words, because Lori and Reba have never had many of the experiences that we
singletons have had—spinning cartwheels in a meadow, snorkeling along the
Great Barrier Reef, strolling down the avenue without drawing a crowd—we
suspect they may have an impoverished background of happy experiences that
leads them to evaluate their lives differently than the rest of us would. If, for
instance, we were to give the twins a birthday cake, hand them an eight-point
rating scale (which can be thought of as an artificial language with eight words
for different intensities of happiness), and ask them to report on their subjective
experience, they might tell us they felt a joyful eight. But isn’t it likely that their
eight and our eight represent fundamentally different levels of joy, and that their
use of the eight-word language is distorted by their unenviable situation, which
has never allowed them to discover how happy a person can really be? Lori and
Reba may be using the eight-word language differently than we do because for
them, birthday cake is as good as it gets. They label their happiest experience
with the happiest word in the eight-word language, naturally, but this should not
cause us to overlook the fact that the experience they call eight is an experience
that we might call four and a half. In short, they don’t mean happy the way we
mean happy. Figure 6 shows how an impoverished experiential background can
cause language to be squished so that the full range of verbal labels is used to
describe a restricted range of experiences. By this account, when the twins say
they are ecstatic, they are actually feeling what we feel when we say we are
pleased.
Fig. 6. The language-squishing hypothesis suggests that when given a birthday cake, Lori and Reba
feel exactly as you feel but talk about it differently.
Squishing Language
The nice things about this language-squishing hypothesis are (a) it suggests that
everyone everywhere has the same subjective experience when they receive a
birthday cake even if they describe that experience differently, which makes the
world a rather simple place to live and bake; and (b) it allows us to go on
believing that despite what they say about themselves, Lori and Reba aren’t
really happy after all, and thus we are perfectly justified in preferring our lives to
theirs. The less nice things about this hypothesis are numerous, and if we worry
that Lori and Reba use the eight-word language differently than we do because
they have never enjoyed the thrill of a cartwheel, then we had better worry about
a few other matters too. For instance, we had better worry that we have never
felt the overwhelming sense of peace and security that comes from knowing that
a beloved sibling is always by our side, that we will never lose her friendship no
matter what kind of crummy stuff we may say or do on a bad day, that there will
always be someone who knows us as well as we know ourselves, shares our
hopes, worries our worries, and so on. If they haven’t had our experiences, then
we haven’t had theirs either, and it is entirely possible that we are the ones with
the squished language—that when we say we feel overjoyed, we have no idea
what we are talking about because we have never experienced the companionate
love, the blissful union, the unadulterated agape that Lori and Reba have. And all
of us—you, me, Lori, Reba—had better worry that there are experiences far
better than those we have had so far—the experience of flying without a plane,
of seeing our children win Academy Awards and Pulitzer Prizes, of meeting God
and learning the secret handshake—and that everyone’s use of the eight-word
language is defective and that no one knows what happiness really is. By that
reasoning, we should all follow Solon’s advice and never say we are happy until
we are dead because otherwise, if the real thing ever does come along, we will
have used up the word and won’t have any way to tell the newspapers about it.
But these are just the preliminary worries. There are more. If we wanted to do
a thought experiment whose results would demonstrate once and for all that Lori
and Reba just don’t know what happiness really is, perhaps we should imagine
that with a wave of a magic wand we could split them apart and allow them to
experience life as singletons. If after a few weeks on their own they came to us,
repudiated their former claims, and begged not to be changed back to their
former state, shouldn’t that convince us, as it has apparently convinced them,
that they were previously confusing their fours and eights? We’ve all known
someone who had a religious conversion, went through a divorce, or survived a
heart attack and now claims that her eyes are open for the very first time—that
despite what she thought and said in her previous incarnation, she was never
really happy until now. Are the people who have undergone such marvelous
metamorphoses to be taken at their word?
Not necessarily. Consider a study in which volunteers were shown some quizshow questions and asked to estimate the likelihood that they could answer them
correctly. Some volunteers were shown only the questions (the question-only
group), while others were shown both the questions and the answers (the
question-and-answer group). Volunteers in the question-only group thought the
questions were quite difficult, while those in the question-and-answer group—
who saw both the questions (“What did Philo T. Farnsworth invent?”) and the
answers (“The television set”)—believed that they could have answered the
questions easily had they never seen the answers at all. Apparently, once
volunteers knew the answers, the questions seemed simple (“Of course it was the
television—everyone knows that!”), and the volunteers were no longer able to
judge how difficult the questions would seem to someone who did not share
their knowledge of the answers.
28
Studies such as these demonstrate that once we have an experience, we cannot
simply set it aside and see the world as we would have seen it had the experience
never happened. To the judge’s dismay, the jury cannot disregard the
prosecutor’s snide remarks. Our experiences instantly become part of the lens
through which we view our entire past, present, and future, and like any lens,
they shape and distort what we see. This lens is not like a pair of spectacles that
we can set on the nightstand when we find it convenient to do so but like a pair
of contacts that are forever affixed to our eyeballs with superglue. Once we learn
to read, we can never again see letters as mere inky squiggles. Once we learn
about free jazz, we can never again hear Ornette Coleman’s saxophone as a
source of noise. Once we learn that van Gogh was a mental patient, or that Ezra
Pound was an anti-Semite, we can never again view their art in the same way. If
Lori and Reba were separated for a few weeks, and if they told us that they were
happier now than they used to be, they might be right. But they might not. They
might just be telling us that the singletons they had become now viewed being
conjoined with as much distress as those of us who have always been singletons
do. Even if they could remember what they thought, said, and did as conjoined
twins, we would expect their more recent experience as singletons to color their
evaluation of the conjoined experience, leaving them unable to say with certainty
how conjoined twins who had never been singletons actually feel. In a sense, the
experience of separation would make them us, and thus they would be in the
same difficult position that we are in when we try to imagine the experience of
being conjoined. Becoming singletons would affect their views of the past in
ways that they could not simply set aside. All of this means that when people
have new experiences that lead them to claim that their language was squished—
that they were not really happy even though they said so and thought so at the
time—they can be mistaken. In other words, people can be wrong in the present
when they say they were wrong in the past.
Stretching Experience
Lori and Reba have not done many of the things that for the rest of us give rise
to feelings near the top of the happiness scale—cartwheels, scuba diving, name
your poison—and surely this must make a difference. If impoverished
experiential backgrounds don’t necessarily squish language, then what do they
do instead? Let’s assume that Lori and Reba really do have an impoverished
experiential background against which to evaluate something as simple as, say,
the dutiful presentation of a chocolate cake on their birthday. One possibility is
that their impoverished experiential background would squish their language.
But another possibility is that their impoverished experiential background would
not squish their language so much as it would stretch their experience—that is,
when they say eight they mean exactly the same thing we mean when we say
eight because when they receive a birthday cake they feel exactly the same way
that the rest of us feel when we do underwater cartwheels along the Great Barrier
Reef. Figure 7 illustrates the experience-stretching hypothesis.
Fig. 7. The experience-stretching hypothesis suggests that when given a birthday cake, Lori and Reba
talk about their feelings the same way you do but feel something different.
Experience stretching is a bizarre phrase but not a bizarre idea. We often say
of others who claim to be happy despite circumstances that we believe should
preclude it that “they only think they’re happy because they don’t know what
they’re missing.” Okay, sure, but that’s the point. Not knowing what we’re
missing can mean that we are truly happy under circumstances that would not
allow us to be happy once we have experienced the missing thing. It does not
mean that those who don’t know what they’re missing are less happy than those
who have it. Examples abound in my life and yours, so let’s talk about mine. I
occasionally smoke a cigar because it makes me happy, and my wife
occasionally fails to understand why I must have a cigar to be happy when she
can apparently be just as happy without one (and even happier without me
having one). But the experience-stretching hypothesis suggests that I too could
have been happy without cigars if only I had not experienced their
pharmacological mysteries in my wayward youth. But I did, and because I did I
now know what I am missing when I don’t, hence that glorious moment during
my spring vacation when I am reclining in a lawn chair on the golden sands of
Kauai, sipping Talisker and watching the sun slip slowly into a taffeta sea, is just
not quite perfect if I don’t also have something stinky and Cuban in my mouth. I
could press both my luck and my marriage by advancing the language-squishing
hypothesis, carefully explaining to my wife that because she has never
experienced the pungent earthiness of a Montecristo no. 4, she has an
impoverished experiential background and therefore does not know what
happiness really is. I would lose, of course, because I always do, but in this case
I would deserve it. Doesn’t it make better sense to say that by learning to enjoy
cigars I changed my experiential background and inadvertently ruined all future
experiences that do not include them? The Hawaiian sunset was an eight until
the Hawaiian sunset à la stogie took its place and reduced the cigarless sunset to
a mere seven.
29
But we’ve talked enough about me and my vacation. Let’s talk about me and
my guitar. I’ve played the guitar for years, and I get very little pleasure from
executing an endless repetition of three-chord blues. But when I first learned to
play as a teenager, I would sit upstairs in my bedroom happily strumming those
three chords until my parents banged on the ceiling and invoked their rights
under the Geneva Convention. I suppose we could try the language-squishing
hypothesis here and say that my eyes have been opened by my improved musical
abilities and that I now realize I was not really happy in those teenage days. But
doesn’t it seem more reasonable to invoke the experience-stretching hypothesis
and say that an experience that once brought me pleasure no longer does? A man
who is given a drink of water after being lost in the Mojave Desert for a week
may at that moment rate his happiness as eight. A year later, the same drink
might induce him to feel no better than two. Are we to believe that he was wrong
about how happy he was when he took that life-giving sip from a rusty canteen,
or is it more reasonable to say that a sip of water can be a source of ecstasy or a
source of moisture depending on one’s experiential background? If
impoverished experiential backgrounds squish our language rather than stretch
our experience, then children who say they are delighted by peanut butter and
jelly are just plain wrong, and they will admit it later in life when they get their
first bite of goose liver, at which time they will be right, until they get older and
begin to get heartburn from fatty foods, at which time they will realize that they
were wrong then too. Every day would be a repudiation of the day before, as we
experienced greater and greater happiness and realized how thoroughly deluded
we were until, conveniently enough, now.
So which hypothesis is correct? We can’t say. What we can say is that all
claims of happiness are claims from someone’s point of view—from the
perspective of a single human being whose unique collection of past experiences
serves as a context, a lens, a background for her evaluation of her current
experience. As much as the scientist might wish for it, there isn’t a view from
nowhere. Once we have an experience, we are thereafter unable to see the world
as we did before. Our innocence is lost and we cannot go home again. We may
remember what we thought or said (though not necessarily), and we may
remember what we did (though not necessarily that either), but the likelihood is
depressingly slim that we can resurrect our experience and then evaluate it as we
would have back then. In some ways, the cigar-smoking, guitar-playing, pâtéeating people we become have no more authority to speak on behalf of the
people we used to be than do outside observers. The separated twins may be able
to tell us how they now feel about having been conjoined, but they cannot tell us
how conjoined twins who have never experienced separation feel about it. No
one knows if Reba’s and Lori’s eight feels like our eight, and that includes all
the Rebas and Loris that will ever be.
Onward
On the morning of May 15, 1916, the arctic explorer Ernest Shackleton began
the last leg of one of history’s most grueling adventures. His ship, the
Endurance, had sunk in the Weddell Sea, stranding him and his crew on
Elephant Island. After seven months, Shackleton and five of his crewmen
boarded a small lifeboat in which they spent three weeks crossing eight hundred
miles of frigid, raging ocean. Upon reaching South Georgia Island, the starving,
frostbitten men prepared to disembark and cross the island on foot in the hope of
reaching a whaling station on the other side. No one had ever survived that trek.
Facing almost certain death that morning, Shackleton wrote:
We passed through the narrow mouth of the cove with the ugly rocks and
waving kelp close on either side, turned to the east, and sailed merrily up
the bay as the sun broke through the mists and made the tossing waters
sparkle around us. We were a curious-looking party on that bright morning,
but we were feeling happy. We even broke into song, and, but for our
Robinson Crusoe appearance, a casual observer might have taken us for a
picnic party sailing in a Norwegian fjord or one of the beautiful sounds of
the west coast of New Zealand.
30
Could Shackleton really have meant what he said? Could his happy be our
happy, and is there any way to tell? As we’ve seen, happiness is a subjective
experience that is difficult to describe to ourselves and to others, thus evaluating
people’s claims about their own happiness is an exceptionally thorny business.
But don’t worry—because before business gets better, it gets a whole lot
thornier.
CHAPTER 3
Outside Looking In
Go to your bosom;
Knock there, and ask your heart what it doth know.
Shakespeare, Measure for Measure
THERE AREN’T MANY JOKES about psychology professors, so we tend to cherish
the few we have. Here’s one. What do psychology professors say when they pass
each other in the hallway? “Hi, you’re fine, how am I?” I know, I know. The
joke isn’t that funny. But the reason it’s supposed to be funny is that people
shouldn’t know how others are feeling but they should know how they’re feeling
themselves. “How are you?” is overly familiar for the same reason that “How am
I?” is overly strange. And yet, strange as it is, there are times when people seem
not to know their own hearts. When conjoined twins claim to be happy, we have
to wonder if perhaps they just think they’re happy. That is, they may believe
what they’re saying, but what they’re saying may be wrong. Before we can
decide whether to accept people’s claims about their happiness, we must first
decide whether people can, in principle, be mistaken about what they feel. We
can be wrong about all sorts of things—the price of soybeans, the life span of
dust mites, the history of flannel—but can we be wrong about our own
emotional experience? Can we believe we are feeling something we aren’t? Are
there really folks out there who can’t accurately answer the world’s most
familiar question?
Yes, and you’ll find one in the mirror. Read on.
Dazed and Confused
But not just yet. Before you read on, I challenge you to stop and have a nice long
look at your thumb. Now, I will wager that you did not accept my challenge. I
will wager that you went right on reading because looking at your thumb is so
easy that it makes for rather pointless sport—everyone bats a thousand and the
game is called on account of boredom. But if looking at your thumb seems
beneath you, just consider what actually has to happen for us to see an object in
our environment—a thumb, a glazed doughnut, or a rabid wolverine. In the tiny
gap between the time that the light reflected from the surface of the object
reaches our eyes and the time that we become aware of the object’s identity, our
brains must extract and analyze the object’s features and compare them with
information in our memory to determine what the thing is and what we ought to
do about it. This is complicated stuff—so complicated that no scientist yet
understands precisely how it happens and no computer can simulate the trick—
but it is just the sort of complicated stuff that brains do with exceptional speed
and accuracy. In fact, they perform these analyses with such proficiency that we
have the experience of simply looking leftward, seeing a wolverine, feeling
afraid, and preparing to do all further analysis from the safety of a sycamore.
Think for a moment about how looking ought to happen. If you were
designing a brain from scratch, you would probably design it so that it first
identified objects in its environment (“Sharp teeth, brown fur, weird little
snorting sound, hot drool—why, that’s a rabid wolverine!”) and then figured out
what to do (“Leaving seems like a splendid idea about now”). But human brains
were not designed from scratch. Rather, their most critical functions were
designed first, and their less critical functions were added on like bells and
whistles as the millennia passed, which is why the really important parts of your
brain (e.g., the ones that control your breathing) are down at the bottom and the
parts you could probably live without (e.g., the ones that control your temper) sit
atop them, like ice cream on a cone. As it turns out, running with great haste
from rabid wolverines is much more important than knowing what they are.
Indeed, actions such as running away are so vitally important to the survival of
terrestrial mammals like the ones from whom we are descended that evolution
took no chances and designed the brain to answer the “What should I do?”
question before the “What is it?” question.
1 Experiments have demonstrated that
the moment we encounter an object, our brains instantly analyze just a few of its
key features and then use the presence or absence of these features to make one
very fast and very simple decision: “Is this object an important thing to which I
ought to respond right now?”
2 Rabid wolverines, crying babies, hurled rocks,
beckoning mates, cowering prey—these things count for a lot in the game of
survival, which requires that we take immediate action when we happen upon
them and do not dally to contemplate the finer points of their identities. As such,
our brains are designed to decide first whether objects count and to decide later
what those objects are. This means that when you turn your head to the left,
there is a fraction of a second during which your brain does not know that it is
seeing a wolverine but does know that it is seeing something scary.
But how can that be? How can we know something is scary if we don’t know
what it is? To understand how this can happen, just consider how you would go
about identifying a person who is walking toward you across a vast expanse of
desert. The first thing to catch your eye would be a small flicker of motion on
the horizon. As you stared, you would soon notice that the motion was that of an
object moving toward you. As it came closer, you would see that the motion was
biological, then you would see that the biological object was a biped, then a
human, then a female, then a fat human female with dark hair and a Budweiser
T-shirt, and then—hey, what’s Aunt Mabel doing in the Sahara? Your
identification of Aunt Mabel would progress—that is, it would begin quite
generally and become more specific over time, until finally it terminated in a
family reunion. Similarly, the identification of a wolverine at your elbow
progresses over time—albeit just a few milliseconds—and it too progresses from
the general to the specific. Research demonstrates that there is enough
information in the very early, very general stages of this identification process to
decide whether an object is scary, but not enough information to know what the
object is. Once our brains decide that they are in the presence of something
scary, they instruct our glands to produce hormones that create a state of
heightened physiological arousal—blood pressure rises, heart rate increases,
pupils contract, muscles tense—which prepares us to spring into action. Before
our brains have finished the full-scale analysis that will allow us to know that the
object is a wolverine, they have already put our bodies into their ready-to-runaway modes—all pumped up and raring to go.
The fact that we can feel aroused without knowing exactly what it is that has
aroused us has important implications for our ability to identify our own
emotions.
3 For example, researchers studied the reactions of some young men
who were crossing a long, narrow, suspension bridge constructed of wooden
boards and wire cables that rocked and swayed 230 feet above the Capilano
River in North Vancouver.
4 A young woman approached each man and asked if
he would mind completing a survey, and after he did so, the woman gave the
man her telephone number and offered to explain her survey project in greater
detail if he called. Now, here’s the catch: The woman approached some of these
young men as they were crossing the bridge and others only after they had
crossed it. As it turned out, the men who had met the woman as they were
crossing the bridge were much more likely to call her in the coming days. Why?
The men who met the woman in the middle of a shaky, swaying suspension
bridge were experiencing intense physiological arousal, which they would
normally have identified as fear. But because they were being interviewed by an
attractive woman, they mistakenly identified their arousal as sexual attraction.
Apparently, feelings that one interprets as fear in the presence of a sheer drop
may be interpreted as lust in the presence of a sheer blouse—which is simply to
say that people can be wrong about what they are feeling.
5
Comfortably Numb
The novelist Graham Greene wrote: “Hatred seems to operate the same glands as
love.”
6
Indeed, research shows that physiological arousal can be interpreted in a
variety of ways, and our interpretation of our arousal depends on what we
believe caused it. It is possible to mistake fear for lust, apprehension for guilt,
7
shame for anxiety.
8 But just because we don’t always know what to call our
emotional experience doesn’t mean that we don’t know what that experience is
like, does it? Perhaps we can’t say its name and perhaps we don’t know what
made it happen, but we always know what it feels like, right? Is it possible to
believe we are feeling something when we are actually feeling nothing at all?
The philosopher Daniel Dennett put the question this way:
Suppose someone is given the post-hypnotic suggestion that upon
awakening he will have a pain in his wrist. If the hypnosis works, is it a
case of pain, hypnotically induced, or merely a case of a person who has
been induced to believe he has a pain? If one answers that the hypnosis has
induced real pain, suppose the post-hypnotic suggestion had been: “On
awakening you will believe you have a pain in the wrist.” If this suggestion
works, is the circumstance just like the previous one? Isn’t believing you
are in pain tantamount to being in pain?
9
At first blush, the idea that we can mistakenly believe we are feeling pain
seems preposterous, if only because the distinction between feeling pain and
believing one is feeling pain looks so suspiciously like an artifact of language.
But give this idea a second blush while considering the following scenario. You
are sitting at a sidewalk café, sipping a tangy espresso and contentedly browsing
the Sunday newspaper. People are strolling by and taking in the fine morning,
and the amorous activities of a young couple at a nearby table attest to the
eternal wonder of spring. The song of a scarlet tanager punctuates the yeasty
scent of new croissants that wafts from the bakery. The article you are reading
on campaign-finance reform is quite interesting and all is well—until suddenly
you realize you are now reading the third paragraph, that somewhere in the
middle of the first you started sniffing baked goods and listening to bird chirps,
and that you now have absolutely no idea what the story you are reading is
about. Did you actually read that second paragraph, or did you merely dream it?
You take a quick look back and, sure enough, all the words are familiar. As you
read them again you can even recall hearing them spoken a few moments ago by
that narrator in your head who sounds astonishingly like you and whose voice
was submerged for a paragraph or two beneath the sweet distractions of the
season.
Two questions confront us. First, did you experience the paragraph the first
time you read it? Second, if so, did you know you were experiencing it? The
answers are yes and no, respectively. You experienced the paragraph and that’s
why it was so familiar to you when you went back through it. Had there been an
eye tracker at your table, it would have revealed that you did not stop reading at
any point. In fact, you were smack-dab in the middle of reading’s smooth
movements when suddenly you caught yourself . . . caught yourself . . . caught
yourself what? Experiencing without being aware that you were experiencing—
that’s what. Now, let me slow down for a moment and tread carefully around
these words lest you start listening for the high-pitched tones of the indigo
bunting. The word experience comes from the Latin experientia, meaning “to
try,” whereas the word aware comes from the Greek horan, meaning “to see.”
Experience implies participation in an event, whereas awareness implies
observation of an event. The two words can normally be substituted in ordinary
conversation without much damage, but they are differently inflected. One gives
us the sense of being engaged, whereas the other gives us the sense of being
cognizant of that engagement. One denotes reflection while the other denotes the
thing being reflected. In fact, awareness can be thought of as a kind of
experience of our own experience.
10 When two people argue about whether their
dogs are conscious, one is usually using that badly bruised term to mean
“capable of experience” while the other is using it to mean “capable of
awareness.” Dogs are not rocks, one argues, so of course they are conscious.
Dogs are not people, the other replies, so of course they are not conscious. Both
arguers are probably right. Dogs probably do have an experience of yellow and
sweet: There is something it is like to be a dog standing before a sweet, yellow
thing, even if human beings can never know what that something is. But the
experiencing dog is probably not simultaneously aware that it is having that
experience, thinking as it chews, “Damned fine ladyfinger.”
The distinction between experience and awareness is elusive because most of
the time they hang together so nicely. We pop a ladyfinger into our mouths, we
experience sweetness, we know we are experiencing sweetness, and nothing
about any of this seems even remotely challenging. But if the typically tight
bond between experience and awareness leads us to suspect that the distinction
between them is an exercise in hand waving, you need only rewind the tape a bit
and imagine yourself back at the café at precisely the moment that your eyes
were running across the newsprint and your mind was about to mosey off to
contemplate the sounds and smells around you. Now hit play and imagine that
your mind wanders away, gets lost, and never comes back. That’s right. Imagine
that as you experience the newspaper article, your awareness becomes
permanently unbound from your experience, and you never catch yourself
drifting away—never return to the moment with a start to discover that you are
reading. The young couple at the nearby table stop pawing each other long
enough to lean over and ask you for the latest news on the campaign-finance
reform bill, and you patiently explain that you could not possibly know that
because, as they would surely see if only they would pay attention to something
other than their glands, you are happily listening to the sounds of spring and not
reading a newspaper. The young couple is perplexed by this response, because
as far as they can see, you do indeed have a newspaper in your hands and your
eyeballs are, in fact, running rapidly across the page even as you deny it. After a
bit of whispering and one more smooch, they decide to run a test to determine
whether you are telling the truth. “Sorry to bother you again, but we are
desperate to know how many senators voted for the campaign-finance reform
bill last week and wonder if you would be good enough to hazard a guess?”
Because you are sniffing croissants, listening to bird calls, and not reading a
newspaper, you have no idea how many senators voted for the bill. But it
appears that the only way to get these strange people to mind their own business
is to tell them something, so you pull a number out of thin air. “How about fortyone?” you offer. And to no one’s astonishment but your own, the number is
exactly right.
This scenario may seem too bizarre to be real (after all, how likely is it that
forty-one senators would actually vote for campaign-finance reform?), but it is
both. Our visual experience and our awareness of that experience are generated
by different parts of our brains, and as such, certain kinds of brain damage
(specifically, lesions to the primary visual cortical receiving area known as V1)
can impair one without impairing the other, causing experience and awareness to
lose their normally tight grip on each other. For example, people who suffer
from the condition known as blindsight have no awareness of seeing, and will
truthfully tell you that they are completely blind.
11 Brain scans lend credence to
their claims by revealing diminished activity in the areas normally associated
with awareness of visual experience. On the other hand, the same scans reveal
relatively normal activity in the areas associated with vision.
12 So if we flash a
light on a particular spot on the wall and ask the blindsighted person if she saw
the light we just flashed, she tells us, “No, of course not. As you might infer
from the presence of the guide dog, I’m blind.” But if we ask her to make a
guess about where the light might have appeared—just take a stab at it, say
anything, point randomly if you like—she “guesses” correctly far more often
than we would expect by chance. She is seeing, if by seeing we mean
experiencing the light and acquiring knowledge about its location, but she is
blind, if by blind we mean that she is not aware of having seen. Her eyes are
projecting the movie of reality on the little theater screen in her head, but the
audience is in the lobby getting popcorn.
This dissociation between awareness and experience can cause the same sort
of spookiness with regard to our emotions. Some people seem to be keenly
aware of their moods and feelings, and may even have a novelist’s gift for
describing their every shade and flavor. Others of us come equipped with a
somewhat more basic emotional vocabulary that, much to the chagrin of our
romantic partners, consists primarily of good, not so good, and I already told
you. If our expressive deficit is so profound and protracted that it even occurs
outside of football season, we may be diagnosed with alexithymia, which
literally means “absence of words to describe emotional states.” When
alexithymics are asked what they are feeling, they usually say, “Nothing,” and
when they are asked how they are feeling, they usually say, “I don’t know.”
Alas, theirs is not a malady that can be cured by a pocket thesaurus or a short
course in word power, because alexithymics do not lack the traditional affective
lexicon so much as they lack introspective awareness of their emotional states.
They seem to have feelings, they just don’t seem to know about them. For
instance, when researchers show volunteers emotionally evocative pictures of
amputations and car wrecks, the physiological responses of alexithymics are
indistinguishable from those of normal people. But when they are asked to make
verbal ratings of the unpleasantness of those pictures, alexithymics are decidedly
less capable than normal people of distinguishing them from pictures of
rainbows and puppies.
13 Some evidence suggests that alexithymia is caused by a
dysfunction of the anterior cingulate cortex, which is a part of the brain known
to mediate our awareness of many things, including our inner states.
14 Just as the
decoupling of awareness and visual experience can give rise to blindsight, so the
decoupling of awareness and emotional experience can give rise to what we
might call numbfeel. Apparently, it is possible—at least for some of the people
some of the time—to be happy, sad, bored, or curious, and not know it.
Warm the Happyometer
Once upon a time there was a bearded God who made a small, flat earth, and
pasted it in the very middle of the sky so that human beings would be at the
center of everything. Then physics came along and complicated the picture with
big bangs, quarks, branes, and superstrings, and the payoff for all that critical
analysis is that now, several hundred years later, most people have no idea where
they are. Psychology has also created problems where once there were none by
exposing the flaws in our intuitive understandings of ourselves. Maybe the
universe has several small dimensions tucked inside the large ones, maybe time
will eventually stand still or flow backward, and maybe folks like us were never
meant to fathom a bit of it. But one thing we can always count on is our own
experience. The philosopher and mathematician René Descartes concluded that
our experience is the only thing about which we may be completely sure and that
everything else we think we know is merely an inference from that. And yet, we
have seen that when we say with moderate precision what we mean by words
such as happiness, we still can’t be sure that two people who claim to be happy
are having the same experience, or that our current experience of happiness is
really different from our past experience of happiness, or that we are having an
experience of happiness at all. If the goal of science is to make us feel awkward
and ignorant in the presence of things we once understood perfectly well, then
psychology has succeeded above all others.
But like happiness, science is one of those words that means too many things
to too many people and is thus often at risk of meaning nothing at all. My father
is an eminent biologist who, after pondering the matter for some decades,
recently revealed to me that psychology can’t really be a science because science
requires the use of electricity. Apparently shocks to your ankles don’t count. My
own definition of science is a bit more eclectic, but one thing about which I, my
dad, and most other scientists can agree is that if a thing cannot be measured,
then it cannot be studied scientifically. It can be studied, and one might even
argue that the study of such unquantifiables is more worthwhile than all the
sciences laid end to end. But it is not science because science is about
measurement, and if a thing cannot be measured—cannot be compared with a
clock or a ruler or something other than itself—it is not a potential object of
scientific inquiry. As we have seen, it is extremely difficult to measure an
individual’s happiness and feel completely confident in the validity and
reliability of that measurement. People may not know how they feel, or
remember how they felt, and even if they do, scientists can never know exactly
how their experience maps onto their description of that experience, and hence
they cannot know precisely how to interpret people’s claims. All of this suggests
that the scientific study of subjective experience is bound to be tough going.
Tough, yes, but not impossible, because the chasm between experiences can
be bridged—not with steel girders or a six-lane toll road, mind you, but with a
length of reasonably sturdy rope—if we accept three premises.
Measuring Right
The first premise is something that any carpenter could tell you: Imperfect tools
are a real pain, but they sure beat pounding nails with your teeth. The nature of
subjective experience suggests there will never be a happyometer—a perfectly
reliable instrument that allows an observer to measure with complete accuracy
the characteristics of another person’s subjective experience so that the
measurement can be taken, recorded, and compared with another.
15
If we
demand that level of perfection from our tools, then we better pack up the eye
trackers, brain scanners, and color swatches and cede the study of subjective
experience to the poets, who did a nice job with it for the first few thousand
years. But if we do that, then it is only fair that we hand them the study of almost
everything else as well. Chronometers, thermometers, barometers,
spectrometers, and every other device that scientists use to measure the objects
of their interest are imperfect. Every one of them introduces some degree of
error into the observations it allows, which is why governments and universities
pay obscene sums of money each year for the slightly more perfect version of
each. And if we are purging ourselves of all things that afford us only imperfect
approximations of the truth, then we need to discard not only psychology and the
physical sciences but law, economics, and history as well. In short, if we adhere
to the standard of perfection in all our endeavors, we are left with nothing but
mathematics and the White Album. So maybe we just need to accept a bit of
fuzziness and stop complaining.
The second premise is that of all the flawed measures of subjective experience
that we can take, the honest, real-time report of the attentive individual is the
least flawed.
16 There are many other ways to measure happiness, of course, and
some of them appear to be much more rigorous, scientific, and objective than a
person’s own claims. For example, electromyography allows us to measure the
electrical signals produced by the striated muscles of the face, such as the
corrugator supercillia, which furrows our brows when we experience something
unpleasant, or the zygomaticus major, which pulls our mouths up toward our
ears when we smile. Physiography allows us to measure the electrodermal,
respiratory, and cardiac activity of the autonomic nervous system, all of which
change when we experience strong emotions. Electroencephalography, positronemission tomography, and magnetic resonance imaging allow us to measure
electrical activity and blood flow in different regions of the brain, such as the left
and right prefrontal cortex, which tend to be active when we are experiencing
positive and negative emotions, respectively. Even a clock can be a useful device
for measuring happiness, because startled people tend to blink more slowly when
they are feeling happy than when they are feeling fearful or anxious.
17
Scientists who rely on the honest, real-time reports of attentive individuals
often feel the need to defend that choice by reminding us that these reports
correlate strongly with other measures of happiness. But in a sense, they’ve got
it backward. After all, the only reason why we take any of these bodily events—
from muscle movement to cerebral blood flow—as indices of happiness is that
people tell us they are. If everyone claimed to feel raging anger or thick, black
depression when their zygomatic muscle contracted, their eyeblink slowed, and
the left anterior brain region filled with blood, then we would have to revise our
interpretations of these physiological changes and take them as indices of
unhappiness instead. If we want to know how a person feels, we must begin by
acknowledging the fact that there is one and only one observer stationed at the
critical point of view. She may not always remember what she felt before, and
she may not always be aware of what she is feeling right now. We may be
puzzled by her reports, skeptical of her memory, and worried about her ability to
use language as we do. But when all our hand wringing is over, we must admit
that she is the only person who has even the slightest chance of describing “the
view from in here,” which is why her claims serve as the gold standard against
which all other measures are measured. We will have greater confidence in her
claims when they jibe with what other, less privileged observers tell us, when we
feel confident that she evaluates her experience against the same background
that we do, when her body does what most other bodies do when they experience
what she is claiming to experience, and so on. But even when all of these various
indices of happiness dovetail nicely, we cannot be perfectly sure that we know
the truth about her inner world. We can, however, be sure that we have come as
close as observers ever get, and that has to be good enough.
Measuring Often
The third premise is that imperfections in measurement are always a problem,
but they are a devastating problem only when we don’t recognize them. If we
have a deep scratch on our eyeglasses and don’t know it, we may erroneously
conclude that a small crack has opened in the fabric of space and is following us
wherever we go. But if we are cognizant of the scratch, we can do our best to
factor it out of our observations, reminding ourselves that what looks like a rip in
space is really just a flaw in the device we are using to observe it. What can
scientists do to “see through” the flaws inherent in reports of subjective
experiences? The answer lies in a phenomenon that statisticians call the law of
large numbers.
Many of us have a mistaken idea about large numbers, namely, that they are
like small numbers, only bigger. As such, we expect them to do more of what
small numbers do but not to do anything different. So, for instance, we know that
two neurons swapping electrochemical signals across their axons and dendrites
cannot possibly be conscious. Nerve cells are simple devices, less complex than
walkie-talkies from Sears, and they do one simple thing, namely, react to the
chemicals that reach them by releasing chemicals of their own. If we blithely go
on to assume that ten billion of these simple devices can only do ten billion
simple things, we would never guess that billions of them can exhibit a property
that two, ten, or ten thousand cannot. Consciousness is precisely this sort of
emergent property—a phenomenon that arises in part as a result of the sheer
number of interconnections among neurons in the human brain and that does not
exist in any of the parts or in the interconnection of just a few.
18 Quantum
physics offers a similar lesson. We know that subatomic particles have the
strange and charming ability to exist in two places at once, and if we assume that
anything composed of these particles must behave likewise, we should expect all
cows to be in all possible barns at the same time. Which they obviously are not,
because fixedness is another one of those properties that emerges from the
interaction of a terribly large number of terribly tiny parts that do not themselves
have it. In short, more is not just more—it is sometimes other—than less.
The magic of large numbers works along with the laws of probability to
remedy many of the problems associated with the imperfect measurement of
subjective experience. You know that if a fair coin is flipped on several
occasions it should come up heads about half the time. As such, if you have
nothing better to do on a Tuesday evening, I invite you to meet me at the Grafton
Street Pub in Harvard Square and play an endearingly mindless game called
Splitting the Tab with Dan. Here’s how it works. We flip a coin, I call heads,
you call tails, and the loser pays the good barkeep, Paul, for our beers each time.
Now, if we flipped the coin four times and I won on three of them, you would
undoubtedly chalk it up to bad luck on your part and challenge me to darts. But
if we flipped the coin four million times and I won on three million of them, then
you and your associates would probably send out for a large order of tar and
feathers. Why? Because even if you don’t know the first thing about probability
theory, you have a very keen intuition that when numbers are small, little
imperfections—like a stray gust of wind, or a dab of perspiration on a finger—
can influence the outcome of a coin flip. But when numbers are large, such
imperfections stop mattering. There may have been a dollop of sweat on the coin
on a few of the flips, and there may have been a wayward puff of air on a few
others, and these imperfections might well account for the fact that the coin
came up heads once more than expected when we flipped it four times. But what
are the odds that these imperfections could have caused the coin to come up
heads a million more times than expected? Infinitesimal, your intuition tells you,
and your intuition is spot on. The odds are as close to infinitesimal as things on
earth get without disappearing altogether.
This same logic can be applied to the problem of subjective experience.
Suppose we were to give a pair of volunteers a pair of experiences that were
meant to induce happiness—say, by giving a million dollars to one of them and
the gift of a small-caliber revolver to the other. We then ask each volunteer to
tell us how happy he or she is. The nouveau riche volunteer says she is ecstatic,
and the armed volunteer says he is mildly pleased (though perhaps not quite as
pleased as one ought to make an armed volunteer). Is it possible that the two are
actually having the same subjective emotional experiences but describing them
differently? Yes. The new millionaire may be demonstrating politeness rather
than joy. Or perhaps the new pistol owner is experiencing ecstasy but, because
he recently shook the hand of God near the Great Barrier Reef, is describing his
ecstasy as mere satisfaction. These problems are real problems, significant
problems, and we would be foolish to conclude on the basis of these two reports
that happiness is not, as it were, a warm gun. But if we gave away a million
pistols and a million envelopes of money, and if 90 percent of the people who got
new money claimed to be happier than 90 percent of the people who got new
weapons, the odds that we are being deceived by the idiosyncrasies of verbal
descriptions become very small indeed. Similarly, if a person tells us that she is
happier with today’s banana-cream pie than with yesterday’s coconut-cream pie,
we may rightfully worry that she is misremembering her prior experience. But if
this were to happen over and over again with hundreds or thousands of people,
some of whom tasted the coconut-cream pie before the banana-cream pie and
some of whom tasted it after, we would have good reason to suspect that
different pies really do give rise to different experiences, one of which is more
pleasant than the other. After all, what are the odds that everyone misremembers
banana-cream pie as better and coconut-cream pie as worse than they really
were?
The fundamental problem in the science of experience is that if either the
language-squishing hypothesis or the experience-stretching hypothesis is correct,
then every one of us may have a different mapping of what we experience onto
what we say—and because subjective experiences can be shared only by saying,
the true nature of those experiences can never be perfectly measured. In other
words, if the experience and description scales are calibrated a bit differently for
every person who uses them, then it is impossible for scientists to compare the
claims of two people. That’s a problem. But the problem isn’t with the word
compare, it’s with the word two. Two is too small a number, and when it
becomes two hundred or two thousand, the different calibrations of different
individuals begin to cancel one another out. If the workers at the factory that
makes all the world’s tape measures, rulers, and yardsticks got sloshed at a
holiday party and started turning out millions of slightly different-sized
measuring instruments, we would not feel confident that a dinosaur was larger
than a turnip if you measured one and I measured the other. After all, we may
have used pickled rulers. But if hundreds of people with hundreds of rulers
stepped up to one of these objects and took its measurements, we could average
those measurements and feel reasonably confident that a tyrannosaurus is indeed
bigger than a root vegetable. After all, what are the odds that all the people who
measured the dinosaur just so happened to have used stretched rulers, and that all
the people who measured the turnip just so happened to have used squished
rulers? Yes, it is possible, and the odds can be calculated quite precisely, but I
will spare you the math and promise you that they are so slender that writing
them down would endanger the world’s supply of zeroes.
The bottom line is this: The attentive person’s honest, real-time report is an
imperfect approximation of her subjective experience, but it is the only game in
town. When a fruit salad, a lover, or a jazz trio is just too imperfect for our
tastes, we stop eating, kissing, and listening. But the law of large numbers
suggests that when a measurement is too imperfect for our tastes, we should not
stop measuring. Quite the opposite—we should measure again and again until
niggling imperfections yield to the onslaught of data. Those subatomic particles
that like to be everywhere at once seem to cancel out one another’s behavior so
that the large conglomeration of particles that we call cows, cars, and French
Canadians stay exactly where we put them. By the same logic, the careful
collection of a large number of experiential reports allows the imperfections of
one to cancel out the imperfections of another. No individual’s report may be
taken as an unimpeachable and perfectly calibrated index of his experience—not
yours, not mine—but we can be confident that if we ask enough people the same
question, the average answer will be a roughly accurate index of the average
experience. The science of happiness requires that we play the odds, and thus the
information it provides us is always at some risk of being wrong. But if you want
to bet against it, then flip that coin one more time, get out your wallet, and tell
Paul to make mine a Guinness.
Onward
One of the most annoying songs in the often annoying history of popular music
begins with this line: “Feelings, nothing more than feelings.” I wince when I
hear it because it always strikes me as roughly equivalent to starting a hymn with
“Jesus, nothing more than Jesus.” Nothing more than feelings? What could be
more important than feelings? Sure, war and peace may come to mind, but are
war and peace important for any reason other than the feelings they produce? If
war didn’t cause pain and anguish, if peace didn’t provide for delights both
transcendental and carnal, would either of them matter to us at all? War, peace,
art, money, marriage, birth, death, disease, religion—these are just a few of the
Really Big Topics over which oceans of blood and ink have been spilled, but
they are really big topics for one reason alone: Each is a powerful source of
human emotion. If they didn’t make us feel uplifted, desperate, thankful, and
hopeless, we would keep all that ink and blood to ourselves. As Plato asked,
“Are these things good for any other reason except that they end in pleasure, and
get rid of and avert pain? Are you looking to any other standard but pleasure and
pain when you call them good?”
19
Indeed, feelings don’t just matter—they are
what mattering means. We would expect any creature that feels pain when
burned and pleasure when fed to call burning and eating bad and good,
respectively, just as we would expect an asbestos creature with no digestive tract
to find such designations arbitrary. Moral philosophers have tried for centuries to
find some other way to define good and bad, but none has ever convinced the
rest (or me). We cannot say that something is good unless we can say what it is
good for, and if we examine all the many objects and experiences that our
species calls good and ask what they are good for, the answer is clear: By and
large, they are good for making us feel happy.
Given the importance of feelings, it would be nice to be able to say precisely
what they are and how one might measure them. As we have seen, we can’t do
that with the kind of precision that scientists covet. Nonetheless, if the
methodological and conceptual tools that science has developed do not allow us
to measure the feelings of a single individual with pinpoint accuracy, they at
least allow us to go stumbling in the dark with pickled rulers to measure dozens
of individuals again and again. The problem facing us is a difficult one, but it is
too important to ignore: Why do we so often fail to know what will make us
happy in the future? Science offers some intriguing answers to this question, and
now that we have a sense of the problem and a general method for solving it, we
are ready to inspect them.
PART III
Realism
realism (rī•ăliz´m)
The belief that things are in reality
as they appear to be in the mind.
CHAPTER 4
In the Blind Spot
of the Mind’s Eye
And as imagination bodies forth
The forms of things unknown, the poet’s pen
Turns them to shapes, and gives to airy nothing
A local habitation and a name.
Shakespeare, A Midsummer Night’s Dream
THIS MUCH WE KNOW for sure: Adolph Fischer did not organize the riot. He did
not incite the riot. In fact, he was nowhere near the riot the night the policemen
were killed. But his labor union had challenged the stranglehold that Chicago’s
powerful industrialists had on the men, women, and children who toiled in their
sweatshops toward the end of the nineteenth century, and that union needed to be
taught a lesson. So Adolph Fischer was tried and, on the basis of paid and
perjured testimony, sentenced to die for a crime he did not commit. On
November 11, 1887, he stood on the gallows and surprised everyone with his
last words: “This is the happiest moment of my life.” A few seconds later the
trapdoor beneath his feet fell away, the rope snapped his neck, and he was dead.
1
Fortunately, his dreams of equity in the American workplace were not so
easily exterminated. One year after Fischer was hanged, a bright young fellow
perfected the process of dry photography, launched his revolutionary Kodak
camera, and instantly became one of the richest men in the world. In the decades
that followed, George Eastman developed a revolutionary management
philosophy as well, giving his employees shorter hours, disability benefits,
retirement annuities, life insurance, profit sharing, and, ultimately, one third of
the stock in his company. On March 14, 1932, the beloved inventor and
humanitarian sat down at his desk, wrote a brief note, neatly capped his fountain
pen, and smoked a cigarette. Then he surprised everyone by killing himself.
2
Fischer and Eastman are a fascinating contrast. Both men believed that
common laborers have a right to fair wages and decent working conditions, and
both dedicated much of their lives to bringing about social change at the dawn of
the industrial age. Fischer failed abysmally and died a criminal, poor and reviled.
Eastman succeeded absolutely and died a champion, affluent and venerated. So
why did a poor man who had accomplished so little stand happily at the
threshold of his own lynching while a rich man who had accomplished so much
felt driven to take his own life? Fischer’s and Eastman’s reactions to their
respective situations seem so contrary, so completely inverted, that one is
tempted to chalk them up to false bravado or mental aberration. Fischer was
apparently happy on the last day of a wretched existence, Eastman was
apparently unhappy on the last day of a fulfilling life, and we know full well that
if we had been standing in either of their places, we would have experienced
precisely the opposite emotions. So what was wrong with these guys? I will ask
you to consider the possibility that there was nothing wrong with them but that
there is something wrong with you. And with me too. And the thing that’s wrong
with both of us is that we make a systematic set of errors when we try to imagine
“what it would feel like if.”
Imagining “what it would feel like if” sounds like a fluffy bit of daydreaming,
but in fact, it is one of the most consequential mental acts we can perform, and
we perform it every day. We make decisions about whom to marry, where to
work, when to reproduce, where to retire, and we base these decisions in large
measure on our beliefs about how it would feel if this event happened but that
one didn’t.
3 Our lives may not always turn out as we wish or as we plan, but we
are confident that if they had, then our happiness would have been unbounded
and our sorrows thin and fleeting. Perhaps it is true that we can’t always get
what we want, but at least we feel sure that we know what to want in the first
place. We know that happiness is to be found on the golf course and not on the
assembly line, with Lana but not with Lisa, as a potter but not as a plumber, in
Atlanta but not in Afghanistan, and we know these things because we can look
forward in time and simulate worlds that do not yet exist. Whenever we find
ourselves on the front end of a decision—Should I have another fish stick or go
directly for the Ding Dongs? Accept the job in Kansas City or stay put and hope
for a promotion? Have the knee surgery or try the physical therapy first?—we
imagine the futures that our alternatives provide and then imagine how we would
feel in each of them (“If the surgery didn’t work, I’d always regret not having
given the physical therapy a chance”). And we don’t have to imagine very hard
to know that we would be happier as the CEO of a Fortune 500 company than as
the deadweight on a hangman’s rope. Because we are the ape that looked
forward, we don’t actually have to live Adolph Fischer’s or George Eastman’s
lives to know how it would feel to walk a mile in their shoes.
There’s just one catch: The owners of the shoes didn’t seem to agree with our
conclusions. Fischer claimed to be happy, Eastman acted like a man who was
not, so unless these guys were wrong about how it felt to live their own lives, we
are forced to consider the possibility that the mistake is ours—that when we tried
to imagine how it would feel to be in Fischer’s or Eastman’s situations, our
imaginations failed us in some curious way. We are forced to consider the
possibility that what clearly seems to be the better life may actually be the worse
life and that when we look down the time line at the different lives we might
lead, we may not always know which is which. We are forced to consider the
possibility that we did something fundamentally wrong when we mentally
slipped out of our shoes and into theirs, and that this fundamental mistake can
cause us to choose the wrong future.
What might this mistake be? Imagination is a powerful tool that allows us to
conjure images from “airy nothing.” But like all tools, this one has its
shortcomings, and in this and the next chapter I’ll tell you about the first of
them. The best way to understand this particular shortcoming of imagination (the
faculty that allows us to see the future) is to understand the shortcomings of
memory (the faculty that allows us to see the past) and perception (the faculty
that allows us to see the present). As you will learn, the shortcoming that causes
us to misremember the past and misperceive the present is the very same
shortcoming that causes us to misimagine the future. That shortcoming is caused
by a trick that your brain plays on you every minute of every hour of every day
—a trick that your brain is playing on you right now. Let me tell you the brain’s
dirty little secret.
Little Big Head
There is a marvelous moment in most of the early Marx Brothers films in which
Harpo, the cherubic mime, reaches deep into the folds of his floppy trench coat
and pulls out a flügelhorn, a steaming cup of coffee, a bathroom sink, or a sheep.
By the age of three, most of us have learned that big things can’t go inside little
things, and that understanding is violated to comic effect when someone pulls
plumbing or livestock from his pockets. How can a flügelhorn fit inside a
raincoat? How can that tiny car hold all those merry clowns? How can the
magician’s assistant get folded up inside that little box? They can’t, of course,
and we know that, which is why we are so appreciative of the illusion that they
do.
Filling in Memory
The human brain creates a similar illusion. If you’ve ever tried to store a full
season of your favorite television show on your computer’s hard drive, then you
already know that faithful representations of things in the world require gobs of
space. And yet, our brains take millions of snapshots, record millions of sounds,
add smells, tastes, textures, a third spatial dimension, a temporal sequence, a
continuous running commentary—and they do this all day, every day, year after
year, storing these representations of the world in a memory bank that seems
never to overflow and yet allows us to recall at a moment’s notice that awful day
in the sixth grade when we teased Phil Meyers about his braces and he promised
to beat us up after school. How do we cram the vast universe of our experience
into the relatively small storage compartment between our ears? We do what
Harpo did: We cheat. As you learned in the previous chapters, the elaborate
tapestry of our experience is not stored in memory—at least not in its entirety.
Rather, it is compressed for storage by first being reduced to a few critical
threads, such as a summary phrase (“Dinner was disappointing”) or a small set
of key features (tough steak, corked wine, snotty waiter). Later, when we want to
remember our experience, our brains quickly reweave the tapestry by fabricating
—not by actually retrieving—the bulk of the information that we experience as a
memory.
4 This fabrication happens so quickly and effortlessly that we have the
illusion (as a good magician’s audience always does) that the entire thing was in
our heads the entire time.
But it wasn’t, and that fact can be easily demonstrated. For example,
volunteers in one study were shown a series of slides depicting a red car as it
cruises toward a yield sign, turns right, and then knocks over a pedestrian.
5 After
seeing the slides, some of the volunteers (the no-question group) were not asked
any questions, and the remaining volunteers (the question group) were. The
question these volunteers were asked was this: “Did another car pass the red car
while it was stopped at the stop sign?” Next, all the volunteers were shown two
pictures—one in which the red car was approaching a yield sign and one in
which the red car was approaching a stop sign—and were asked to point to the
picture they had actually seen. Now, if the volunteers had stored their experience
in memory, then they should have pointed to the picture of the car approaching
the yield sign, and indeed, more than 90 percent of the volunteers in the noquestion group did just that. But 80 percent of the volunteers in the question
group pointed to the picture of the car approaching a stop sign. Clearly, the
question changed the volunteers’ memories of their earlier experience, which is
precisely what one would expect if their brains were reweaving their experiences
—and precisely what one would not expect if their brains were retrieving their
experiences.
This general finding—that information acquired after an event alters memory
of the event—has been replicated so many times in so many different laboratory
and field settings that it has left most scientists convinced of two things.
6 First,
the act of remembering involves “filling in” details that were not actually stored;
and second, we generally cannot tell when we are doing this because filling in
happens quickly and unconsciously.
7
Indeed, this phenomenon is so powerful
that it happens even when we know someone is trying to trick us. For example,
read the list of words below, and when you’ve finished, quickly cover the list
with your hand. Then I will trick you.
Bed
Rest
Awake
Tired
Dream
Wake
Snooze
Blanket
Doze
Slumber
Snore
Nap
Peace
Yawn
Drowsy
Here’s the trick. Which of the following words was not on the list? Bed, doze,
sleep, or gasoline? The right answer is gasoline, of course. But the other right
answer is sleep, and if you don’t believe me, then you should lift your hand from
the page. (Actually, you should lift your hand from the page in any case, as we
really need to move along). If you’re like most people, you knew gasoline was
not on the list, but you mistakenly remembered reading the word sleep.
8 Because
all the words on the list are so closely related, your brain stored the gist of what
you read (“a bunch of words about sleeping”) rather than storing every one of
the words. Normally this would be a clever and economical strategy for
remembering. The gist would serve as an instruction that enabled your brain to
reweave the tapestry of your experience and allow you to “remember” reading
the words you saw. But in this case, your brain was tricked by the fact that the
gist word—the key word, the essential word—was not actually on the list. When
your brain rewove the tapestry of your experience, it mistakenly included a word
that was implied by the gist but that had not actually appeared, just as volunteers
in the previous study mistakenly included a stop sign that was implied by the
question they had been asked but that had not actually appeared in the slides they
saw.
This experiment has been done dozens of times with dozens of different word
lists, and these studies have revealed two surprising findings. First, people do not
vaguely recall seeing the gist word and they do not simply guess that they saw
the gist word. Rather, they vividly remember seeing it and they feel completely
confident that it appeared.
9 Second, this phenomenon happens even when people
are warned about it beforehand.
10 Knowing that a researcher is trying to trick
you into falsely recalling the appearance of a gist word does not stop that false
recollection from happening.
Filling in Perception
The powerful and undetectable filling in that suffuses our remembrances of
things past pervades our perceptions of things present as well. For instance, if on
one particularly slow Tuesday you took it upon yourself to dissect your eyeball,
you would eventually come across a spot on the back of your retina where your
optic nerve leaves your eye and wends its way toward your brain. The eyeball
cannot register an image at the point at which the optic nerve attaches, and hence
that point is known as the blind spot. No one can see an object that appears in the
blind spot because there are no visual receptors there. And yet, if you look out
into your living room, you do not notice a black hole in the otherwise smooth
picture of your brother-in-law sitting on the sofa, devouring cheese dip. Why?
Because your brain uses information from the areas around the blind spot to
make a reasonable guess about what the blind spot would see if only it weren’t
blind, and then your brain fills in the scene with this information. That’s right, it
invents things, creates things, makes stuff up! It doesn’t consult you about this,
doesn’t seek your approval. It just makes its best guess about the nature of the
missing information and proceeds to fill in the scene—and the part of your
visual experience of your cheese-dipping brother-in-law that is caused by real
light reflecting off of his real face and the part that your brain just made up look
exactly alike to you. You can convince yourself of this by closing your left eye,
focusing your right eye on the magician in figure 8, and then bringing the book
slowly toward you. Stay focused on the magician, but notice that when the earth
moves into your blind spot, it seems to disappear. You will suddenly see
whiteness where the earth actually is because your brain sees whiteness all
around the earth and thus mistakenly assumes there is whiteness in your blind
spot as well. If you keep moving the book toward you, the earth will reappear.
Eventually, of course, your nose will touch the rabbit and you will commit an
unnatural act.
Fig. 8. If you stare at the magician with your right eye and move the book slowly toward your nose,
the earth will disappear into your blind spot.
The filling-in trick is not limited to the visual world. Researchers tape-
recorded the sentence The state governors met with their respective legislatures
convening in the capital city. Then they doctored the tape, substituting a cough
for the first s in legislatures.
11 Volunteers heard the cough all right, but they
heard it happening between the words because they heard the missing s too.
Even when they were specifically instructed to listen for the missing sound, and
even when they were given thousands of trials of practice, volunteers were
unable to name the missing letter that their brains knew ought to be there and
had thus helpfully supplied.
12
In an even more remarkable study, volunteers
listened to a recording of the word eel preceded by a cough (which I’ll denote
with *). The volunteers heard the word peel when it was embedded in the
sentence “The *eel was on the orange” but they heard the word heel when it was
embedded in the sentence “The *eel was on the shoe.”
13 This is a striking
finding because the two sentences differ only in their final word, which means
that volunteers’ brains had to wait for the last word of the sentence before they
could supply the information that was missing from the second word. But they
did it, and they did it so smoothly and quickly that volunteers actually heard the
missing information being spoken in its proper position.
Experiments such as these provide us with a backstage pass that allows us to
see how the brain does its marvelous magic act. Of course, if you went backstage
at a magic show and got a good look at all the wires, mirrors, and trapdoors, the
show would be spoiled when you returned to your seat. After all, once you know
how a trick works, you can’t fall for it, right? Well, if you go back and try the
trick in figure 8 again, you will notice that despite the detailed scientific
understanding of the visual blind spot that you acquired in the last few pages, the
trick still works just fine. Indeed, no matter how much you learn about optics
and no matter how long you spend nosing up to that rabbit, the trick will never
fail. How can that be? I have tried to convince you that things are not always as
they appear. Now let me try to convince you that you can’t help but believe that
they are.
The Meat Loaf of Oz
Unless you skipped over childhood and went straight from strained carrots to
mortgage payments, you probably remember the scene in the book The
Wonderful Wizard of Oz in which Dorothy and her pals are cowering before the
great and terrible Oz, who appears menacingly as a giant floating head. Toto the
dog suddenly breaks loose, knocks over a screen in the corner of the room, and
reveals a little man working the controls of a machine. The protagonists are
astonished, and the Scarecrow accuses the little man of being a humbug.
“Exactly so!” declared the little man, rubbing his hands together as if it
pleased him. “I am a humbug.” . . .
“Doesn’t anyone else know you’re a humbug?” asked Dorothy.
“No one knows it but you four—and myself,” replied Oz. “I have fooled
everyone so long that I thought I should never be found out.” . . .
“But, I don’t understand,” said Dorothy, in bewilderment. “How was it
that you appeared to me as a great Head?”
“That was one of my tricks,” answered Oz. . . .
“I think you are a very bad man,” said Dorothy.
“Oh, no, my dear; I’m really a very good man, but I’m a very bad
Wizard.”
14
Discovering Idealism
Toward the end of the eighteenth century, philosophers had approximately the
same sort of eye-opening experience that Dorothy had, and concluded (with
some reluctance) that while the human brain is a very good organ, it is a very
bad wizard. Prior to that time, philosophers had thought of the senses as conduits
that allowed information about the properties of objects in the world to travel
from the object and into the mind. The mind was like a movie screen in which
the object was rebroadcast. The operation broke down on occasion, hence people
occasionally saw things as they were not. But when the senses were working
properly, they showed what was there. This theory of realism was described in
1690 by the philosopher John Locke:
When our senses do actually convey into our understandings any idea, we
cannot but be satisfied that there doth something at that time really exist
without us, which doth affect our senses, and by them give notice of itself
to our apprehensive faculties, and actually produce that idea which we then
perceive: and we cannot so far distrust their testimony, as to doubt that such
collections of simple ideas as we have observed by our senses to be united
together, do really exist together.
15
In other words, brains believe, but they don’t make believe. When people see
giant floating heads, it is because giant heads are actually floating in their
purview, and the only question for a psychologically minded philosopher was
how brains accomplish this amazing act of faithful reflection. But in 1781 a
reclusive German professor named Immanuel Kant broke loose, knocked over
the screen in the corner of the room, and exposed the brain as a humbug of the
highest order. Kant’s new theory of idealism claimed that our perceptions are not
the result of a physiological process by which our eyes somehow transmit an
image of the world into our brains, but rather, they are the result of a
psychological process that combines what our eyes see with what we already
think, feel, know, want, and believe, and then uses this combination of sensory
information and preexisting knowledge to construct our perception of reality.
“The understanding can intuit nothing, the senses can think nothing,” Kant
wrote. “Only through their union can knowledge arise.”
16 The historian Will
Durant performed the remarkable feat of summarizing Kant’s point in a single
sentence: “The world as we know it is a construction, a finished product, almost
—one might say—a manufactured article, to which the mind contributes as
much by its moulding forms as the thing contributes by its stimuli.”
17 Kant
argued that a person’s perception of a floating head is constructed from the
person’s knowledge of floating heads, memory of floating heads, belief in
floating heads, need for floating heads, and sometimes—but not always—from
the actual presence of a floating head itself. Perceptions are portraits, not
photographs, and their form reveals the artist’s hand every bit as much as it
reflects the things portrayed.
This theory was a revelation, and in the centuries that followed, psychologists
extended it by suggesting that each individual makes roughly the same journey
of discovery that philosophy did. In the 1920s, the psychologist Jean Piaget
noticed that the young child often fails to distinguish between her perception of
an object and the object’s actual properties, hence she tends to believe that things
really are as they appear to be—and that others must therefore see them as she
does. When a two-year-old child sees her playmate leave the room, and then sees
an adult remove a cookie from a cookie jar and hide it in a drawer, she expects
that her playmate will later look for the cookie in the drawer—despite the fact
that her playmate was not in the room when the adult moved the cookie to the
drawer from the jar.
18 Why? Because the two-year-old child knows the cookie is
in the drawer and thus expects that everyone else knows this as well. Without a
distinction between things in the world and things in the mind, the child cannot
understand how different minds can contain different things. Of course, with
increasing maturity, children shift from realism to idealism, coming to realize
that perceptions are merely points of view, that what they see is not necessarily
what there is, and that two people may thus have different perceptions of or
beliefs about the same thing. Piaget concluded that “the child is a realist in its
thought” and that “its progress consists in ridding itself of this initial realism.”
19
In other words, like philosophers, ordinary people start out as realists but get
over it soon enough.
Escaping Realism
But if realism goes away, it doesn’t get very far. Research shows that even adults
act like realists under certain circumstances. For example, in one study, a pair of
adult volunteers were seated on opposite sides of a set of cubbyholes, as shown
in figure 9.
20 Some common objects were placed in several of the cubbies. Some
of these cubbies were open on both sides, so that items such as the large truck
and the medium truck were clearly visible to both volunteers. Other cubbies
were open on only one side, so that items such as the small truck could be seen
by one volunteer but not by the other. The volunteers played a game in which the
person with the occluded view (the director) told the person with the clear view
(the mover) to move certain objects to certain locations. Now, what should have
happened when the director said, “Move the small truck to the bottom row”? If
the mover were an idealist, she would move the medium truck because she
would realize that the director could not see the small truck, hence he must have
been referring to the medium truck, which, from the director’s point of view,
was the smallest. On the other hand, if the mover were a realist, then she would
move the small truck without regard for the fact that the director could not see it
as she could, hence could not have been referring to it when he gave his
instruction. So which truck did the movers actually move?
Fig. 9.
The medium truck, of course. What—did you think they were stupid? These
were normal adults. They had intact brains, good jobs, bank accounts, nice table
manners—all the usual stuff. They knew that the director had a different point of
view and thus must have been talking about the medium truck when he said,
“Move the small truck.” But while these normal adults with intact brains
behaved like perfect idealists, their hands told only half the story. In addition to
measuring the mover’s hand movements, the researchers used an eye tracker to
measure the mover’s eye movements as well. The eye tracker revealed that the
moment the mover heard the phrase “Move the small truck,” she briefly looked
toward the small truck—not the medium truck, which was the smallest truck the
director could see, but the small truck, which was the smallest truck that she
could see. In other words, the mover’s brain initially interpreted the phrase “the
small truck” as a reference to the smallest truck from her own point of view,
without regard for the fact that the director’s point of view was different. Only
after briefly flirting with the idea of moving the small truck did the mover’s
brain consider the fact that the director had a different view and thus must have
meant the medium truck, at which point her brain sent her hand instructions to
move the proper truck. The hand behaved like an idealist, but the eye revealed
that the brain was a momentary realist.
Experiments such as these suggest that we do not outgrow realism so much as
we learn to outfox it, and that even as adults our perceptions are characterized by
an initial moment of realism.
21 According to this line of reasoning, we
automatically assume that our subjective experience of a thing is a faithful
representation of the thing’s properties. Only later—if we have the time, energy,
and ability—do we rapidly repudiate that assumption and consider the possibility
that the real world may not actually be as it appears to us.
22 Piaget described
realism as “a spontaneous and immediate tendency to confuse the sign and the
thing signified,”
23 and research shows that this tendency to equate our subjective
sense of things with the objective properties of those things remains spontaneous
and immediate throughout our lives. It does not go away forever, and it does not
go away on occasion. Rather, it is brief, unarticulated, and rapidly unraveled, but
it is always the first step in our perception of the world. We believe what we see,
and then unbelieve it when we have to.
All of this suggests that the psychologist George Miller was right when he
wrote, “The crowning intellectual accomplishment of the brain is the real
world.”
24 The three-and-a-half-pound meat loaf between our ears is not a simple
recording device but a remarkably smart computer that gathers information,
makes shrewd judgments and even shrewder guesses, and offers us its best
interpretation of the way things are. Because those interpretations are usually so
good, because they usually bear such a striking resemblance to the world as it is
actually constituted, we do not realize that we are seeing an interpretation.
Instead, we feel as though we are sitting comfortably inside our heads, looking
out through the clear glass windshield of our eyes, watching the world as it truly
is. We tend to forget that our brains are talented forgers, weaving a tapestry of
memory and perception whose detail is so compelling that its inauthenticity is
rarely detected. In a sense, each of us is a counterfeiter who prints phony dollar
bills and then happily accepts them for payment, unaware that he is both the
perpetrator and victim of a well-orchestrated fraud. As you are about to see, we
sometimes pay a steep price for allowing ourselves to lose sight of this
fundamental fact, because the mistake we make when we momentarily ignore
the filling-in trick and unthinkingly accept the validity of our memories and our
perceptions is precisely the same mistake we make when we imagine our
futures.
An Embarrassment of Tomorrows
When John Lennon asked us to “imagine there’s no countries,” he was quick to
add, “it isn’t hard to do.” Indeed, imagination is usually effortless. When we
think about the pastrami on rye that we intend to have for lunch, or the new pair
of flannel pajamas that Mom swears she mailed last week, we do not have to set
aside a block of time between other appointments, roll up our sleeves, and get
down to the serious work of conjuring up images of sandwiches and sleepwear.
Rather, the moment we have the slightest inclination to consider these things,
our brains effortlessly use what they know about delis and lunches and parcels
and moms to construct mental pictures (warm pastrami, dark rye, tartan-plaid
pajamas with bunny feet) that we experience as the products of imagination.
Like perceptions and memories, these mental pictures pop into our
consciousness fait accompli. We should be grateful for the ease with which our
imaginations provide this useful service, but because we do not consciously
supervise the construction of these mental images, we tend to treat them as we
treat memories and perceptions—initially assuming that they are accurate
representations of the objects we are imagining.
For instance, right now you can probably imagine a plate of spaghetti and tell
me how much you would enjoy eating it for dinner tomorrow evening. Fine.
Now notice two things. First, this wasn’t particularly taxing. You could probably
imagine pasta all day long without ever breaking a sweat, letting your brain do
the heavy construction work while you lounge around in your new pajamas.
Second, notice that the spaghetti you imagined was much richer than the
spaghetti I asked you about. Perhaps your imaginary spaghetti was the goopy
slop from the can, or perhaps it was fresh basil-rosemary pasta topped with a
silky bolognaise. The sauce could have been tomato, cream, clam, or even grape
jelly. The noodles might have been piled beneath a pair of traditional meatballs,
or sprinkled with a half-dozen slivers of duck sausage studded with capers and
pine nuts. Maybe you imagined eating the spaghetti while standing at your
kitchen counter with a newspaper in one hand and a Coke in the other, or maybe
you imagined that your waiter had given you the small table near the fireplace at
your favorite trattoria and poured you a fat 1990 Barolo to start. Whatever you
imagined, it’s a pretty good bet that when I said spaghetti, you did not have an
unrequited urge to interrogate me about the nuances of sauce and locale before
envisioning a single noodle. Instead, your brain behaved like a portrait artist
commissioned to produce a full-color oil from a rough charcoal sketch, filling in
all the details that were absent from my question and serving you a particular
heaping helping of imaginary pasta. And when you estimated your enjoyment of
this future spaghetti, you responded to this particular mental image as you
respond to particular memories and particular perceptions—as though the details
had been specified by the thing you were imagining rather than fabricated by
your brain.
In so doing, you made an error that your future spaghetti-eating self may
regret.
25 The phrase “spaghetti for dinner tomorrow evening” does not describe
an event so much as it describes a family of events, and the particular member of
the family that you imagined influenced your predictions about how much you’d
enjoy eating it. Indeed, trying to predict how much you will enjoy a plate of
spaghetti without knowing which plate of spaghetti is like trying to predict how
much you will pay for a car without knowing which car (Ferrari or Chevy?), or
trying to predict how proud you will be of your spouse’s accomplishment
without knowing which accomplishment (winning a Nobel Prize or finding the
best divorce lawyer in the city?), or trying to predict how sad you will be when a
relative dies without knowing which relative (dear old Dad or cranky Great
Uncle Sherman on Cousin Ida’s side twice removed?). There are endless
variations on spaghetti, and the particular variation you imagined surely
influenced how much you expected to enjoy the experience. Because these
details are so crucial to an accurate prediction of your response to the event you
were imagining, and because these important details were not known, you would
have been wise to withhold your prediction about spaghetti, or at least to temper
it with a disclaimer such as “I expect to like the spaghetti if it is al dente with
smoked pomodoro.”
But I’m willing to bet that you didn’t withhold, you didn’t disclaim, and that
you instead conjured up a plate of imaginary spaghetti faster than Chef Boyardee
on Rollerblades, then made a confident prediction about the relationship you
expected to have with that food. If you didn’t do that, then congratulations. Give
yourself a medal. But if you did, then know you are not alone. Research suggests
that when people make predictions about their reactions to future events, they
tend to neglect the fact that their brains have performed the filling-in trick as an
integral part of the act of imagination.
26 For example, volunteers in one study
were asked to predict what they would do in a variety of future situations—how
much time they would be willing to spend answering questions in a telephone
survey, how much money they would be willing to spend to celebrate a special
occasion at a restaurant in San Francisco, and so on.
27 Volunteers also reported
how confident they were that each of these predictions was correct. Before
making predictions, some volunteers were asked to describe all the details of the
future event they were imagining (“I am imagining eating wine-braised short
ribs with roasted root vegetables and parsley coulis at Jardiniere”) and were then
told that they should assume that each of these details was perfectly accurate (the
assumers). Other volunteers were not asked to describe these details and were
not told to make any assumptions (nonassumers). The results showed that
nonassumers were every bit as confident as assumers were. Why? Because when
they were asked about dinner, the nonassumers quickly and unconsciously
generated a mental image of a particular dish at a particular restaurant, and then
assumed that these details were accurate, rather than having been conjured from
airy nothing.
We all find ourselves in the same fix from time to time. Our spouse asks us to
attend a party next Friday night, our brains instantly manufacture an image of a
cocktail party in the penthouse of a downtown hotel with waiters in black tie
carrying silver trays of hors d’oeuvres past a slightly bored harpist, and we
predict our reaction to the imagined event with a yawn that sets new records for
duration and jaw extension. What we generally fail to consider is how many
different kinds of parties there are—birthday celebrations, gallery openings, cast
parties, yacht parties, office parties, orgies, wakes—and how different our
reactions would be to each. So we tell our spouse that we’d rather skip the party,
our spouse naturally drags us along anyhow, and we have a truly marvelous
time. Why? Because the party involved cheap beer and hula hoops rather than
classical music and seaweed crackers. It was precisely our style, and we liked
what we predicted we’d hate because our prediction was based on a detailed
image that reflected our brain’s best guess, which was in this case dead wrong.
The point here is that when we imagine the future, we often do so in the blind
spot of our mind’s eye, and this tendency can cause us to misimagine the future
events whose emotional consequences we are attempting to weigh.
This tendency transcends mundane predictions about parties, restaurants, and
plates of spaghetti. For example, most of us have no doubt that we would enjoy
being an Eastman more than we would enjoy being a Fischer—no doubt, that is,
unless we pause to consider how quickly and unquestioningly our brains filled in
the details of their lives and deaths, and how much all those made-up details
mattered. Consider a pair of stories that your brain almost certainly did not
invent for you at the beginning of this chapter.
You are a young German immigrant who lives in the teeming, dirty city that is
nineteenth-century Chicago. A few wealthy families—the Armours,
McCormicks, Swifts, and Fields—have monopolized their industries and have
the right to use you and your family as they would use machines and horses. You
devote your time to a small newspaper whose editorials call for social justice,
but you are no fool, and you know that these essays will change nothing and that
the factories will churn on, producing paper, producing pork, producing tractors,
and spitting out the tired workers whose blood and sweat feed the engines of
production. You are dispensable and insignificant. Welcome to America. One
evening an altercation breaks out between some factory workers and the local
police in Haymarket Square, and although you were not present when the bomb
was thrown, you are rounded up with other “anarchist leaders” and charged with
masterminding a riot. Suddenly your name is on the front page of every major
newspaper and you have a national platform for your opinions. When the judge
sentences you on the basis of fabricated evidence, you realize that this
ignominious moment will be preserved in history books, that you will be known
as “the Haymarket Martyr,” and that your execution will pave the way for the
reforms you sought but were impotent to establish. A few decades from now,
there will be a far better America than this one, and its citizens will honor you
for your sacrifice. You are not a religious man, but you cannot help but think for
a moment of Jesus on the cross—falsely accused, unjustly convicted, and cruelly
executed—giving his life so that a great idea might live in the centuries to come.
As you prepare to die you feel nervous, of course. But in some deep sense, this
moment is a stroke of luck, the culmination of a dream—perhaps, you might
even say, the happiest moment of your life.
Cut to a second story: Rochester, New York, 1932, the midst of the Great
Depression. You are a seventy-seven-year-old man who has spent his life
building empires, advancing technology, and using your wealth to endow
libraries, symphonies, colleges, and dental clinics that have improved the lives of
millions. The happiest moments of your long life were spent tinkering with a
camera, touring Europe’s art museums, fishing, hunting, or doing carpentry in
your lodge in North Carolina. But spinal disease has made it increasingly
difficult for you to lead the active life you’ve always enjoyed, and every day you
spend in bed is a sad mockery of the vibrant man you once were. You will never
get younger, you will never get better. The good days are over, and more days
merely mean more decrepitude. One Monday afternoon you sit down at your
desk, uncap your favorite fountain pen, and write these words on a legal pad:
“Dear friends: My work is done. Why wait?” Then you light a cigarette and,
when you’ve enjoyed the last of it, stub it out and carefully place the nose of
your Luger automatic against your chest. Your physician showed you how to
locate your heart, and now you can feel it beating rapidly beneath your hand. As
you prepare to pull the trigger you feel nervous, of course. But in some deep
sense you know that this one well-aimed bullet will allow you to leave a
beautiful past and escape a bitter future.
Okay, lights up. These details about Adolph Fischer’s and George Eastman’s
lives are accurate, but that’s not really the point. The point is that just as there
are parties and pastas you like and parties and pastas you don’t, there are ways of
being rich and ways of being executed that make the former less marvelous and
the latter less awful than we might otherwise expect. One reason why you found
Fischer’s and Eastman’s reactions so perverse is that you almost certainly
misimagined the details of their situations. And yet, without a second thought,
you behaved like an unrepentant realist and confidently based your predictions
about how you would feel on details that your brain had invented while you
weren’t watching. Your mistake was not in imagining things you could not know
—that is, after all, what imagination is for. Rather, your mistake was in
unthinkingly treating what you imagined as though it were an accurate
representation of the facts. You are a very fine person, I’m sure. But you are a
very bad wizard.
Onward
If you’d been given your choice of brains at the moment of conception, you
probably wouldn’t have chosen the tricky one. Good thing no one asked you.
Without the filling-in trick you would have sketchy memories, an empty
imagination, and a small black hole following you wherever you went. When
Kant wrote that “perception without conception is blind,”
28 he was suggesting
that without the filling-in trick we would have nothing even remotely resembling
the subjective experience that all of us take for granted. We see things that aren’t
really there and we remember things that didn’t really happen, and while these
may sound like symptoms of mercury poisoning, they are actually critical
ingredients in the recipe for a seamlessly smooth and blessedly normal reality.
But that smoothness and normality come at a price. Even though we are aware in
some vaguely academic sense that our brains are doing the filling-in trick, we
can’t help but expect the future to unfold with the details we imagine. As we are
about to see, the details that the brain puts in are not nearly as troubling as the
details it leaves out.
CHAPTER 5
The Hound of Silence
O hateful Error, Melancholy’s child,
Why dost thou show to the apt thoughts of men
The things that are not?
Shakespeare, Julius Caesar
SILVER BLAZE HADN’T BEEN MISSING for long when Inspector Gregory and
Colonel Ross identified the stranger who had sneaked into the stable and stolen
the prize racehorse. But as usual, Sherlock Holmes was one step ahead of the
police. The colonel turned to the great detective:
“Is there any point to which you would wish to draw my attention?”
“To the curious incident of the dog in the night-time.”
“The dog did nothing in the night-time.”
“That was the curious incident,” remarked Sherlock Holmes.
1
It seems that a dog lived in the stable, that both of the stable hands had slept
through the theft, and that these two facts had allowed Holmes to make one of
his indubitably shrewd deductions. As he later explained:
I had grasped the significance of the silence of the dog. . . . A dog was kept
in the stables, and yet, though some one had been in and had fetched out a
horse, he had not barked enough to arouse the two lads in the loft.
Obviously the midnight visitor was some one whom the dog knew well.
2
Although the inspector and the colonel were aware of what had happened, only
Holmes was aware of what hadn’t happened: The dog hadn’t barked, which
meant that the thief was not the stranger whom the police had identified. By
paying careful attention to the absence of an event, Sherlock Holmes further
distinguished himself from the rest of humankind. As we are about to see, when
the rest of humankind imagines the future, it rarely notices what imagination has
missed—and the missing pieces are much more important than we realize.
The Sailors Not
If you live in a city with tall buildings, then you already know that pigeons have
an uncanny ability to defecate at precisely the moment, speed, and position
required to score a direct hit on your most expensive sweater. Given their talent
as bombardiers, it seems odd that pigeons can’t learn to do much simpler things.
For example, if a pigeon is put in a cage with two levers that can be briefly
illuminated, it can easily learn to press the illuminated lever to get a reward of
bird seed—but it can never learn to press the unilluminated lever to receive the
same reward.
3 Pigeons have no trouble figuring out that the presence of a light
signals an opportunity for eating, but they cannot learn the same thing about the
absence of a light. Research suggests that human beings are a bit like pigeons in
this regard. For example, volunteers in one study played a deduction game in
which they were shown a set of trigrams (i.e., three-letter combinations such as
SXY, GTR, BCG, and EVX). The experimenter then pointed to one of the
trigrams and told the volunteers that this trigram was special. The volunteers’
job was to figure out what made the trigram special—that is, to figure out which
feature of the special trigram distinguished it from the others. Volunteers saw set
after set, and each time the experimenter pointed out the special one. How many
sets did volunteers have to see before they deduced the distinctive feature of the
special trigram? For half the volunteers, the special trigram was distinguished by
the fact that it and only it contained the letter T, and these volunteers needed to
see about thirty-four sets of trigrams before they figured out that the presence of
T is what made a trigram special. For the other half of the volunteers, the special
trigram was always distinguished by the fact that it and only it lacked the letter
T. The results were astounding. No matter how many sets of trigrams they saw,
none of the volunteers ever figured this out.
4
It was easy to notice the presence
of a letter but, like the barking of a dog, it was impossible to notice its absence.
Absence in the Present
If this tendency were restricted to bird seed and trigrams, we wouldn’t care much
about it. But as it turns out, the general inability to think about absences is a
potent source of error in everyday life. For example, a moment ago I suggested
that pigeons have an unusual talent for hitting pedestrians, and if you’ve ever
been the victim of a really good splotching, you’ve probably concluded the same
thing. But what makes us think that the pigeons are actually taking aim and
hitting what they aim for? The answer is that most of us can remember far too
many instances in which we momentarily passed beneath a ledge festooned with
those obnoxious flying rats and were squarely nailed by a stinky white dollop,
despite the fact that from the air a human head constitutes a relatively small and
fast-moving target. Fair enough. But if we really want to know whether the
pigeons are out to get us and have the requisite skills to do so, we must also
consider the times when we walked beneath that ledge and came away clean.
The right way to calculate the animosity and marksmanship of the urban pigeon
is to consider both the presence and the absence of poop on our jackets. If the
pigeons have hit us nine times out of ten, then we should probably give them
credit for their accuracy as well as a wide berth, but if they’ve hit us nine times
out of nine thousand, then what seems like good aim and bad attitude is probably
nothing more than dumb luck. The misses are crucial to determining what kinds
of inferences we can legitimately draw from the hits. Indeed, when scientists
want to establish the causal relationship between two things—cloud seeding and
rain, heart attacks and cholesterol, you name it—they compute a mathematical
index that takes into account co-occurrences (how many people who do have
high cholesterol do have heart attacks?) and non-co-occurrences (how many
people who do have high cholesterol do not have heart attacks, and how many
people who do not have high cholesterol do have heart attacks?) and co-absences
(how many people who don’t have high cholesterol don’t have heart attacks?).
All of these quantities are necessary to assess accurately the likelihood that the
two things have a real causal relationship.
This is all very sensible, of course. To statisticians. But studies show that
when ordinary people want to know whether two things are causally related,
they routinely search for, attend to, consider, and remember information about
what did happen and fail to search for, attend to, consider, and remember
information about what did not.
5 Apparently, people have been making this
mistake for a very long time. Nearly four centuries ago, the philosopher and
scientist Sir Francis Bacon wrote about the ways in which the mind errs, and he
considered the failure to consider absences among the most serious:
By far the greatest impediment and aberration of the human understanding
arises from [the fact that] . . . those things which strike the sense outweigh
things which, although they may be more important, do not strike it
directly. Hence, contemplation usually ceases with seeing, so much so that
little or no attention is paid to things invisible.
6
Bacon illustrated his point with a story (which, it turns out, he borrowed from
Cicero, who told it seventeen centuries earlier) about a visitor to a Roman
temple. To impress the visitor with the power of the gods, the Roman showed
him a portrait of several pious sailors whose faith had presumably allowed them
to survive a recent shipwreck. When pressed to accept this as evidence of a
miracle, the visitor astutely inquired, “But where are the pictures of those who
perished after taking their vows?”
7 Scientific research suggests that ordinary
folks like us rarely ask to see pictures of the missing sailors.
8
Our inability to think about absences can lead us to make some fairly bizarre
judgments. For example, in a study done about three decades ago, Americans
were asked which countries were most similar to each other—Ceylon and Nepal
or West Germany and East Germany. Most picked the latter pair.
9 But when they
were asked which countries were most dissimilar, most Americans picked the
latter pair as well. Now, how can one pair of countries be both more similar and
more dissimilar than another pair? They can’t, of course. But when people are
asked to judge the similarity of two countries, they tend to look for the presence
of similarities (of which East and West Germany had many—for example, their
names) and ignore the absence of similarities. When they are asked to judge the
dissimilarities of two countries, they tend to look for the presence of
dissimilarities (of which East and West Germany had many—for example, their
governments) and ignore the absence of dissimilarities.
The tendency to ignore absences can befuddle more personal decisions as
well. For example, imagine that you are preparing to go on a vacation to one of
two islands: Moderacia (which has average weather, average beaches, average
hotels, and average nightlife) or Extremia (which has beautiful weather and
fantastic beaches but crummy hotels and no nightlife). The time has come to
make your reservations, so which one would you choose? Most people pick
Extremia.
10 But now imagine that you are already holding tentative reservations
for both destinations and the time has come to cancel one of them before they
charge your credit card. Which would you cancel? Most people choose to cancel
their reservation on Extremia. Why would people both select and reject
Extremia? Because when we are selecting, we consider the positive attributes of
our alternatives, and when we are rejecting, we consider the negative attributes.
Extremia has the most positive attributes and the most negative attributes, hence
people tend to select it when they are looking for something to select and they
reject it when they are looking for something to reject. Of course, the logical
way to select a vacation is to consider both the presence and the absence of
positive and negative attributes, but that’s not what most of us do.
Absence in the Future
Our inattention to absences influences the way that we think about the future.
Just as we do not remember every detail of a past event (what color socks did
you wear to your high school graduation?) or see every detail of a current event
(what color socks is the person behind you wearing at this very moment?), so do
we fail to imagine every detail of a future event. You could close your eyes right
now and spend two full hours imagining yourself driving around in a silver
Mercedes-Benz SL600 Roadster with a twin-turbocharged 36-valve 5.5-liter V12 engine. You could imagine the curve of the front grille, the slant of the
windshield, and the newish smell of the black leather upholstery. But no matter
how long you spent doing this, if I were then to ask you to inspect the mental
image you’d created and read to me the numbers on the license plate, you would
be forced to admit that you’d left out that particular detail. No one can imagine
everything, of course, and it would be absurd to suggest that they should. But
just as we tend to treat the details of future events that we do imagine as though
they were actually going to happen, we have an equally troubling tendency to
treat the details of future events that we don’t imagine as though they were not
going to happen. In other words, we fail to consider how much imagination fills
in, but we also fail to consider how much it leaves out.
To illustrate this point, I often ask people to tell me how they think they would
feel two years after the sudden death of their eldest child. As you can probably
guess, this makes me quite popular at parties. I know, I know—this is a
gruesome exercise and I’m not asking you to do it. But the fact is that if you did
it, you would probably give me the answer that almost everyone gives me, which
is some variation on Are you out of your damned mind? I’d be devastated—
totally devastated. I wouldn’t be able to get out of bed in the morning. I might
even kill myself. So who invited you to this party anyway? If at this point I’m not
actually wearing the person’s cocktail, I usually probe a bit further and ask how
he came to his conclusion. What thoughts or images came to mind, what
information did he consider? People typically tell me that they imagined hearing
the news, or they imagined attending the funeral, or they imagined opening the
door to an empty bedroom. But in my long history of asking this question and
thereby excluding myself from every social circle to which I formerly belonged,
I have yet to hear a single person tell me that in addition to these heartbreaking,
morbid images, they also imagined the other things that would inevitably happen
in the two years following the death of their child. Indeed, not one person has
ever mentioned attending another child’s school play, or making love with his
spouse, or eating a taffy apple on a warm summer evening, or reading a book, or
writing a book, or riding a bicycle, or any of the many other activities that we—
and that they—would expect to happen in those two years. Now, I am in no way,
shape, or form suggesting that a bite of gooey candy compensates for the loss of
a child. That isn’t the point. What I am suggesting is that the two-year period
following a tragic event has to contain something—that is, it must be filled with
episodes and occurrences of some kind—and these episodes and occurrences
must have some emotional consequences. Regardless of whether those
consequences are large or small, negative or positive, one cannot answer my
question accurately without considering them. And yet, not one person I know
has ever imagined anything other than the single, awful event suggested by my
question. When they imagine the future, there is a whole lot missing, and the
things that are missing matter.
This fact was illustrated by a study in which college students at the University
of Virginia were asked to predict how they would feel a few days after their
school’s football team won or lost an upcoming game against the University of
North Carolina.
11 Before making these predictions, one group of students (the
describers) was asked to describe the events of a typical day, and one group of
students (the nondescribers) was not. A few days later the students were asked to
report how happy they actually were, and the results showed that only the
nondescribers had drastically overestimated the impact that the win or the loss
would have on them. Why? Because when nondescribers imagined the future,
they tended to leave out details about the things that would happen after the
game was over. For example, they failed to consider the fact that right after their
team lost (which would be sad) they would go get drunk with their friends
(which would be lovely), or that right after their team won (which would be
lovely) they would have to go to the library and start studying for their chemistry
final (which would be sad). The nondescribers were focused on one and only one
aspect of the future—the outcome of the football game—and they failed to
imagine other aspects of the future that would influence their happiness, such as
drunken parties and chemistry exams. The describers, on the other hand, were
more accurate in their predictions precisely because they were forced to consider
the details that the nondescribers left out.
12
It is difficult to escape the focus of our own attention—difficult to consider
what it is we may not be considering—and this is one of the reasons why we so
often mispredict our emotional responses to future events. For example, most
Americans can be classified as one of two types: those who live in California
and are happy they do, and those who don’t live in California but believe they’d
be happy if they did. Yet, research shows that Californians are actually no
happier than anyone else—so why does everyone (including Californians) seem
to believe they are?
13 California has some of the most beautiful scenery and
some of the best weather in the continental United States, and when nonCalifornians hear that magic word their imaginations instantly produce mental
images of sunny beaches and giant redwood trees. But while Los Angeles has a
better climate than Columbus, climate is just one of many things that determine a
person’s happiness—and yet all those other things are missing from the mental
image. If we were to add some of these missing details to our mental image of
beaches and palm trees—say, traffic, supermarkets, airports, sports teams, cable
rates, housing costs, earthquakes, landslides, and so on—then we might
recognize that L.A. beats Columbus in some ways (better weather) and
Columbus beats L.A. in others (less traffic). We think that Californians are
happier than Ohioans because we imagine California with so few details—and
we make no allowance for the fact that the details we are failing to imagine
could drastically alter the conclusions we draw.
14
The tendency that causes us to overestimate the happiness of Californians also
causes us to underestimate the happiness of people with chronic illnesses or
disabilities.
15 For example, when sighted people imagine being blind, they seem
to forget that blindness is not a full-time job. Blind people can’t see, but they do
most of the things that sighted people do—they go on picnics, pay their taxes,
listen to music, get stuck in traffic—and thus they are just as happy as sighted
people are. They can’t do everything sighted people can do, sighted people can’t
do everything that they can do, and thus blind and sighted lives are not identical.
But whatever a blind person’s life is like, it is about much more than blindness.
And yet, when sighted people imagine being blind, they fail to imagine all the
other things that such a life might be about, hence they mispredict how satisfying
such a life can be.
On the Event Horizon
About fifty years ago a Pygmy named Kenge took his first trip out of the dense,
tropical forests of Africa and onto the open plains in the company of an
anthropologist. Buffalo appeared in the distance—small black specks against a
bleached sky—and the Pygmy surveyed them curiously. Finally, he turned to the
anthropologist and asked what kind of insects they were. “When I told Kenge
that the insects were buffalo, he roared with laughter and told me not to tell such
stupid lies.”
16 The anthropologist wasn’t stupid and he hadn’t lied. Rather,
because Kenge had lived his entire life in a dense jungle that offered no views of
the horizon, he had failed to learn what most of us take for granted, namely, that
things look different when they are far away. You and I don’t mix up our insects
and our ungulates because we are used to looking out across vast expanses, and
we learned early on that objects make smaller images on our retinas when they
are distant than when they are nearby. How do our brains know whether a small
retinal image is being made by a small object that is nearby or a large object that
is distant? Details, details, details! Our brains know that the surfaces of nearby
objects afford fine-grained details that blur and blend as the object recedes into
the distance, and thus they use the level of detail that we can see to estimate the
distance between our eye and the object. If the small retinal image is detailed—
we can see the fine hairs on a mosquito’s head and the cellophane texture of its
wings—our brains assume that the object is about an inch from our eye. If the
small retinal image is not detailed—we can see only the vague contour and
shadowless form of the buffalo’s body—our brains assume that the object is a
few thousand yards away.
Just as objects that are near to us in space appear to be more detailed than
those that are far away, so do events that are near to us in time.
17 Whereas the
near future is finely detailed, the far future is blurry and smooth. For example,
when young couples are asked to say what they think of when they envision
“getting married,” those couples who are a month away from the event (either
because they are getting married a month later or because they got married a
month earlier) envision marriage in a fairly abstract and blurry way, and they
offer high-level descriptions such as “making a serious commitment” or “making
a mistake.” But couples who are getting married the next day envision
marriage’s concrete details, offering descriptions such as “having pictures made”
or “wearing a special outfit.”
18 Similarly, when volunteers are asked to imagine
themselves locking a door the next day, they describe their mental images with
detailed phrases such as “putting a key in the lock,” but when volunteers are
asked to imagine themselves locking a door next year, they describe their mental
images with vague phrases such as “securing the house.”
19 When we think of
events in the distant past or distant future we tend to think abstractly about why
they happened or will happen, but when we think of events in the near past or
near future we tend to think concretely about how they happened or will
happen.
20
Seeing in time is like seeing in space. But there is one important difference
between spatial and temporal horizons. When we perceive a distant buffalo, our
brains are aware of the fact that the buffalo looks smooth, vague, and lacking in
detail because it is far away, and they do not mistakenly conclude that the
buffalo itself is smooth and vague. But when we remember or imagine a
temporally distant event, our brains seem to overlook the fact that details vanish
with temporal distance, and they conclude instead that the distant events actually
are as smooth and vague as we are imagining and remembering them. For
example, have you ever wondered why you often make commitments that you
deeply regret when the moment to fulfill them arrives? We all do this, of course.
We agree to babysit the nephews and nieces next month, and we look forward to
that obligation even as we jot it in our diary. Then, when it actually comes time
to buy the Happy Meals, set up the Barbie playset, hide the bong, and ignore the
fact that the NBA playoffs are on at one o’clock, we wonder what we were
thinking when we said yes. Well, here’s what we were thinking: When we said
yes we were thinking about babysitting in terms of why instead of how, in terms
of causes and consequences instead of execution, and we failed to consider the
fact that the detail-free babysitting we were imagining would not be the detailladen babysitting we would ultimately experience. Babysitting next month is “an
act of love,” whereas babysitting right now is “an act of lunch,” and expressing
affection is spiritually rewarding in a way that buying French fries simply
isn’t.
21
Perhaps it isn’t surprising that the gritty details of babysitting that are so
salient to us as we execute them were not part of our mental image of babysitting
when we imagined it a month earlier, but what is surprising is how surprised we
are when those details finally come into view. Distant babysitting has the same
illusory smoothness that a distant cornfield does,
22 but while we all know that a
cornfield isn’t really smooth and that it just looks that way from a far remove,
we seem only dimly aware of the same fact when it comes to events that are far
away in time. When volunteers are asked to “imagine a good day,” they imagine
a greater variety of events if the good day is tomorrow than if the good day is a
year later.
23 Because a good day tomorrow is imagined in considerable detail, it
turns out to be a lumpy mixture of mostly good stuff (“I’ll sleep late, read the
paper, go to the movies, and see my best friend”) with a few unpleasant chunks
(“But I guess I’ll also have to rake the stupid leaves”). On the other hand, a good
day next year is imagined as a smooth purée of happy episodes. What’s more,
when people are asked how realistic they think these mental images of the near
and far future are, they claim that the smooth purée of next year is every bit as
realistic as the lumpy stew of tomorrow. In some sense, we are like pilots who
land our planes and are genuinely shocked to discover that the cornfields that
looked like smooth, yellow rectangles from the air are actually filled with—of
all things—corn! Perception, imagination, and memory are remarkable abilities
that have a good deal in common, but in at least one way, perception is the
wisest of the triplets. We rarely mistake a distant buffalo for a nearby insect, but
when the horizon is temporal rather than spatial, we tend to make the same
mistake that Pygmies do.
The fact that we imagine the near and far futures with such different textures
causes us to value them differently as well.
24 Most of us would pay more to see a
Broadway show tonight or to eat an apple pie this afternoon than we would if the
same ticket and the same pie were to be delivered to us next month. There is
nothing irrational about this. Delays are painful, and it makes sense to demand a
discount if one must endure them. But studies show that when people imagine
the pain of waiting, they imagine that it will be worse if it happens in the near
future than in the far future, and this leads to some rather odd behavior.
25 For
example, most people would rather receive $20 in a year than $19 in 364 days
because a one-day delay that takes place in the far future looks (from here) to be
a minor inconvenience. On the other hand, most people would rather receive $19
today than $20 tomorrow because a one-day delay that takes place in the near
future looks (from here) to be an unbearable torment.
26 Whatever amount of pain
a one-day wait entails, that pain is surely the same whenever it is experienced;
and yet, people imagine a near-future pain as so severe that they will gladly pay
a dollar to avoid it, but a far-future pain as so mild that they will gladly accept a
dollar to endure it.
Why does this happen? The vivid detail of the near future makes it much more
palpable than the far future, thus we feel more anxious and excited when we
imagine events that will take place soon than when we imagine events that will
take place later. Indeed, studies show that the parts of the brain that are primarily
responsible for generating feelings of pleasurable excitement become active
when people imagine receiving a reward such as money in the near future but
not when they imagine receiving the same reward in the far future.
27
If you’ve
ever bought too many boxes of Thin Mints from the Girl Scout who hawks her
wares in front of the local library but too few boxes from the Girl Scout who
rings your doorbell and takes your order for future delivery, then you’ve
experienced this anomaly yourself. When we spy the future through our
prospectiscopes, the clarity of the next hour and the fuzziness of the next year
can lead us to make a variety of mistakes.
Onward
Before heading back to Baker Street, Sherlock Holmes couldn’t resist polishing
his own calabash and giving Inspector Gregory one last poke in the eye. Holmes
confided in Watson: “ ‘See the value of imagination,’ said Holmes. ‘It is the one
quality which Gregory lacks. We imagined what might have happened, acted
upon the supposition, and find ourselves justified.’ ”
28
A very fine poke, but not a very fair one. Inspector Gregory’s problem wasn’t
that he lacked imagination but that he trusted it. Any brain that does the filling-in
trick is bound to do the leaving-out trick as well, and thus the futures we imagine
contain some details that our brains invented and lack some details that our
brains ignored. The problem isn’t that our brains fill in and leave out. God help
us if they didn’t. No, the problem is that they do this so well that we aren’t aware
it is happening. As such, we tend to accept the brain’s products uncritically and
expect the future to unfold with the details—and with only the details—that the
brain has imagined. One of imagination’s shortcomings, then, is that it takes
liberties without telling us it has done so. But if imagination can be too liberal, it
can also be too conservative, and that shortcoming has a story of its own.
PART IV
Presentism
presentism (pre•zĕn•tizm)
The tendency for current experience
to influence one’s views of the past and the future.
CHAPTER 6
The Future Is Now
Thy letters have transported me beyond
This ignorant present, and I feel now
The future in the instant.
Shakespeare, Cymbeline
MOST REASONABLY SIZED LIBRARIES have a shelf of futurist tomes from the 1950s
with titles such as Into the Atomic Age and The World of Tomorrow. If you leaf
through a few of them, you quickly notice that each of these books says more
about the times in which it was written than about the times it was meant to
foretell. Flip a few pages and you’ll find a drawing of a housewife with a Donna
Reed hairdo and a poodle skirt flitting about her atomic kitchen, waiting for the
sound of her husband’s rocket car before getting the tuna casserole on the table.
Flip a few more and you’ll see a sketch of a modern city under a glass dome,
complete with nuclear trains, antigravity cars, and well-dressed citizens gliding
smoothly to work on conveyor-belted sidewalks. You will also notice that some
things are missing. The men don’t carry babies, the women don’t carry
briefcases, the children don’t have pierced eyebrows or nipples, and the mice go
squeak instead of click. There are no skateboarders or panhandlers, no
smartphones or smartdrinks, no spandex, latex, Gore-Tex, Amex, FedEx, or
Wal-Mart. What’s more, all the people of African, Asian, and Hispanic origin
seem to have missed the future entirely. Indeed, what makes these drawings so
charming is that they are utterly, fabulously, and ridiculously wrong. How could
anyone ever have thought that the future would look like some hybrid of
Forbidden Planet and Father Knows Best?
More of the Same
Underestimating the novelty of the future is a time-honored tradition. Lord
William Thomson Kelvin was one of the most farsighted physicists of the
nineteenth century (which is why we measure temperature in kelvins), but when
he looked carefully into the world of tomorrow he concluded that “heavier-thanair flying machines are impossible.”
1 Most of his fellow scientists agreed. As the
eminent astronomer Simon Newcomb wrote in 1906: “The demonstration that no
possible combination of known substances, known forms of machinery, and
known forms of force, can be united in a practical machine by which man shall
fly long distances through the air, seems to the writer as complete as it is
possible for the demonstration of any physical fact to be.”
2
Even Wilbur Wright, who proved Kelvin and Newcomb wrong, admitted that
in 1901 he had said to his brother that “man would not fly for fifty years.”
3 He
was off by forty-eight. The number of respected scientists and accomplished
inventors who declared the airplane an impossibility is exceeded only by the
number who said the same thing about space travel, television sets, microwave
ovens, nuclear power, heart transplants, and female senators. The litany of faulty
forecasts, missed marks, and prophetic pratfalls is extensive, but let me ask you
to ignore for a moment the sheer number of such mistakes and notice instead the
similarity of their forms. The writer Arthur C. Clarke formulated what has come
to be known as Clarke’s first law: “When a distinguished but elderly scientist
states that something is possible he is almost certainly right. When he states that
something is impossible, he is very probably wrong.”
4
In other words, when
scientists make erroneous predictions, they almost always err by predicting that
the future will be too much like the present.
Presentism in the Past
Ordinary people are quite scientific in this regard. We have already seen how
brains make ample use of the filling-in trick when they remember the past or
imagine the future, and the phrase “filling in” suggests an image of a hole (for
example, in a wall or a tooth) being plugged with some sort of material (Spackle
or silver). As it turns out, when brains plug holes in their conceptualizations of
yesterday and tomorrow, they tend to use a material called today. Consider how
often this happens when we try to remember the past. When college students
hear persuasive speeches that demonstrably change their political opinions, they
tend to remember that they always felt as they currently feel.
5 When dating
couples try to recall what they thought about their romantic partners two months
earlier, they tend to remember that they felt then as they feel now.
6 When
students receive their grades on an exam, they tend to remember being as
concerned about the exam before they took it as they currently are.
7 When
patients are asked about their headaches, the amount of pain they are feeling at
the moment determines how much pain they remember feeling the previous
day.
8 When middle-aged people are asked to remember what they thought about
premarital sex, how they felt about political issues, or how much alcohol they
drank when they were in college, their memories are influenced by how they
think, feel, and drink now.
9 When widows and widowers are asked how much
grief they felt when their spouse died five years earlier, their memories are
influenced by the amount of grief they currently feel.
10 The list goes on, but
what’s important to notice for our purposes is that in each of these instances,
people misremember their own pasts by recalling that they once thought, did,
and said what they now think, do, and say.
11
This tendency to fill in the holes in our memories of the past with material
from the present is especially powerful when it comes to remembering our
emotions. In 1992, after announcing on a syndicated television talk show that he
would like to live in the White House, Ross Perot became the overnight messiah
of a disaffected electorate. For the first time in American history it looked as
though a man who had never held office and was not the nominee of a major
political party might well win the most powerful job on earth. His supporters
were enthusiastic and optimistic. But on July 16, 1992, as suddenly as he had
burst onto the scene, Perot withdrew from the race, citing vague concerns about
political “dirty tricks” that might spoil his daughter’s wedding. His supporters
were devastated. Then, in October of the same year, Perot had yet another
change of heart and reentered the race, which he ultimately lost the next month.
Between his initial surprising announcement, his even more surprising
withdrawal, his unbelievably surprising reentry, and his unsurprising defeat,
those who supported him experienced a variety of intense emotions. Fortunately,
a researcher was on hand to measure these emotional reactions in July, after
Perot’s withdrawal, and then again in November, after his defeat.
12 The
researcher also asked volunteers in November to recall how they had felt in July,
and the findings were striking. Those who remained loyal to Perot throughout
his flipping and flopping remembered feeling less sad and angry when he
withdrew in July than they actually had been, whereas those who abandoned him
when he abandoned them remembered being less hopeful than they had been. In
other words, Perot supporters erroneously recalled feeling about Perot then as
they felt about him now.
Presentism in the Future
If the past is a wall with some holes, the future is a hole with no walls. Memory
uses the filling-in trick, but imagination is the filling-in trick, and if the present
lightly colors our remembered pasts, it thoroughly infuses our imagined futures.
More simply said, most of us have a tough time imagining a tomorrow that is
terribly different from today, and we find it particularly difficult to imagine that
we will ever think, want, or feel differently than we do now.
13 Teenagers get
tattoos because they are confident that DEATH ROCKS will always be an appealing
motto, new mothers abandon promising law careers because they are confident
that being home with their children will always be a rewarding job, and smokers
who have just finished a cigarette are confident for at least five minutes that they
can easily quit and that their resolve will not diminish with the nicotine in their
bloodstreams. Psychologists have nothing on teenagers, smokers, and moms. I
can recall a Thanksgiving (well, actually, most Thanksgivings) when I ate so
much that I realized only as I swallowed my last bite of pumpkin pie that my
breathing had become shallow and labored because my lungs no longer had
room to expand. I staggered to the living room, fell flat on the couch, and, as I
descended mercifully into a tryptophan coma, was heard to utter these words:
“I’ll never eat again.” But, of course, I did eat again—possibly that night, surely
within twenty-four hours, and probably turkey. I suppose I knew that my vow
was absurd even as I made it, and yet, some part of me seemed sincerely to
believe that chewing and swallowing were nasty habits that I could easily
renounce, if only because the torpid mass that was winding its way through my
digestive tract at the approximate speed of continental drift would supply all my
nutritional, intellectual, and spiritual needs forevermore.
I am appropriately embarrassed by this incident on several counts. First, I ate
like a pig. Second, although I had eaten like a pig before and should therefore
have known from experience that pigs always end up back at the trough, I really
did think that this time I might not eat again for days, maybe weeks, maybe ever.
I take small comfort in the fact that other pigs seem susceptible to precisely the
same delusion. Research in laboratories and supermarkets has demonstrated that
when people who have recently eaten try to decide what they will want to eat
next week, they reliably underestimate the extent of their future appetites.
14 The
double-thick milkshakes, chicken-salad sandwiches, and jalapeño sausage
pockets that they recently slurped, snarfed, and swallowed do not temporarily
lower their intelligence. Rather, these folks just find it difficult to imagine being
hungry when they are full and thus can’t bring themselves to provide adequately
for hunger’s inevitable return. We go shopping after a breakfast of eggs, waffles,
and Canadian bacon, end up buying too few groceries, and then, when the urge
for coconut almond ice cream makes its regular nightly visit, we curse ourselves
for having shopped so lightly.
What is true of sated stomachs is also true of sated minds. In one study,
researchers challenged some volunteers to answer five geography questions and
told them that after they had taken their best guesses they would receive one of
two rewards: Either they would learn the correct answers to the questions they
had been asked and thus find out whether they had gotten them right or wrong,
or they would receive a candy bar but never learn the answers.
15 Some
volunteers chose their reward before they took the geography quiz, and some
volunteers chose their reward only after they took the quiz. As you might expect,
people preferred the candy bar before taking the quiz, but they preferred the
answers after taking the quiz. In other words, taking the quiz made people so
curious that they valued the answers more than a scrumptious candy bar. But do
people know this will happen? When a new group of volunteers was asked to
predict which reward they would choose before and after taking the quiz, these
volunteers predicted that they would choose the candy bar in both cases. These
volunteers—who had not actually experienced the intense curiosity that taking
the quiz produced—simply couldn’t imagine that they would ever forsake a
Snickers for a few dull facts about cities and rivers. This finding brings to mind
that wonderful scene in the 1967 film Bedazzled in which the devil spends his
days in bookstores, ripping the final pages out of the mystery novels. This may
not strike you as an act so utterly evil that it would warrant Lucifer’s personal
attention, but when you arrive at the end of a good whodunit only to find the
whodunit part missing, you understand why people might willingly trade their
immortal souls for the dénouement. Curiosity is a powerful urge, but when you
aren’t smack-dab in the middle of feeling it, it’s hard to imagine just how far and
fast it can drive you.
These problems with forecasting our hungers—whether gustatory, sexual,
emotional, social, or intellectual—are all too familiar. But why? Why are the
powers of human imagination so easily humbled? This is, after all, the same
imagination that produced space travel, gene therapy, the theory of relativity,
and the Monty Python cheese-shop sketch. Even the least imaginative among us
can imagine things so wild and weird that our mothers would wash our heads out
with soap if only they knew. We can imagine being elected to Congress, dropped
from a helicopter, painted purple and rolled in almonds. We can imagine life on
a banana plantation and inside a submarine. We can imagine being slaves,
warriors, sheriffs, cannibals, courtesans, scuba divers, and tax collectors. And
yet, for some reason, when our bellies are stuffed with mashed potatoes and
cranberry sauce, we can’t imagine being hungry? How come?
Sneak Prefeel
The answer to this question takes us deep into the nature of imagination itself.
When we imagine objects, such as penguins, paddleboats, or Scotch-tape
dispensers, most of us have the experience of actually seeing a somewhat
sketchy picture of the object in our heads. If I were to ask you whether a
penguin’s flippers are longer or shorter than its feet, you would probably have
the sense of conjuring up a mental image from airy nothing and then “looking”
at it to determine the answer. You would feel as though a picture of a penguin
just popped into your head because you wanted it to, and you would have the
sense of staring at the flippers for a moment, looking down and checking out the
feet, glancing back up at the flippers, and then giving me an answer. What you
were doing would feel a lot like seeing because, in fact, it is. The region of your
brain that is normally activated when you see objects with your eyes—a sensory
area called the visual cortex—is also activated when you inspect mental images
with your mind’s eye.
16 The same is true of other senses. For instance, if I were
to ask on which syllable the high note in “Happy Birthday” is sung, you would
probably play the melody in your imagination and then “listen” to it to determine
where the pitch rises and falls. Again, this sense of “listening with your mind’s
ear” is not just a figure of speech (especially since no one actually says this).
When people imagine sounds, they show activation in a sensory area of the brain
called the auditory cortex, which is normally activated only when we hear real
sounds with our ears.
17
These findings tell us something important about how the brain imagines,
namely, that it enlists the aid of its sensory areas when it wants to imagine the
sensible features of the world. If we want to know how a particular object looks
when the object isn’t sitting there in front of us, we send information about the
object from our memory to our visual cortex, and we experience a mental image.
Similarly, if we want to know how a melody sounds when it isn’t currently on
the radio, we send information about the object from our memory to our auditory
cortex, and we experience a mental sound. Because penguins live in Antarctica
and “Happy Birthday” is sung only on birthdays, neither of these things is
usually there when we want to inspect it. When our eyes and ears do not feed the
visual and auditory cortices the information they require to answer the questions
we are asked, we request that the information be sent from memory, which
allows us to take a fake look and have a fake listen. Because our brains can do
this trick, we are able to discover things about songs (the high note occurs on
birth) and birds (the flippers are longer than the feet) even when we are all alone
in a closet.
Fig. 10. Visual perception (above) gets information from objects and events in the world, whereas
visual imagination (below) gets information from memory.
Using the visual and auditory areas to execute acts of imagination is a truly
ingenious bit of engineering, and evolution deserves the Microsoft Windows
Award for installing it in every one of us without asking permission. But what
do seeing and hearing have to do with Thanksgiving gluttons like us—well, at
least like me? As it turns out, the imaginative processes that allow us to discover
how a penguin looks even when we are locked in a closet are the same processes
that allow us to discover how the future will feel when we are locked in the
present. The moment someone asks you how much you would enjoy finding
your partner in bed with the mailman, you feel something. Probably something
not so good. Just as you generate a mental image of a penguin and then visually
inspect it in order to answer questions about its flippers, so do you generate a
mental image of an infidelity and then emotionally react to it in order to answer
questions about your future feelings.
18 The areas of your brain that respond
emotionally to real events respond emotionally to imaginary events as well,
which is why your pupils probably dilated and your blood pressure probably rose
when I asked you to imagine this particular instance of special delivery.
19 This is
a clever method for predicting future feelings, because how we feel when we
imagine an event is usually a good indicator of how we will feel when the event
itself transpires. If mental images of rapid breathing and flailing mailbags induce
pangs of jealousy and waves of anger, then we should expect a real infidelity to
do so with even greater swiftness and reliability.
It doesn’t take something as emotionally charged as infidelity to illustrate this
fact. Every day we say things like “Pizza sounds pretty good to me,” and despite
the literal meaning of that utterance, we are not commenting on the acoustic
properties of mozzarella. Rather, we are saying that when we imagine eating
pizza we experience a small, lovely feeling, and that we interpret this feeling as
an indicator of the even larger and lovelier feeling we would experience if we
could just get the pizza out of our imaginations and into our mouths. When a
Chinese host offers us an appetizer of sautéed spider or crispy grasshopper, we
don’t have to chew one to know how much we’d dislike the actual experience,
because the mere thought of eating bugs causes most North Americans to
shudder in disgust, and that shudder tells us that the real thing is likely to induce
full-blown nausea. The point here is that we generally do not sit down with a
sheet of paper and start logically listing the pros and cons of the future events we
are contemplating, but rather, we contemplate them by simulating those events
in our imaginations and then noting our emotional reactions to that simulation.
Just as imagination previews objects, so does it prefeel events.
20
Fig. 11. Both feeling (above) and prefeeling (below) get information from the vision area, but the
vision area gets information from different sources.
The Power of Prefeeling
Prefeeling often allows us to predict our emotions better than logical thinking
does. In one study, researchers offered volunteers a reproduction of an
Impressionist painting or a humorous poster of a cartoon cat.
21 Before making
their choices, some volunteers were asked to think logically about why they
thought they might like or dislike each poster (thinkers), whereas others were
encouraged to make their choices quickly and “from the gut” (nonthinkers).
Career counselors and financial advisors always tell us that we should think long
and hard if we wish to make sound decisions, but when the researchers phoned
the volunteers later and asked how much they liked their new objet d’art, the
thinkers were the least satisfied. Rather than choosing the poster that had made
them feel happy when they imagined hanging it in their homes, thinkers had
ignored their prefeelings and had instead chosen posters that possessed the
qualities of which a career counselor or financial advisor would approve (“The
olive green in the Monet may clash with the drapes, whereas the Garfield poster
will signal to visitors that I have a scintillating sense of humor”). Nonthinkers,
on the other hand, trusted their prefeelings: They imagined the poster on their
wall, noted how they felt when they did so, and assumed that if imagining the
poster on their wall made them feel good, then actually seeing it on their wall
would probably do the same. And they were right. Prefeeling allowed
nonthinkers to predict their future satisfaction more accurately than thinkers did.
Indeed, when people are prevented from feeling emotion in the present, they
become temporarily unable to predict how they will feel in the future.
22
But prefeeling has limits. How we feel when we imagine something is not
always a good guide to how we will feel when we see, hear, wear, own, drive,
eat, or kiss it. For example, why do you close your eyes when you want to
visualize an object, or jam your fingers in your ears when you want to remember
the melody of a certain song? You do these things because your brain must use
its visual and auditory cortices to execute acts of visual and auditory
imagination, and if these areas are already busy doing their primary jobs—
namely, seeing and hearing things in the real world—then they are not available
for acts of imagination.
23 You cannot easily imagine a penguin when you are
busy inspecting an ostrich because vision is already using the parts of your brain
that imagination needs. Put differently, when we ask our brains to look at a real
object and an imaginary object at the same time, our brains typically grant the
first request and turn down the second. The brain considers the perception of
reality to be its first and foremost duty, thus your request to borrow the visual
cortex for a moment is expressly and summarily denied. If the brain didn’t have
this Reality First policy, you’d drive right through a red light if you just so
happened to be thinking about a green one. The policy that makes it difficult to
imagine penguins when we are looking at ostriches also makes it difficult to
imagine lust when we are feeling disgust, affection when we are feeling anger,
or hunger when we are feeling full. If a friend were to wreck your new car and
then offer to make amends by taking you to a baseball game the following week,
your brain would be too busy responding to the car wreck to simulate your
emotional response to the game. Future events may request access to the
emotional areas of our brains, but current events almost always get the right of
way.
The Limits of Prefeeling
We can’t see or feel two things at once, and the brain has strict priorities about
what it will see, hear, and feel and what it will ignore. Imagination’s requests are
often denied. Both the sensory and emotional systems enforce this policy, and
yet, we seem to recognize when the sensory systems are turning down
imagination’s requests but fail to recognize when the emotional system is doing
the same. For instance, if we try to imagine a penguin while we are looking at an
ostrich, the brain’s policy won’t allow it. We understand this, and thus we never
become confused and mistakenly conclude that the large bird with the long neck
that we are currently seeing is, in fact, the penguin that we were attempting to
imagine. The visual experience that results from a flow of information that
originates in the world is called vision; the visual experience that results from a
flow of information that originates in memory is called mental imagery; and
while both kinds of experiences are produced in the visual cortex, it takes a great
deal of vodka before we mix them up.
24 One of the hallmarks of a visual
experience is that we can almost always tell whether it is the product of a real or
an imagined object. But not so with emotional experience. The emotional
experience that results from a flow of information that originates in the world is
called feeling; the emotional experience that results from a flow of information
that originates in memory is called prefeeling; and mixing them up is one of the
world’s most popular sports.
For example, in one study, researchers telephoned people in different parts of
the country and asked them how satisfied they were with their lives.
25 When
people who lived in cities that happened to be having nice weather that day
imagined their lives, they reported that their lives were relatively happy; but
when people who lived in cities that happened to be having bad weather that day
imagined their lives, they reported that their lives were relatively unhappy.
These people tried to answer the researcher’s question by imagining their lives
and then asking themselves how they felt when they did so. Their brains
enforced the Reality First policy and insisted on reacting to real weather instead
of imaginary lives. But apparently, these people didn’t know their brains were
doing this and thus they mistook reality-induced feelings for imaginationinduced prefeelings.
In a related study, researchers asked people who were working out at a local
gym to predict how they would feel if they became lost while hiking and had to
spend the night in the woods with neither food nor water.
26 Specifically, they
were asked to predict whether their hunger or their thirst would be more
unpleasant. Some people made this prediction just after they had worked out on
a treadmill (thirsty group), and some made this prediction before they worked
out on a treadmill (nonthirsty group). The results showed that 92 percent of the
people in the thirsty group predicted that if they were lost in the woods, thirst
would be more unpleasant than hunger, but only 61 percent of the people in the
nonthirsty group made that prediction. Apparently, the thirsty people tried to
answer the researcher’s question by imagining being lost in the woods without
food and water and then asking themselves how they felt when they did so. But
their brains enforced the Reality First policy and insisted on reacting to the real
workout rather than the imaginary hike. Because these people didn’t know their
brains were doing this, they confused their feelings and prefeelings.
You’ve probably been in a similar conundrum yourself. You’ve had an awful
day—the cat peed on the rug, the dog peed on the cat, the washing machine is
busted, World Wrestling has been preempted by Masterpiece Theatre—and you
naturally feel out of sorts. If at that moment you try to imagine how much you
would enjoy playing cards with your buddies the next evening, you may
mistakenly attribute feelings that are due to the misbehavior of real pets and real
appliances (“I feel annoyed”) to your imaginary companions (“I don’t think I’ll
go because Nick always ticks me off”). Indeed, one of the hallmarks of
depression is that when depressed people think about future events, they cannot
imagine liking them very much.
27 Vacation? Romance? A night on the town? No
thanks, I’ll just sit here in the dark. Their friends get tired of seeing them flail
about in a thick blue funk, and they tell them that this too shall pass, that it is
always darkest before the dawn, that every dog has its day, and several other
important clichés. But from the depressed person’s point of view, all the flailing
makes perfectly good sense because when she imagines the future, she finds it
difficult to feel happy today and thus difficult to believe that she will feel happy
tomorrow.
We cannot feel good about an imaginary future when we are busy feeling bad
about an actual present. But rather than recognizing that this is the inevitable
result of the Reality First policy, we mistakenly assume that the future event is
the cause of the unhappiness we feel when we think about it. Our confusion
seems terribly obvious to those who are standing on the sidelines, saying things
like “You’re feeling low right now because Pa got drunk and fell off the porch,
Ma went to jail for whupping Pa, and your pickup truck got repossessed—but
everything will seem different next week and you’ll really wish you’d decided to
go with us to the opera.” At some level we recognize that our friends are
probably right. Nonetheless, when we try to overlook, ignore, or set aside our
current gloomy state and make a forecast about how we will feel tomorrow, we
find that it’s a lot like trying to imagine the taste of marshmallow while chewing
liver.
28
It is only natural that we should imagine the future and then consider
how doing so makes us feel, but because our brains are hell-bent on responding
to current events, we mistakenly conclude that we will feel tomorrow as we feel
today.
Onward
I’ve been waiting a long, long time to show someone this cartoon (figure 12),
which I clipped from a newspaper in 1983 and have kept tacked to one bulletin
board or another ever since. It never fails to delight me. The sponge is being
asked to imagine without limits—to envision what it might like to be if the entire
universe of possibilities were open to it—and the most exotic thing it can
imagine becoming is an arthropod. The cartoonist isn’t making fun of sponges,
of course; he’s making fun of us. Each of us is trapped in a place, a time, and a
circumstance, and our attempts to use our minds to transcend those boundaries
are, more often than not, ineffective. Like the sponge, we think we are thinking
outside the box only because we can’t see how big the box really is. Imagination
cannot easily transcend the boundaries of the present, and one reason for this is
that it must borrow machinery that is owned by perception. The fact that these
two processes must run on the same platform means that we are sometimes
confused about which one is running. We assume that what we feel as we
imagine the future is what we’ll feel when we get there, but in fact, what we feel
as we imagine the future is often a response to what’s happening in the present.
The time-share arrangement between perception and imagination is one of the
causes of presentism, but it is not the only one. So if the train hasn’t yet arrived
at your stop, if you aren’t quite ready to turn out the light and go to sleep, or if
the folks at Starbucks aren’t giving you dirty looks as they get out the mops, let’s
explore another.
Fig. 12.
CHAPTER 7
Time Bombs
“And yet not cloy thy lips with loathed satiety,
But rather famish them amid their plenty,
Making them red and pale with fresh variety—
Ten kisses short as one, one long as twenty.
A summer’s day will seem an hour but short,
Being wasted in such time-beguiling sport.”
Shakespeare, Venus and Adonis
NO ONE HAS EVER WITNESSED the passage of a flying Winnebago, and everyone
has witnessed the passage of time. So why is it so much easier to imagine the
former than the latter? Because as unlikely as it is that a twenty-thousand-pound
recreational vehicle could ever achieve sufficient lift to become airborne, a
flying Winnebago would at least look like something, and thus we have no
trouble producing a mental image of one. Our extraordinary talent for creating
mental images of concrete objects is one of the reasons why we function so
effectively in the physical world.
1
If you imagine a grapefruit sitting atop a
round oatmeal box and then imagine tilting the box away from you, you can
actually preview the grapefruit as it falls, and you can see that it will fall toward
you when you tilt the box quickly but fall away from you when you tilt the box
slowly. Such acts of imagination allow you to reason about the things you are
imagining and hence solve important problems in the real world, such as how to
get a grapefruit into your lap when you really need one. But time is no
grapefruit. It has no color, shape, size, or texture. It cannot be poked, peeled,
prodded, pushed, painted, or pierced. Time is not an object but an abstraction,
hence it does not lend itself to imagery, which is why filmmakers are forced to
represent the passage of time with contrivances that involve visible objects, such
as calendar leaves blowing in the wind or clocks spinning at warp speed. And
yet, predicting our emotional futures requires that we think in and about and
across swathes of time. If we can’t create a mental image of an abstract concept
such as time, then how do we think and reason about it?
SpaceThink
When people need to reason about something abstract, they tend to imagine
something concrete that the abstract thing is like and then reason about that
instead.
2 For most of us, space is the concrete thing that time is like.
3 Studies
reveal that people all over the world imagine time as though it were a spatial
dimension, which is why we say that the past is behind us and the future is in
front of us, that we are moving toward our senescence and looking back on our
infancy, and that days pass us by in much the same way that a flying Winnebago
might. We think and speak as though we were actually moving away from a
yesterday that is located over there and toward a tomorrow that is located 180
degrees about. When we draw a time line, those of us who speak English put the
past on the left, those of us who speak Arabic put the past on the right,
4 and
those of us who speak Mandarin put the past on the bottom.
5 But regardless of
our native tongue, we all put the past someplace—and the future someplace else.
Indeed, when we want to solve a problem that involves time—for instance, “If I
ate breakfast before I walked the dog but after I read the newspaper, then what
did I do first?”—most of us imagine putting three objects (breakfast, dog,
newspaper) in an orderly line and then checking to see which one is furthest to
the left (or right, or bottom, depending on our language). Reasoning by metaphor
is an ingenious technique that allows us to remedy our weaknesses by
capitalizing on our strengths—using things we can visualize to think, talk, and
reason about things we can’t.
Alas, metaphors can mislead as well as illuminate, and our tendency to
imagine time as a spatial dimension does both of these things. For example,
imagine that you and a friend have managed to get a table at a chic new
restaurant with a three-month waiting list, and that after browsing the menus you
have discovered that you both want the wasabi-encrusted partridge. Now, each
of you has sufficient social grace to recognize that placing identical orders at a
fine restaurant is roughly equivalent to wearing matching mouse ears in the main
dining room, so you decide instead that one of you will order the partridge, the
other will order the venison gumbo, and that you will then share them oh so
fashionably. You do this not only to avoid being mistaken for tourists but also
because you believe that variety is the spice of life. There are very few homilies
involving spices, and this one is as good as they get. Indeed, if we were to
measure your pleasure after the meal, we would probably find that you and your
friend are happier with the sharing arrangement than either of you would have
been had you each had a full order of partridge to yourselves.
But something strange happens when we extend this problem in time. Imagine
that the maître d’ is so impressed by your sophisticated ensemble that he invites
you (but alas, not your friend, who really could use a new look) to return on the
first Monday of every month for the next year to enjoy a free meal at his best
table. Because the kitchen occasionally runs short of ingredients, he asks you to
decide right now what you would like to eat on each of your return visits so that
he can be fully prepared to pamper you in the style to which you are quickly
becoming accustomed. You flip back through the menu. You hate rabbit, veal is
politically incorrect, you are appropriately apathetic about vegetable lasagna,
and as you scan the list you decide that there are just four dishes that strike your
rapidly swelling fancy: the partridge, the venison gumbo, the blackened
mahimahi, and the saffron seafood risotto. The partridge is clearly your favorite,
and even without a pear tree you are tempted to order twelve of them. But that
would be so gauche, so déclassé, and what’s more, you would miss the spice of
life. So you ask the maître d’ to prepare the partridge every other month, and to
fill in the remaining six meals with equal episodes of gumbo, mahimahi, and
risotto.
You may be one snappy dresser, mon ami, but when it comes to food, you
have just cooked your own goose.
6 Researchers studied this experience by
inviting volunteers to come to the laboratory for a snack once a week for several
weeks.
7 They asked some of the volunteers (choosers) to choose all their snacks
in advance, and—just as you did—the choosers usually opted for a healthy dose
of variety. Next, the researchers asked a new group of volunteers to come to the
lab once a week for several weeks. They fed some of these volunteers their
favorite snack every time (no-variety group), and they fed other volunteers their
favorite snack on most occasions and their second-favorite snack on others
(variety group). When they measured the volunteers’ satisfaction over the course
of the study, they found that volunteers in the no-variety group were more
satisfied than were volunteers in the variety group. In other words, variety made
people less happy, not more. Now wait a second—there’s something fishy here,
and it isn’t the mahimahi. How can variety be the spice of life when one sits
down with a friend at a fancy restaurant but the bane of one’s existence when
one orders snacks to be consumed in successive weeks?
Among life’s cruelest truths is this one: Wonderful things are especially
wonderful the first time they happen, but their wonderfulness wanes with
repetition.
8 Just compare the first and last time your child said “Mama” or your
partner said “I love you” and you’ll know exactly what I mean. When we have
an experience—hearing a particular sonata, making love with a particular
person, watching the sun set from a particular window of a particular room—on
successive occasions, we quickly begin to adapt to it, and the experience yields
less pleasure each time. Psychologists call this habituation, economists call it
declining marginal utility, and the rest of us call it marriage. But human beings
have discovered two devices that allow them to combat this tendency: variety
and time. One way to beat habituation is to increase the variety of one’s
experiences (“Hey, honey, I have a kinky idea—let’s watch the sun set from the
kitchen this time”).
9 Another way to beat habituation is to increase the amount of
time that separates repetitions of the experience. Clinking champagne glasses
and kissing one’s spouse at the stroke of midnight would be a relatively dull
exercise were it to happen every evening, but if one does it on New Year’s Eve
and then allows a full year to pass before doing it again, the experience will offer
an endless bouquet of delights because a year is plenty long enough for the
effects of habituation to disappear. The point here is that time and variety are
two ways to avoid habituation, and if you have one, then you don’t need the
other. In fact (and this is the really critical point, so please put down your fork
and listen), when episodes are sufficiently separated in time, variety is not only
unnecessary—it can actually be costly.
I can illustrate this fact with some precision if you allow me to make a few
reasonable assumptions. First, imagine that we can use a machine called a
hedonimeter to measure a person’s pleasure in hedons. Let’s start by making a
favoring assumption: Let’s assume that the first bite of partridge provides you
with, say, fifty hedons, whereas the first bite of gumbo provides you with forty
hedons. This is what it means to say that you favor partridge over gumbo.
Second, let’s make a habituation-rate assumption: Let’s assume that once you
take a bite of a dish, each subsequent bite of the same dish taken within, say, ten
minutes, provides one less hedon than the bite before it did. Finally, let’s make a
consumption-rate assumption: Let’s assume that you normally eat at the brisk
pace of one bite every thirty seconds. Figure 13 shows you what happens to your
pleasure if we make these assumptions about favoring, habituation rate, and
consumption rate. As you can see, the best way to maximize your pleasure in
this case is to start with the partridge and then switch to gumbo after taking ten
bites (which happens after five minutes). Why switch? Because, as the lines
show, the eleventh bite of partridge (taken at minute 5.5) would bring you a
mere thirty-nine hedons, whereas a bite of the as-yet-untasted gumbo would
yield forty. So this is the precise point in the meal at which you and your friend
should trade plates, seats, or at least mouse ears.
10 But now look at figure 14 and
notice how radically things change when we extend this gastronomic episode in
time by altering your consumption rate. When your bites are separated by
anything greater than ten minutes (in this case, fifteen minutes), then habituation
no longer occurs, which means that every bite is as good as the first and a bite of
gumbo is never better than a bite of partridge. In other words, if you could eat
slowly enough, then variety would not only be unnecessary, it would actually be
costly, because a bite of gumbo would always provide less pleasure than yet
another bite of partridge.
Fig. 13. Variety increases pleasure when consumption is rapid.
Fig. 14. Variety reduces pleasure when consumption is slow.
Now, when you and your friend sat down at the imaginary restaurant together,
you ordered two dishes to be eaten simultaneously. You knew that you wouldn’t
have much time between bites, so you asked for variety to spice things up. Good
call. But when the maître d’ asked you to order a sequence of meals in advance,
you asked for variety then too. Why did you ask for variety when you already
had time? Blame the spatial metaphor (see figure 15). Because you thought of
dishes that were separated in time by imagining dishes that were separated by a
few inches on a single table, you assumed that what was true of spatially
separated dishes would be true of temporally separated dishes as well. When
dishes are separated by space, it makes perfectly good sense to seek variety.
After all, who would want to sit down at a table with twelve identical servings of
partridge? We love sampler plates, pupu platters, and all-you-can-eat buffets
because we want—and should want—variety among alternatives that we will
experience in a single episode. The problem is that when we reason by metaphor
and think of a dozen successive meals in a dozen successive months as though
they were a dozen dishes arranged on a long table in front of us, we mistakenly
treat sequential alternatives as though they were simultaneous alternatives. This
is a mistake because sequential alternatives already have time on their side,
hence variety makes them less pleasurable rather than more.
Fig. 15. Simultaneous consumption (left) and sequential consumption (right).
Starting Now
Because time is so difficult to imagine, we sometimes imagine it as a spatial
dimension. And sometimes we just don’t imagine it at all. For example, when we
imagine future events, our mental images will usually include the relevant
people, places, words, and actions, but they rarely include a clear indication of
the time at which those people in those places are speaking and acting. When we
imagine ourselves discovering our spouse’s infidelity on New Year’s Eve, our
mental image looks very much like a mental image of ourselves discovering the
infidelity on Purim, Halloween, or Russian Orthodox Easter. Indeed, the mental
image of finding your spouse in bed with the mailman on New Year’s Eve
changes dramatically when you substitute barber for spouse, or conversation for
bed, but hardly at all when you substitute Thanksgiving for New Year’s Eve. In
fact, it is just about impossible to make this substitution because, alas, there is
nothing in the mental image to change. We can inspect a mental image and see
who is doing what and where, but not when they are doing it. In general, mental
images are atemporal.
11
So how do we decide how we will feel about things that are going to happen
in the future? The answer is that we tend to imagine how we would feel if those
things happened now, and then we make some allowance for the fact that now
and later are not exactly the same thing. For instance, ask a heterosexual teenage
boy how he would feel if one of the Budweiser babes were to show up at his
door right now, bikini-clad, cooing, and in desperate need of a massage. His
reaction will be visible. He will smile, his eyes will widen, his pupils will
contract, his cheeks will flush, and other systems will respond as nature
intended. Now, if you ask a different teenage boy precisely the same question
but substitute the phrase in fifty years for right now, you will notice
approximately the same initial response. Indeed, for a moment you might even
suspect that this second teenager is focusing entirely on his mental image of the
barefoot goddess with the bee-sting lips and that he is failing to consider the fact
that this imaginary event is supposed to be taking place a half-century hence. But
give him some time—say, a few hundred milliseconds. As the milliseconds pass,
you will notice that his initial rush of enthusiasm fades as he considers the date
of the imaginary event, realizes that adolescent males have one set of needs and
grandfathers another, and correctly concludes that a cameo appearance by a
nubile nymphet will probably not be quite as stimulating in his golden years as it
would be in his testosterone-charged present. His initial flip and subsequent flop
are quite revealing because they suggest that when he was asked to imagine the
future event, he began by imagining the event as though it were happening in the
present and only then considered the fact that the event would take place in the
future, when maturity will have taken its inevitable toll on his eyesight and his
libido.
Why does this matter? After all, in the final analysis the teenager did take into
account the fact that now and five decades from now are not the same thing, so
who cares if he considered this fact only after he was momentarily transfixed by
his mental image of the airbrushed vixen from Planet Bud? I care. And you
should care too. By imagining the event happening now and then correcting for
the fact that it was actually going to happen later, the teenager used a method for
making judgments that is quite common but that inevitably leads to error.
12 To
understand the nature of this error, consider a study in which volunteers were
asked to guess how many African countries belonged to the United Nations.
13
Rather than answering the question straightaway, the volunteers were asked to
make their judgments by using the flip-then-flop method. Some volunteers were
asked to give their answer by saying how much larger or smaller it was than ten,
and other volunteers were asked to answer by saying how much larger or smaller
it was than sixty. In other words, volunteers were given an arbitrary starting
point and were asked to correct it until they reached an appropriate ending point
—just as the teenager used an image of a beautiful woman in the present
moment as a starting point for his judgment (“I’m wildly excited!”) and then
corrected it to achieve an ending point for his judgment (“But since I’ll be sixtyseven years old when all this happens, I probably won’t be quite as excited as I
am now”).
The problem with this method of making judgments is that starting points
have a profound impact on ending points. Volunteers who started with ten
guessed that there were about twenty-five African nations in the U.N., whereas
volunteers who started with sixty guessed that there were about forty-five. Why
such different answers? Because volunteers began their task by asking
themselves whether the starting point could be the right answer, and then,
realizing that it could not, moved slowly toward a more reasonable one (“Ten
can’t be right. How about twelve? No, still too low. Fourteen? Maybe twentyfive?”).
14 Alas, because this process requires time and attention, the group that
started with ten and the group that started with sixty got tired and quit before
they met in the middle. This really isn’t so strange. If you asked a child to count
upward from zero and another child to count downward from a million, you
could be pretty sure that when they finally got exhausted, gave up, and went off
in search of eggs to throw at your garage door, they would have reached very
different numbers. Starting points matter because we often end up close to where
we started.
When people predict future feelings by imagining a future event as though it
were happening in the present and then correcting for the event’s actual location
in time, they make the same error. For example, volunteers in one study were
asked to predict how much they would enjoy eating a bite of spaghetti and meat
sauce the next morning or the next afternoon.
15 Some of the volunteers were
hungry when they made this prediction, and some were not. When volunteers
made these predictions under ideal conditions, they predicted that they would
enjoy spaghetti more in the afternoon than in the morning, and their current
hunger had little impact on their predictions. But some of the volunteers made
these predictions under less-than-ideal conditions. Specifically, they were asked
to make these predictions while simultaneously performing a second task in
which they had to identify musical tones. Research has shown that performing a
simultaneous task such as this one causes people to stay very close to their
starting points. And indeed, when volunteers made predictions while identifying
musical tones, they predicted that they would like spaghetti just as much in the
morning as in the afternoon. What’s more, their current hunger had a strong
impact on their predictions, so that hungry volunteers expected to like spaghetti
the next day (no matter when they ate it) and sated volunteers expected to dislike
spaghetti the next day (no matter when they ate it). This pattern of results
suggests that all volunteers made their predictions by the flip-then-flop method:
They first imagined how much they would enjoy eating the spaghetti in the
present (“Yum!” if they were hungry and “Yuck!” if they were full) and used
this prefeeling as a starting point for their prediction of tomorrow’s pleasures.
Then, just as the hypothetical teenager corrected his judgment when he
considered the fact that his current appreciation of a curvaceous coquette would
probably be different fifty years later, the volunteers corrected their judgments
by considering the time of day at which the spaghetti would be eaten (“Spaghetti
for dinner is terrific, but spaghetti for breakfast? Yuck!”). However, volunteers
who had made their predictions while identifying musical tones were unable to
correct their judgments, and as such, their ending point was quite close to their
starting point. Because we naturally use our present feelings as a starting point
when we attempt to predict our future feelings, we expect our future to feel a bit
more like our present than it actually will.
16
Next to Nothing
If you have no special talents or intriguing deformities but are still harboring a
secret desire to get into Guinness World Records, here’s something you might
try: March into your boss’s office on Monday morning and say, “I’ve been with
the company for some time, I believe my work has been excellent, and I’d like a
fifteen percent pay cut . . . though I could settle for ten if that’s all the firm can
manage right now.” The Guinness folks will be taking careful notes because in
the long and often contentious history of labor relations, it is unlikely that
anyone has ever before demanded a pay cut. Indeed, people hate pay cuts, but
research suggests that the reason they hate pay cuts has very little to do with the
pay part and everything to do with the cut part. For instance, when people are
asked whether they would prefer to have a job at which they earned $30,000 the
first year, $40,000 the second year, and $50,000 the third year, or a job at which
they earned $60,000 then $50,000 then $40,000, they generally prefer the job
with the increasing wages, despite the fact that they would earn less money over
the course of the three years.
17 This is quite curious. Why would people be
willing to reduce their total income in order to avoid experiencing a cut in pay?
Comparing with the Past
If you’ve ever fallen asleep one night with the television blaring and been
awakened another night by a single footstep, then you already know the answer.
The human brain is not particularly sensitive to the absolute magnitude of
stimulation, but it is extraordinarily sensitive to differences and changes—that is,
to the relative magnitude of stimulation. For example, if I blindfolded you and
asked you to hold a wooden block in your hand, would you be able to tell if I
then placed a pack of gum on top of it? The right answer is “It depends,” and
what it depends on is the weight of the block. If the block weighed only an
ounce, then you’d immediately notice the 500 percent increase in weight when I
added a five-ounce pack of gum. But if the block weighed ten pounds, then
you’d never notice the .03 percent increase in weight. There is no answer to the
question “Can people detect five ounces?” because brains do not detect ounces,
they detect changes in ounces and differences in ounces, and the same is true for
just about every physical property of an object. Our sensitivity to relative rather
than absolute magnitudes is not limited to physical properties such as weight,
brightness, or volume. It extends to subjective properties, such as value,
goodness, and worth as well.
18 For instance, most of us would be willing to drive
across town to save $50 on the purchase of a $100 radio but not on the purchase
of a $100,000 automobile because $50 seems like a fortune when we’re buying
radios (“Wow, Target has the same radio for half off!”) but a pittance when
we’re buying cars (“Like I’m going to schlep across the city just to get this car
for one twentieth of a percent less?”).
19
Economists shake their heads at this kind of behavior and will correctly tell
you that your bank account contains absolute dollars and not “percentages off.”
If it is worth driving across town to save $50, then it doesn’t matter which item
you’re saving it on because when you spend these dollars on gas and groceries,
the dollars won’t know where they came from.
20 But these economic arguments
fall on deaf ears because human beings don’t think in absolute dollars. They
think in relative dollars, and fifty is or isn’t a lot of dollars depending on what it
is relative to (which is why people who don’t worry about whether their mutualfund manager is keeping 0.5 or 0.6 percent of their investment will nonetheless
spend hours scouring the Sunday paper for a coupon that gives them 40 percent
off a tube of toothpaste). Marketers, politicians, and other agents of influence
know about our obsession with relative magnitudes and routinely turn it to their
own advantage. For instance, one ancient ploy involves asking someone to pay
an unrealistically large cost (“Would you come to our Save the Bears meeting
next Friday and then join us Saturday for a protest march at the zoo?”) before
asking them to pay a smaller cost (“Okay then, could you at least contribute five
dollars to our organization?”). Studies show that people are much more likely to
agree to pay the small cost after having first contemplated the large one, in part
because doing so makes the small cost seems so . . . er, bearable.
21
Because the subjective value of a commodity is relative, it shifts and changes
depending on what we compare the commodity to. For instance, every morning
on my walk to work I stop at my neighborhood Starbucks and hand $1.89 to the
barista, who then hands me twenty ounces of better-than-average coffee. I have
no idea what it costs Starbucks to make this coffee, and I have no idea why they
have chosen to charge me this particular amount, but I do know that if I stopped
in one morning and found that the price had suddenly jumped to $2.89, I would
immediately do one of two things: I would compare the new price to the price I
used to pay, conclude that coffee at Starbucks had gotten too damned expensive,
and invest in one of those vacuum-sealed travel mugs and start brewing my
coffee at home; or I would compare the new price to the price of other things I
could buy with the same amount of cash (e.g., two felt-tip markers, a thirty-twoinch branch of artificial bamboo, or 1/100th of the twenty-CD boxed set The
Complete Miles Davis at Montreux) and conclude that the coffee at Starbucks
was a bargain. In theory I could make either of these comparisons, so which one
would I actually make?
We both know the answer to that: I’d make the easy one. When I encounter a
$2.89 cup of coffee, it’s all too easy for me to recall what I paid for coffee the
day before and not so easy for me to imagine all the other things I might buy
with my money.
22 Because it is so much easier for me to remember the past than
to generate new possibilities, I will tend to compare the present with the past
even when I ought to be comparing it with the possible. And that is indeed what
I ought to be doing because it really doesn’t matter what coffee cost the day
before, the week before, or at any time during the Hoover administration. Right
now I have absolute dollars to spend and the only question I need to answer is
how to spend them in order to maximize my satisfaction. If an international bean
embargo suddenly caused the price of coffee to skyrocket to $10,000 per cup,
then the only question I would need to ask myself is: “What else can I do with
ten thousand dollars, and will it bring me more or less satisfaction than a cup of
coffee?” If the answer is “more,” then I should walk away. If the answer is
“less,” then I should get a cup of coffee. And an accountant with a whip.
The fact that it is so much easier to remember the past than to generate the
possible causes us to make plenty of weird decisions. For instance, people are
more likely to purchase a vacation package that has been marked down from
$600 to $500 than an identical package that costs $400 but that was on sale the
previous day for $300.
23 Because it is easier to compare a vacation package’s
price with its former price than with the price of other things one might buy, we
end up preferring bad deals that have become decent deals to great deals that
were once amazing deals. The same tendency leads us to treat commodities that
have a “memorable past” differently from those that don’t. For example, imagine
that you have a $20 bill and a $20 concert ticket in your wallet, but when you
arrive at the concert you realize that you’ve lost the ticket en route. Would you
buy a new one? Most people say no.
24 Now imagine that instead of a $20 bill
and a $20 ticket, you have two $20 bills in your wallet, and when you arrive at
the concert you realize that you’ve lost one of the bills en route. Would you buy
a concert ticket? Most people say yes. It doesn’t take a logician to see that the
two examples are identical in all the ways that matter: In both cases you’ve lost a
piece of paper that was valued at $20 (a ticket or a bill), and in both cases you
must now decide whether to spend the money that remains in your wallet on a
concert. Nonetheless, our stubborn insistence on comparing the present to the
past leads us to reason differently about these functionally equivalent cases.
When we lose a $20 bill and then contemplate buying a concert ticket for the
first time, the concert has no past, hence we correctly compare the cost of seeing
the concert with other possibilities (“Should I spend twenty dollars to see the
concert, or should I buy some new sharkskin mittens?”). But when we lose a
ticket we’ve previously purchased and contemplate “replacing it,” the concert
has a past, and hence we compare the current cost of seeing the concert ($40)
with its previous cost ($20) and feel disinclined to see a performance whose
price has suddenly doubled.
Comparing with the Possible
We make mistakes when we compare with the past instead of the possible. When
we do compare with the possible, we still make mistakes. For example, if you’re
like me, your living room is a mini-warehouse of durable goods ranging from
chairs and lamps to stereos and television sets. You probably shopped around a
bit before buying these items, and you probably compared the one you
ultimately bought with a few alternatives—other lamps in the same catalog,
other chairs on the showroom floor, other stereos on the same shelf, other
televisions at the same mall. Rather than deciding whether to spend money, you
were deciding how to spend money, and all the possible ways of spending your
money were laid out for you by the nice folks who wanted it. These nice folks
helped you overcome your natural tendency to compare with the past (“Is this
television really that much better than my old one?”) by making it extremely
easy for you to compare with the possible (“When you see them side by side
here in the store, the Panasonic has a much sharper picture than the Sony”).
Alas, we are all too easily fooled by such side-by-side comparisons, which is
why retailers work so hard to ensure that we make them.
For example, people generally don’t like to buy the most expensive item in a
category, hence retailers can improve their sales by stocking a few very
expensive items that no one actually buys (“Oh my God, the 1982 Château HautBrion Pessac-Léognan sells for five hundred dollars a bottle!”) but that make
less expensive items seem like a bargain by comparison (“I’ll just stick with the
sixty-dollar zinfandel”).
25 Unscrupulous real estate agents bring buyers to
dilapidated dumps that are conveniently located between a massage parlor and a
crack house before bringing them to the ordinary homes that they actually hope
to sell, because the dumps make the ordinary homes seem extraordinary (“Oh,
look, honey, no needles on the lawn!”).
26 Our side-by-side comparisons can be
influenced by extreme possibilities such as extravagant wines and dilapidated
houses, but they can also be influenced by the addition of extra possibilities that
are identical to those we are already considering. For example, in one study,
physicians read about Medication X and were then asked whether they would
prescribe the medication for a patient with osteoarthritis.
27 The physicians
clearly considered the medication worthwhile, because only 28 percent chose not
to prescribe it. But when another group of physicians was asked whether they
would prescribe Medication X or an equally effective Medication Y for a patient
with the same disease, 48 percent chose to prescribe nothing. Apparently, adding
another equally effective medication to the list of possibilities made it difficult
for the physicians to decide between the two medications, thus leading many of
them to recommend neither. If you’ve ever caught yourself saying, “I’m having
such a hard time deciding between these two movies that I think I’ll just stay
home and watch reruns instead,” then you know why physicians made the
mistake they did.
28
One of the most insidious things about side-by-side comparison is that it leads
us to pay attention to any attribute that distinguishes the possibilities we are
comparing.
29
I’ve probably spent some of the unhappiest hours of my life in
stores that I meant to visit for fifteen minutes. I stop at the mall on the way to the
picnic, park the car, dash in, and expect to reemerge a few minutes later with a
nifty little digital camera in my pocket. But when I get to Wacky Bob’s Giant
Mega Super Really Big World of Cameras, I am confronted by a bewildering
panoply of nifty little digital cameras that differ on many attributes. Some of
these are attributes that I would have considered even if there had been only one
camera in the display case (“This is light enough to fit in my shirt pocket so I
can take it anywhere”), and some are attributes I would never have thought about
had the differences between cameras not been called to my attention (“The
Olympus has flash output compensation, but the Nikon doesn’t. By the way,
what is flash output compensation?”). Because side-by-side comparisons cause
me to consider all the attributes on which the cameras differ, I end up
considering attributes that I don’t really care about but that just so happen to
distinguish one camera from another.
30 For example, what attributes would you
care about if you were shopping for a new dictionary? In one study, people were
given the opportunity to bid on a dictionary that was in perfect condition and that
listed ten thousand words, and on average they bid $24.
31 Other people were
given the opportunity to bid on a dictionary with a torn cover that listed twenty
thousand words, and on average they bid $20. But when a third group of people
was allowed to compare the two dictionaries side by side, they bid $19 for the
small intact dictionary and $27 for the large torn dictionary. Apparently, people
care about the condition of a dictionary’s cover, but they care about the number
of words it contains only when that attribute is brought to their attention by sideby-side comparison.
Comparing and Presentism
Now let’s step back for a moment and ask what all of these facts about
comparison mean for our ability to imagine future feelings. The facts are these:
(a) value is determined by the comparison of one thing with another; (b) there is
more than one kind of comparison we can make in any given instance; and (c)
we may value something more highly when we make one kind of comparison
than when we make a different kind of comparison. These facts suggest that if
we want to predict how something will make us feel in the future, we must
consider the kind of comparison we will be making in the future and not the kind
of comparison we happen to be making in the present. Alas, because we make
comparisons without even thinking about them (“Man, that coffee has gotten
expensive!” or “I’m not paying double to see this concert”), we rarely consider
the fact that the comparisons we are making now may not be the ones we will be
making later.
32 For example, volunteers in one study were asked to sit at a table
and predict how much they would enjoy eating potato chips a few minutes
later.
33 Some of the volunteers saw a bag of potato chips and a chocolate bar
sitting on the table, and others saw a bag of potato chips and a tin of sardines
sitting on the table. Did these extraneous foods influence the volunteers’
predictions? You bet they did. Volunteers naturally compared the potato chips
with the extraneous food, and they predicted that they’d like eating the potato
chips more when they compared the chips to the sardines than when they
compared the chips to chocolate. But they were wrong. Because when volunteers
actually ate the potato chips, the sardine tin and the chocolate bar that were
sitting on the table had no influence whatsoever on their enjoyment of the chips.
After all, when one has a mouthful of crispy, salty, oily, fried potatoes, another
food item that just so happens to be sitting there on the table is largely irrelevant
—just as the person you might have been making love with is largely irrelevant
when you are in the middle of making love with someone else. What the
volunteers didn’t realize was that the comparisons they made as they imagined
eating a chip (“Sure, chips are okay . . . but chocolate is so much better”) were
not the comparisons they would make when they were actually chowing down
on one.
Most of us have had similar experiences. We compare the small, elegant
speakers with the huge, boxy speakers, notice the acoustical difference, and buy
the hulking leviathans. Alas, the acoustical difference is a difference we never
notice again, because when we get the monster speakers home we do not
compare their sound to the sound of some speaker we listened to a week earlier
at the store, but we do compare their awful boxiness to the rest of our sleek,
elegant, and now-spoiled décor. Or we travel to France, meet a couple from our
hometown, and instantly become touring buddies because compared with all
those French people who hate us when we don’t try to speak their language and
hate us more when we do, the hometown couple seems exceptionally warm and
interesting. We are delighted to have found these new friends, and we expect to
like them just as much in the future as we do today. But when we have them
over for dinner a month after returning home, we are surprised to find that our
new friends are rather boring and remote compared with our regular friends, and
that we actually dislike them enough to qualify for French citizenship. Our
mistake was not in touring Paris with a couple of dull homies but in failing to
realize that the comparison we were making in the present (“Lisa and Walter are
so much nicer than the waiter at Le Grand Colbert”) is not the comparison we
would be making in the future (“Lisa and Walter aren’t nearly as nice as Toni
and Dan”). The same principle explains why we love new things when we buy
them and then stop loving them shortly thereafter. When we start shopping for a
new pair of sunglasses, we naturally contrast the hip, stylish ones in the store
with the old, outdated ones that are sitting on our noses. So we buy the new ones
and stick the old ones in a drawer. But after just a few days of wearing our new
sunglasses we stop comparing them with the old pair, and—well, what do you
know? The delight that the comparison produced evaporates.
The fact that we make different comparisons at different times—but don’t
realize that we will do so—helps explain some otherwise puzzling conundrums.
For instance, economists and psychologists have shown that people expect
losing a dollar to have more impact than gaining a dollar, which is why most of
us would refuse a bet that gives us an 85 percent chance of doubling our life
savings and a 15 percent chance of losing it.
34 The likely prospect of a big gain
just doesn’t compensate for the unlikely prospect of a big loss because we think
losses are more powerful than equal-sized gains. But whether we think of
something as a gain or a loss often depends on the comparisons we are making.
For example, how much is a 1993 Mazda Miata worth? According to my
insurance company, the correct answer this year is about $2,000. But as the
owner of a 1993 Mazda Miata, I can guarantee that if you wanted to buy my
sweet little car with all of its adorable dents and mischievous rattles for a mere
$2,000, you’d have to pry the keys out of my cold, dead hands. I also guarantee
that if you saw my car, you’d think that for $2,000 I should not only give you the
car and the keys but that I should throw in a bicycle, a lawn mower, and a
lifetime subscription to The Atlantic. Why would we disagree about the fair
value of my car? Because you would be thinking about the transaction as a
potential gain (“Compared with how I feel now, how happy will I be if I get this
car?”) and I would be thinking about it as a potential loss (“Compared with how
I feel now, how happy will I be if I lose this car?”).
35
I would want to be
compensated for what I expected to be a powerful loss, but you would not want
to compensate me because you would be expecting a less powerful gain. What
you would be failing to realize is that once you owned my car, your frame of
reference would shift, you would be making the same comparison that I am now
making, and that the car would be worth every penny you paid for it. What I
would be failing to realize is that once I didn’t own the car, my frame of
reference would shift, I would be making the same comparison that you’re
making now, and that I’d be delighted with the deal because, after all, I’d never
pay $2,000 for a car that was identical to the one I just sold you. The reason why
we disagree on the price and quietly question each other’s integrity and
parenthood is that neither of us realizes that the kinds of comparisons we are
naturally making as buyers and sellers are not the kinds of comparisons we will
naturally make once we become owners and former owners.
36
In short, the
comparisons we make have a profound impact on our feelings, and when we fail
to recognize that the comparisons we are making today are not the comparisons
we will make tomorrow, we predictably underestimate how differently we will
feel in the future.
Onward
Historians use the word presentism to describe the tendency to judge historical
figures by contemporary standards. As much as we all despise racism and
sexism, these isms have only recently been considered moral turpitudes, and thus
condemning Thomas Jefferson for keeping slaves or Sigmund Freud for
patronizing women is a bit like arresting someone today for having driven
without a seat belt in 1923. And yet, the temptation to view the past through the
lens of the present is nothing short of overwhelming. As the president of the
American Historical Association noted, “Presentism admits of no ready solution;
it turns out to be very difficult to exit from modernity.”
37 The good news is that
most of us aren’t historians and thus we don’t have to worry about finding that
particular exit. The bad news is that all of us are futurians, and presentism is an
even bigger problem when people look forward rather than backward. Because
predictions about the future are made in the present, they are inevitably
influenced by the present. The way we feel right now (“I’m so hungry”) and the
way we think right now (“The big speakers sound better than the little ones”)
exert an unusually strong influence on the way we think we’ll feel later. Because
time is such a slippery concept, we tend to imagine the future as the present with
a twist, thus our imagined tomorrows inevitably look like slightly twisted
versions of today. The reality of the moment is so palpable and powerful that it
holds imagination in a tight orbit from which it never fully escapes. Presentism
occurs because we fail to recognize that our future selves won’t see the world the
way we see it now. As we are about to learn, this fundamental inability to take
the perspective of the person to whom the rest of our lives will happen is the
most insidious problem a futurian can face.
PART V
Rationalization
ra•tion•al•i•za•tion (rae•shen•ăl•i•zē•shen)
The act of causing something to be or to seem reasonable.
CHAPTER 8
Paradise Glossed
For there is nothing either good or bad, but thinking makes it so.
Shakespeare, Hamlet Prince of Denmark
FORGET YOGA. Forget liposuction. And forget those herbal supplements that
promise to improve your memory, enhance your mood, reduce your waistline,
restore your hairline, prolong your lovemaking, and improve your memory. If
you want to be happy and healthy, you should try a new technique that has the
power to transform the grumpy, underpaid chump you are now into the deeply
fulfilled, enlightened individual you’ve always hoped to be. If you don’t believe
me, then just consider the testimony of some folks who’ve tried it:
• “I am so much better off physically, financially, mentally, and in
almost every other way.” (JW from Texas)
• “It was a glorious experience.” (MB from Louisiana)
• “I didn’t appreciate others nearly as much as I do now.” (CR from
California)
Who are these satisfied customers, and what is the miraculous technique they’re
all talking about? Jim Wright, former Speaker of the United States House of
Representatives, made his remark after committing sixty-nine ethics violations
and being forced to resign in disgrace. Moreese Bickham, a former inmate, made
his remark upon being released from the Louisiana State Penitentiary where he’d
served thirty-seven years for defending himself against the Ku Klux Klansmen
who’d shot him. And Christopher Reeve, the dashing star of Superman, made his
remark after an equestrian accident left him paralyzed from the neck down,
unable to breathe without the help of a ventilator. The moral of the story? If you
want to be happy, healthy, wealthy, and wise, then skip the vitamin pills and the
plastic surgeries and try public humiliation, unjust incarceration, or quadriplegia
instead.
Uh-huh. Right. Are we really supposed to believe that people who lose their
jobs, their freedom, and their mobility are somehow improved by the tragedies
that befall them? If that strikes you as a far-fetched possibility, then you are not
alone. For at least a century, psychologists have assumed that terrible events—
such as having a loved one die or becoming the victim of a violent crime—must
have a powerful, devastating, and enduring impact on those who experience
them.
1 This assumption has been so deeply embedded in our conventional
wisdom that people who don’t have dire reactions to events such as these are
sometimes diagnosed as having a pathological condition known as “absent
grief.” But recent research suggests that the conventional wisdom is wrong, that
the absence of grief is quite normal, and that rather than being the fragile flowers
that a century of psychologists have made us out to be, most people are
surprisingly resilient in the face of trauma. The loss of a parent or spouse is
usually sad and often tragic, and it would be perverse to suggest otherwise. But
the fact is that while most bereaved people are quite sad for a while, very few
become chronically depressed and most experience relatively low levels of
relatively short-lived distress.
2 Although more than half the people in the United
States will experience a trauma such as rape, physical assault, or natural disaster
in their lifetimes, only a small fraction will ever develop any post-traumatic
pathology or require any professional assistance.
3 As one group of researchers
noted, “Resilience is often the most commonly observed outcome trajectory
following exposure to a potentially traumatic event.”
4
Indeed, studies of those
who survive major traumas suggest that the vast majority do quite well, and that
a significant portion claim that their lives were enhanced by the experience.
5
I
know, I know. It sounds suspiciously like the title of a country song, but the fact
is that most folks do pretty darn good when things go pretty darn bad.
If resilience is all around us, then why are statistics such as these so
surprising? Why do most of us find it difficult to believe that we could ever
consider a lifetime behind bars to be “a glorious experience”
6 or come to see
paralysis as “a unique opportunity” that gave “a new direction”
7
to our lives?
Why do most of us shake our heads in disbelief when an athlete who has been
through several grueling years of chemotherapy tells us that “I wouldn’t change
anything,”
8 or when a musician who has become permanently disabled says, “If
I had it to do all over again, I would want it to happen the same way,”
9 or when
quadriplegics and paraplegics tell us that they are pretty much as happy as
everyone else?
10 The claims made by people who have experienced events such
as these seem frankly outlandish to those of us who are merely imagining those
events—and yet, who are we to argue with the folks who’ve actually been there?
The fact is that negative events do affect us, but they generally don’t affect us
as much or for as long as we expect them to.
11 When people are asked to predict
how they’ll feel if they lose a job or a romantic partner, if their candidate loses
an important election or their team loses an important game, if they flub an
interview, flunk an exam, or fail a contest, they consistently overestimate how
awful they’ll feel and how long they’ll feel awful.
12 Able-bodied people are
willing to pay far more to avoid becoming disabled than disabled people are
willing to pay to become able-bodied again because able-bodied people
underestimate how happy disabled people are.
13 As one group of researchers
noted, “Chronically ill and disabled patients generally rate the value of their
lives in a given health state more highly than do hypothetical patients [who are]
imagining themselves to be in such states.”
14
Indeed, healthy people imagine
that eighty-three states of illness would be “worse than death,” and yet, people
who are actually in those states rarely take their own lives.
15
If negative events
don’t hit us as hard as we expect them to, then why do we expect them to? If
heartbreaks and calamities can be blessings in disguise, then why are their
disguises so convincing? The answer is that the human mind tends to exploit
ambiguity—and if that phrase seems ambiguous to you, then just keep reading
and let me exploit it.
Stop Annoying People
The only thing more difficult than finding a needle in a haystack is finding a
needle in a needlestack. When an object is surrounded by similar objects it
naturally blends in, and when it is surrounded by dissimilar objects it naturally
stands out. Look at figure 16. If you had a stopwatch that counted milliseconds,
you’d find that you can locate the letter O in the array on the top (where it is
surrounded by numbers) a bit more quickly than you can locate it in the array on
the bottom (where it is surrounded by other letters). And that makes sense,
because it is harder to find a letter among letters than a letter among numbers.
And yet, had I asked you to look for “zero” instead of “the letter O,” you would
have been a bit faster to find it in the array at the bottom than in the array at the
top.
16 Now, most of us think that a basic sensory ability such as vision is pretty
well explained by its wiring, and if you wanted to understand this ability, you
would do well to learn about luminance, contrast, rods, cones, optic nerves,
retinas, and the like. But once you knew everything there was to know about the
physical properties of the arrays shown in figure 16 and everything there was to
know about the anatomy of the human eye, you would still not be able to explain
why a person can find the circle more quickly in one case than in the other
unless you also knew what that person thought the circle meant.
Fig. 16.
Meanings matter for even the most basic psychological processes, and while
this may seem perfectly obvious to reasonable folks like you and me, ignorance
of this perfectly obvious fact sent psychologists on a wild-goose chase that lasted
nearly thirty years and produced relatively few geese. For much of the last half
of the twentieth century, experimental psychologists timed rats as they ran mazes
and observed pigeons as they pecked keys because they believed that the best
way to understand behavior was to map the relation between a stimulus and an
organism’s response to that stimulus. By carefully measuring what an organism
did when it was presented with a physical stimulus, such as a light, a sound, or a
piece of food, psychologists hoped to develop a science that linked observable
stimuli to observable behavior without using vague and squishy concepts such as
meaning to connect them. Alas, this simpleminded project was doomed from the
start, because while rats and pigeons may respond to stimuli as they are
presented in the world, people respond to stimuli as they are represented in the
mind. Objective stimuli in the world create subjective stimuli in the mind, and it
is these subjective stimuli to which people react. For instance, the middle letters
in the two words in figure 17 are physically identical stimuli (I promise—I cut
and pasted them myself), and yet, most English speakers respond to them
differently—see them differently, pronounce them differently, remember them
differently—because one represents the letter H and the other represents the
letter A. Indeed, it would be more appropriate to say that one is the letter H and
the other is the letter A because the identity of an inky squiggle has less to do
with how it is objectively constructed and more to do with how we subjectively
interpret it. Two vertical lines with a crossbar mean one thing when flanked by T
and E and they mean another thing when flanked by C and T, and one of the
many things that distinguishes us from rats and pigeons is that we respond to the
meanings of such stimuli and not to the stimuli themselves. That’s why my
father can get away with calling me “doodlebug” and you can’t.
Fig. 17. The middle shape has different meanings in different contexts.
Disambiguating Objects
Most stimuli are ambiguous—that is, they can mean more than one thing—and
the interesting question is how we disambiguate them—that is, how we know
which of a stimulus’s many meanings to infer on a particular occasion. Research
shows that context, frequency, and recency are especially important in this
regard.
• Consider context. The word bank has two meanings in English: “a
place where money is kept” and “the land on either side of a river.” Yet we
never misunderstand sentences such as “The boat ran into the bank” or
“The robber ran into the bank” because the words boat and robber provide
a context that tells us which of the two meanings of bank we should infer in
each case.
• Consider frequency. Our past encounters with a stimulus provide
information about which of its meanings we should embrace. For example,
a loan officer is likely to interpret the sentence “Don’t run into the bank” as
a warning about how to ambulate through his place of business and not as
sound advice about the steering of boats because in the course of a typical
day the loan officer hears the word bank used more frequently in its
financial than in its maritime sense.
• Consider recency. Even a boater is likely to interpret the sentence
“Don’t run into the bank” as a reference to a financial institution rather than
a river’s edge if she recently saw an ad for safe-deposit boxes and thus has
the financial meaning of bank still active in her mind. Indeed, because I’ve
been talking about banks in this paragraph, I am willing to bet that the
sentence “He put a check in the box” causes you to generate a mental image
of someone placing a piece of paper in a receptacle and not a mental image
of someone making a mark on a questionnaire. (I’m also willing to guess
that your interpretation of the title of this section depends on whether you
annoyed someone more or less recently than someone annoyed you.)
Unlike rats and pigeons, then, we respond to meanings—and context,
frequency, and recency are three of the factors that determine which meaning we
will infer when we encounter an ambiguous stimulus. But there is another factor
of equal importance and greater interest. Like rats and pigeons, each of us has
desires, wishes, and needs. We are not merely spectators of the world but
investors in it, and we often prefer that an ambiguous stimulus mean one thing
rather than another. Consider, for example, the drawing of a box in figure 18.
This object (called the Necker cube after the Swiss crystallographer who
discovered it in 1832) is inherently ambiguous, and you can prove this to
yourself simply by staring at it for a few seconds. At first, the box appears to be
sitting on its side and you have the sense that you’re looking out at a box that is
across from you. The dot is inside the box, at the place where the back panel and
the bottom panel meet. But if you stare long enough, the drawing suddenly
shifts, the box appears to be standing on its end, and you have the sense that
you’re looking down on a box that is below you. The dot is now perched on the
upper right corner of the box. Because this drawing has two equally meaningful
interpretations, your brain merrily switches back and forth between them,
keeping you mildly entertained until you eventually get dizzy and fall down. But
what if one of these meanings were better than the other? That is, what if you
preferred one of the interpretations of this object? Experiments show that when
subjects are rewarded for seeing the box across from them or below them, the
orientation for which they were rewarded starts “popping out” more often and
their brains “hold on” to that interpretation without switching.
17
In other words,
when your brain is at liberty to interpret a stimulus in more than one way, it
tends to interpret it the way it wants to, which is to say that your preferences
influence your interpretations of stimuli in just the same way that context,
frequency, and recency do.
Fig. 18. If you stare at a Necker cube, it will appear to shift its orientation.
This phenomenon is not limited to the interpretation of weird drawings. For
example, why is it that you think of yourself as a talented person? (C’mon, give
it up. You know you do.) To answer this question, researchers asked some
volunteers (definers) to write down their definition of talented and then to
estimate their talent using that definition as a guide.
18 Next, some other
volunteers (nondefiners) were given the definitions that the first group had
written down and were asked to estimate their own talent using those definitions
as a guide. Interestingly, the definers rated themselves as more talented than the
nondefiners did. Because definers were given the liberty to define the word
talented any way they wished, they defined it exactly the way they wished—
namely, in terms of some activity at which they just so happened to excel (“I
think talent usually refers to exceptional artistic achievement like, for example,
this painting I just finished,” or “Talent means an ability you’re born with, such
as being much stronger than other people. Shall I put you down now?”).
Definers were able to set the standards for talent, and not coincidentally, they
were more likely to meet the standards they set. One of the reasons why most of
us think of ourselves as talented, friendly, wise, and fair-minded is that these
words are the lexical equivalents of a Necker cube, and the human mind
naturally exploits each word’s ambiguity for its own gratification.
Disambiguating Experience
Of course, the richest sources of exploitable ambiguity are not words, sentences,
or shapes but the intricate, variegated, multidimensional experiences of which
every human life is a collage. If a Necker cube has two possible interpretations
and talent has fourteen possible interpretations, then leaving home or falling ill
or getting a job with the U.S. Postal Service has hundreds or thousands of
possible interpretations. The things that happen to us—getting married, raising a
child, finding a job, resigning from Congress, going to prison, becoming
paralyzed—are much more complex than an inky squiggle or a colored cube,
and that complexity creates loads of ambiguity that just begs to be exploited. It
doesn’t have to beg hard. For example, volunteers in one study were told that
they would be eating a delicious but unhealthy ice cream sundae (ice cream
eaters), and others were told that they would be eating a bitter but healthful plate
of fresh kale (kale eaters).
19 Before actually eating these foods, the researchers
asked the volunteers to rate the similarity of a number of foods, including ice
cream sundaes, kale, and Spam (which everyone considered both unpalatable
and unhealthful). The results showed that ice cream eaters thought that Spam
was more like kale than it was like ice cream. Why? Because for some odd
reason, ice cream eaters were thinking about food in terms of its taste—and
unlike kale and Spam, ice cream tastes delicious. On the other hand, kale eaters
thought that Spam was more like ice cream than it was like kale. Why? Because
for some odd reason, kale eaters were thinking about food in terms of its
healthfulness—and unlike kale, ice cream and Spam are unhealthful. The odd
reason isn’t really so odd. Just as a Necker cube is both across from you and
below you, ice cream is both fattening and tasty, and kale is both healthful and
bitter. Your brain and my brain easily jump back and forth between these
different ways of thinking about the foods because we are merely reading about
them. But if we were preparing to eat one of them, our brains would
automatically exploit the ambiguity of that food’s identity and allow us to think
of it in a way that pleased us (delicious dessert or nutritious veggie) rather than a
way that did not (fattening dessert or bitter veggie). As soon as our potential
experience becomes our actual experience—as soon as we have a stake in its
goodness—our brains get busy looking for ways to think about the experience
that will allow us to appreciate it.
Because experiences are inherently ambiguous, finding a “positive view” of
an experience is often as simple as finding the “below-you view” of a Necker
cube, and research shows that most people do this well and often. Consumers
evaluate kitchen appliances more positively after they buy them,
20
job seekers
evaluate jobs more positively after they accept them,
21 and high school students
evaluate colleges more positively after they get into them.
22 Racetrack gamblers
evaluate their horses more positively when they are leaving the betting window
than when they are approaching it,
23 and voters evaluate their candidates more
positively when they are exiting the voting booth than when they are entering
it.
24 A toaster, a firm, a university, a horse, and a senator are all just fine and
dandy, but when they become our toaster, firm, university, horse, and senator
they are instantly finer and dandier. Studies such as these suggest that people are
quite adept at finding a positive way to view things once those things become
their own.
Cooking with Facts
In Voltaire’s classic novel Candide, Dr. Pangloss is a teacher of “metaphysicotheologo-cosmolo-nigology” who believes he lives in the best of all possible
worlds.
“It is clear,” he said, “that things cannot be other than the way they are; for
as all things have been created for some end, they must necessarily be
created for the best end. For instance, noses were made to support
spectacles, hence we wear spectacles. Legs, as anyone can see, were made
for breeches, and so we wear breeches. Stones were made to be shaped into
castles; thus My Lord has a fine castle because the greatest baron in the
province ought to have the finest house. And because pigs were made to be
eaten, we eat pork all year round. So those who say that everything is well
are speaking foolishly; they should say that everything is best.”
25
The research I’ve described so far seems to suggest that human beings are
hopelessly Panglossian; there are more ways to think about experience than there
are experiences to think about, and human beings are unusually inventive when
it comes to finding the best of all possible ways. And yet, if this is true, then why
aren’t we all walking around with wide eyes and loopy grins, thanking God for
the wonder of hemorrhoids and the miracle of in-laws? Because the mind may
be gullible, but it ain’t no patsy. The world is this way, we wish the world were
that way, and our experience of the world—how we see it, remember it, and
imagine it—is a mixture of stark reality and comforting illusion. We can’t spare
either. If we were to experience the world exactly as it is, we’d be too depressed
to get out of bed in the morning, but if we were to experience the world exactly
as we want it to be, we’d be too deluded to find our slippers. We may see the
world through rose-colored glasses, but rose-colored glasses are neither opaque
nor clear. They can’t be opaque because we need to see the world clearly enough
to participate in it—to pilot helicopters, harvest corn, diaper babies, and all the
other stuff that smart mammals need to do in order to survive and thrive. But
they can’t be clear because we need their rosy tint to motivate us to design the
helicopters (“I’m sure this thing will fly”), plant the corn (“This year will be a
banner crop”), and tolerate the babies (“What a bundle of joy!”). We cannot do
without reality and we cannot do without illusion. Each serves a purpose, each
imposes a limit on the influence of the other, and our experience of the world is
the artful compromise that these tough competitors negotiate.
26
Rather than thinking of people as hopelessly Panglossian, then, we might
think of them as having a psychological immune system that defends the mind
against unhappiness in much the same way that the physical immune system
defends the body against illness.
27 This metaphor is unusually appropriate. For
example, the physical immune system must strike a balance between two
competing needs: the need to recognize and destroy foreign invaders such as
viruses and bacteria, and the need to recognize and respect the body’s own cells.
If the physical immune system is hypoactive, it fails to defend the body against
micropredators and we are stricken with infections; but if the physical immune
system is hyperactive, it mistakenly defends the body against itself and we are
stricken with autoimmune disease. A healthy physical immune system must
balance its competing needs and find a way to defend us well—but not too well.
Analogously, when we face the pain of rejection, loss, misfortune, and failure,
the psychological immune system must not defend us too well (“I’m perfect and
everyone is against me”) and must not fail to defend us well enough (“I’m a
loser and I ought to be dead”). A healthy psychological immune system strikes a
balance that allows us to feel good enough to cope with our situation but bad
enough to do something about it (“Yeah, that was a lousy performance and I feel
crummy about it, but I’ve got enough confidence to give it a second shot”). We
need to be defended—not defenseless or defensive—and thus our minds
naturally look for the best view of things while simultaneously insisting that
those views stick reasonably closely to the facts. That’s why people seek
opportunities to think about themselves in positive ways but routinely reject
opportunities to think about themselves in unrealistically positive ways.
28 For
example, college students request new dorm assignments when their current
roommates do not think well of them, but they also request new dorm
assignments when their current roommates think too well of them.
29 No one
likes to feel that they are being duped, even when the duping is a pleasure. In
order to maintain the delicate balance between reality and illusion, we seek
positive views of our experience, but we only allow ourselves to embrace those
views when they seem credible. So what makes a view seem credible?
Finding Facts
Most of us put a lot of stock in what scientists tell us because we know that
scientists reach their conclusions by gathering and analyzing facts. If someone
asked you why you believe that smoking is bad and jogging is good, or that the
earth is round and the galaxy is flat, or that cells are small and molecules are
smaller, you would point to the facts. You might need to explain that you do not
personally know the facts to which you are pointing, but that you do know that at
some time in the past, a bunch of very earnest people in white lab coats went out
and observed the world with stethoscopes, telescopes, and microscopes, wrote
down what they observed, analyzed what they wrote down, and then told the rest
of us what to believe about nutrition, cosmology, and biology. Scientists are
credible because they draw conclusions from observations, and ever since the
empiricists trumped the dogmatists and became the kings of ancient Greek
medicine, westerners have had a special reverence for conclusions that are based
on things they can see. It isn’t surprising, then, that we consider our own views
credible when they are based on observable facts but not when they are based on
wishes, wants, and fancies. We might like to believe that everyone loves us, that
we will live forever, and that high-tech stocks are preparing to make a major
comeback, and it would be awfully convenient if we could just push a little
button at the base of our skulls and instantly believe as we wanted. But that’s not
how believing works. Over the course of human evolution, the brain and the eye
have developed a contractual relationship in which the brain has agreed to
believe what the eye sees and not to believe what the eye denies. So if we are to
believe something, then it must be supported by—or at least not blatantly
contradicted by—the facts.
If views are acceptable only when they are credible, and if they are credible
only when they are based on facts, then how do we achieve positive views of
ourselves and our experience? How do we manage to think of ourselves as great
drivers, talented lovers, and brilliant chefs when the facts of our lives include a
pathetic parade of dented cars, disappointed partners, and deflated soufflés? The
answer is simple: We cook the facts. There are many different techniques for
collecting, interpreting, and analyzing facts, and different techniques often lead
to different conclusions, which is why scientists disagree about the dangers of
global warming, the benefits of supply-side economics, and the wisdom of lowcarbohydrate diets. Good scientists deal with this complication by choosing the
techniques they consider most appropriate and then accepting the conclusions
that these techniques produce, regardless of what those conclusions might be.
But bad scientists take advantage of this complication by choosing techniques
that are especially likely to produce the conclusions they favor, thus allowing
them to reach favored conclusions by way of supportive facts. Decades of
research suggests that when it comes to collecting and analyzing facts about
ourselves and our experiences, most of us have the equivalent of an advanced
degree in Really Bad Science.
Consider, for instance, the problem of sampling. Because scientists cannot
observe every bacterium, comet, pigeon, or person, they study small samples
that are drawn from these populations. A fundamental rule of good science and
common sense is that this sample must be drawn from all parts of the population
if it is to tell us about that population. There’s really no point in conducting an
opinion poll if you’re only going to call registered Republicans from Orange
County or the executive membership of Anarchists Against Organizations
Including This One. And yet, that’s pretty much what we do when seeking facts
that bear on our favored conclusions.
30 For example, when volunteers in one
study were told that they’d scored poorly on an intelligence test and were then
given an opportunity to peruse newspaper articles about IQ tests, they spent
more time reading articles that questioned the validity of such tests than articles
that sanctioned them.
31 When volunteers in another study were given a glowing
evaluation by a supervisor, they were more interested in reading background
information that praised the supervisor’s competence and acumen than
background information that impeached it.
32 By controlling the sample of
information to which they were exposed, these people indirectly controlled the
conclusions they would draw.
You’ve probably done this yourself. For instance, if you’ve ever purchased a
new automobile, you may have noticed that soon after you made the decision to
buy the Honda instead of the Toyota, you began lingering over the Honda
advertisements in the weekly newsmagazine and skimming quickly past ads for
the competition.
33
If a friend had noticed this and asked you about it, you would
probably have explained that you were simply more interested in learning about
the car you’d chosen than about the car you didn’t. But learning is an odd choice
of words here because that word usually refers to the balanced acquisition of
knowledge, and the kind of learning one does by reading only Honda ads is more
than a little lopsided. Ads contain facts about the advantages of the products they
describe and not about the disadvantages, and thus your quest for new
knowledge would have the interesting side benefit of ensuring that you would be
marinated in those facts—and only those facts—that confirmed the wisdom of
your decision.
Not only do we select favorable facts from magazines, we also select them
from memory. For example, in one study, some volunteers were shown evidence
indicating that extraverts receive higher salaries and more promotions than
introverts do (successful-extravert group) and other volunteers were shown
evidence indicating the opposite (successful-introvert group).
34 When the
volunteers were asked to recall specific behaviors from their pasts that would
help determine whether they were extraverted or introverted, volunteers in the
successful-extravert group tended to recall the time when they’d brazenly
walked up to a complete stranger and introduced themselves, whereas volunteers
in the successful-introvert group tended to recall the time when they saw
someone they liked but had been too shy to say hello.
Of course, other people—and not memories or magazine ads—are the richest
sources of information about the wisdom of our decisions, the extent of our
abilities, and the irresistible effervescence of our bubbly personalities. Our
tendency to expose ourselves to information that supports our favored
conclusions is especially powerful when it comes to choosing the company we
keep. You’ve probably noticed that with the exception of Wilt Chamberlain,
nobody picks friends and lovers by random sampling. On the contrary, we spend
countless hours and countless dollars carefully arranging our lives to ensure that
we are surrounded by people who like us, and people who are like us. It isn’t
surprising, then, that when we turn to the folks we know for advice and opinions,
they tend to confirm our favored conclusions—either because they share them or
because they don’t want to hurt our feelings by telling us otherwise.
35 Should the
people in our lives occasionally fail to tell us what we want to hear, we have
some clever ways of helping them.
For example, studies reveal that people have a penchant for asking questions
that are subtly engineered to manipulate the answers they receive.
36 A question
such as “Am I the best lover you’ve ever had?” is dangerous because it has only
one answer that can make us truly happy, but a question such as “What do you
like best about my lovemaking?” is brilliant because it has only one answer that
can make us truly miserable (or two if you count “It reminds me of Wilt
Chamberlain”). Studies show that people intuitively lean toward asking the
questions that are most likely to elicit the answers they want to hear. And when
they hear those answers, they tend to believe what they’ve nudged others to say,
which is why “Tell me you love me” remains such a popular request.
37
In short,
we derive support for our preferred conclusions by listening to the words that we
put in the mouths of people who have already been preselected for their
willingness to say what we want to hear.
And it gets worse—because most of us have ways of making other people
confirm our favored conclusions without ever engaging them in conversation.
Consider this: To be a great driver, lover, or chef, we don’t need to be able to
parallel park while blindfolded, make ten thousand maidens swoon with a single
pucker, or create a pâte feuilletée so intoxicating that the entire population of
France instantly abandons its national cuisine and swears allegiance to our
kitchen. Rather, we simply need to park, kiss, and bake better than most other
folks do. How do we know how well most other folks do? Why, we look around,
of course—but in order to make sure that we see what we want to see, we look
around selectively.
38 For example, volunteers in one study took a test that
ostensibly measured their social sensitivity and were then told that they had
flubbed the majority of the questions.
39 When these volunteers were then given
an opportunity to look over the test results of other people who had performed
better or worse than they had, they ignored the tests of the people who had done
better and instead spent their time looking over the tests of the people who had
done worse. Getting a C– isn’t so bad if one compares oneself exclusively to
those who got a D.
This tendency to seek information about those who have done more poorly
than we have is especially pronounced when the stakes are high. People with
life-threatening illnesses such as cancer are particularly likely to compare
themselves with those who are in worse shape,
40 which explains why 96 percent
of the cancer patients in one study claimed to be in better health than the average
cancer patient.
41 And if we can’t find people who are doing more poorly than we
are, we may go out and create them. Volunteers in one study took a test and
were then given the opportunity to provide hints that would either help or hinder
a friend’s performance on the same test.
42 Although volunteers helped their
friends when the test was described as a game, they actively hindered their
friends when the test was described as an important measure of intellectual
ability. Apparently, when our friends do not have the good taste to come in last
so that we can enjoy the good taste of coming in first, we give them a friendly
push in the appropriate direction. Once we’ve successfully sabotaged their
performances and ensured their failure, they become the perfect standard for
comparison. The bottom line is this: The brain and the eye may have a
contractual relationship in which the brain has agreed to believe what the eye
sees, but in return the eye has agreed to look for what the brain wants.
Challenging Facts
Whether by choosing information or informants, our ability to cook the facts that
we encounter helps us establish views that are both positive and credible. Of
course, if you’ve ever discussed a football game, a political debate, or the six
o’clock newscast with someone from the other side of the aisle, you’ve already
discovered that even when people do encounter facts that disconfirm their
favored conclusions, they have a knack for ignoring them, forgetting them, or
seeing them differently than the rest of us do. When Dartmouth and Princeton
students see the same football game, both sets of students claim that the facts
clearly show that the other school’s team was responsible for the
unsportsmanlike conduct.
43 When Democrats and Republicans see the same
presidential debate on television, both sets of viewers claim that the facts clearly
show that their candidate was the winner.
44 When pro-Israeli and pro-Arab
viewers see identical samples of Middle East news coverage, both proponents
claim that the facts clearly show that the press was biased against their side.
45
Alas, the only thing these facts clearly show is that people tend to see what they
want to see.
Inevitably, however, there will be times when the unkind facts are just too
obvious to set aside. When our team’s defensive tackle is caught wearing brass
knuckles, or when our candidate confesses to embezzlement on national
television, we find it difficult to overlook or forget such facts. How do we
manage to maintain a favored conclusion when the brute facts just won’t
cooperate? Although the word fact seems to suggest a sort of unquestionable
irrefutability, facts are actually nothing more than conjectures that have met a
certain standard of proof. If we set that standard high enough, then nothing can
ever be proved, including the “fact” of our own existence. If we set the standard
low enough, then all things are true and equally so. Because nihilism and
postmodernism are both such unsatisfying philosophies, we tend to set our
standard of proof somewhere in the middle. No one can say precisely where that
standard should be set, but one thing we do know is that wherever we set it, we
must keep it in the same place when we evaluate the facts we favor and the facts
we don’t. It would be unfair for teachers to give the students they like easier
exams than those they dislike, for federal regulators to require that foreign
products pass stricter safety tests than domestic products, or for judges to insist
that the defense attorney make better arguments than the prosecutor.
And yet, this is just the sort of uneven treatment most of us give to facts that
confirm and disconfirm our favored conclusions. In one study, volunteers were
asked to evaluate two pieces of scientific research on the effectiveness of capital
punishment as a deterrent.
46 They were shown one research study that used the
“between-states technique” (which involved comparing the crime rates of states
that had capital punishment with the crime rates of states that did not) and one
research study that used the “within-states technique” (which involved
comparing the crime rates of a single state before and after it instituted or
outlawed capital punishment). For half the volunteers, the between-states study
concluded that capital punishment was effective and the within-states study
concluded it was not. For the other half of the volunteers, these conclusions were
reversed. The results showed that volunteers favored whichever technique
produced the conclusion that verified their own personal political ideologies.
When the within-states technique produced an unfavorable conclusion,
volunteers immediately recognized that within-states comparisons are worthless
because factors such as employment and income vary over time, and thus crime
rates in one decade (the 1980s) can’t be compared with crime rates in another
decade (the 1990s). But when the between-states technique produced an
unfavorable conclusion, volunteers immediately recognized that between-states
comparisons are worthless because factors such as employment and income vary
with geography, and thus crime rates in one place (Alabama) can’t be compared
with crime rates in another place (Massachusetts).
47 Clearly, volunteers set the
methodological bar higher for studies that disconfirmed their favored
conclusions. This same technique allows us to achieve and maintain a positive
and credible view of ourselves and our experiences. For example, volunteers in
one study were told that they had performed very well or very poorly on a
social-sensitivity test and were then asked to assess two scientific reports—one
that suggested the test was valid and one that suggested it was not.
48 Volunteers
who had performed well on the test believed that the studies in the validating
report used sounder scientific methods than did the studies in the invalidating
report, but volunteers who performed poorly on the test believed precisely the
opposite.
When facts challenge our favored conclusion, we scrutinize them more
carefully and subject them to more rigorous analysis. We also require a lot more
of them. For example, how much information would you require before you
were willing to conclude that someone was intelligent? Would their high school
transcripts be enough? Would an IQ test suffice? Would you need to know what
their teachers and employers thought of them? Volunteers in one study were
asked to evaluate the intelligence of another person, and they required
considerable evidence before they were willing to conclude that the person was
truly smart. But interestingly, they required much more evidence when the
person was an unbearable pain in the ass than when the person was funny, kind,
and friendly.
49 When we want to believe that someone is smart, then a single
letter of recommendation may suffice; but when we don’t want to believe that
person is smart, we may demand a thick manila folder full of transcripts, tests,
and testimony.
Precisely the same thing happens when we want or don’t want to believe
something about ourselves. For instance, volunteers in one study were invited to
take a medical test that would supposedly tell them whether they did or did not
have a dangerous enzyme deficiency that would predispose them to pancreatic
disorders.
50 The volunteers placed a drop of their saliva on a strip of ordinary
paper that the researchers falsely claimed was a medical test strip. Some
volunteers (positive-testers) were told that if the strip turned green in ten to sixty
seconds, then they had the enzyme deficiency. Other volunteers (negativetesters) were told that if the strip turned green in ten to sixty seconds, then they
didn’t have the enzyme deficiency. Although the strip was an ordinary piece of
paper and hence never turned green, the negative-testers waited much longer
than the positive-testers before deciding that the test was complete. In other
words, the volunteers gave the test strip plenty of time to prove that they were
well but much less time to prove that they were ill. Apparently it doesn’t take
much to convince us that we are smart and healthy, but it takes a whole lotta
facts to convince us of the opposite. We ask whether facts allow us to believe
our favored conclusions and whether they compel us to believe our disfavored
conclusions.
51 Not surprisingly, disfavored conclusions have a much tougher
time meeting this more rigorous standard of proof.
52
Onward
In July 2004, the City Council of Monza, Italy, took the unusual step of banning
goldfish bowls. They reasoned that goldfish should be kept in rectangular
aquariums and not in round bowls because “a fish kept in a bowl has a distorted
view of reality and suffers because of this.”
53 No mention was made of the bland
diet, the noisy pump, or the silly plastic castles. No, the problem was that round
bowls deform the visual experience of their inhabitants, and goldfish have the
fundamental right to see the world as it really is. The good counselors of Monza
did not suggest that human beings should enjoy the same right, perhaps because
they knew that our distorted views of reality are not so easily dispelled, or
perhaps because they understood that we suffer less with them than we would
without them. Distorted views of reality are made possible by the fact that
experiences are ambiguous—that is, they can be credibly viewed in many ways,
some of which are more positive than others. To ensure that our views are
credible, our brain accepts what our eye sees. To ensure that our views are
positive, our eye looks for what our brain wants. The conspiracy between these
two servants allows us to live at the fulcrum of stark reality and comforting
illusion. So what does all of this have to do with forecasting our emotional
futures? As we are about to see, we may live at the fulcrum of reality and
illusion, but most of us don’t know our own address.
CHAPTER 9
Immune to Reality
Upon my back, to defend my belly; upon my wit, to defend my
wiles; upon my secrecy, to defend mine honesty; my mask, to
defend my beauty.
Shakespeare, Troilus and Cressida
ALBERT EINSTEIN MAY HAVE BEEN the greatest genius of the twentieth century, but
few people know that he came this close to losing that distinction to a horse.
Wilhelm von Osten was a retired schoolteacher who in 1891 claimed that his
stallion, whom he called Clever Hans, could answer questions about current
events, mathematics, and a host of other topics by tapping the ground with his
foreleg. For instance, when Osten would ask Clever Hans to add three and five,
the horse would wait until his master had finished asking the question, tap eight
times, then stop. Sometimes, instead of asking a question, Osten would write it
on a card and hold it up for Clever Hans to read, and the horse seemed to
understand written language every bit as well as it understood speech. Clever
Hans didn’t get every question right, of course, but he did much better than
anyone else with hooves, and his public performances were so impressive that he
soon became the toast of Berlin. But in 1904 the director of the Berlin
Psychological Institute sent his student, Oskar Pfungst, to look into the matter
more carefully, and Pfungst noticed that Clever Hans was much more likely to
give the wrong answer when Osten was standing in back of the horse than in
front of it, or when Osten himself did not know the answer to the question the
horse had been asked. In a series of experiments, Clever Pfungst was able to
show that Clever Hans could indeed read—but that what he could read was
Osten’s body language. When Osten bent slightly, Clever Hans would start
tapping, and when Osten straightened up, or tilted his head a bit, or faintly raised
an eyebrow, Clever Hans would stop. In other words, Osten was signaling
Clever Hans to start and stop tapping at just the right moments to create the
illusion of horse sense.
Clever Hans was no genius, but Osten was no fraud. Indeed, he’d spent years
patiently talking to his horse about mathematics and world affairs, and he was
genuinely shocked and dismayed to learn that he had been fooling himself, as
well as everyone else. The deception was elaborate and effective, but it was
perpetrated unconsciously, and in this Osten was not unique. When we expose
ourselves to favorable facts, notice and remember favorable facts, and hold
favorable facts to a fairly low standard of proof, we are generally no more aware
of our subterfuge than Osten was of his. We may refer to the processes by which
the psychological immune system does its job as “tactics” or “strategies,” but
these terms—with their inevitable connotations of planning and deliberation—
should not cause us to think of people as manipulative schemers who are
consciously trying to generate positive views of their own experience. On the
contrary, research suggests that people are typically unaware of the reasons why
they are doing what they are doing,
1 but when asked for a reason, they readily
supply one.
2 For example, when volunteers watch a computer screen on which
words appear for just a few milliseconds, they are unaware of seeing the words
and are unable to guess which words they saw. But they are influenced by them.
When the word hostile is flashed, volunteers judge others negatively.
3 When the
word elderly is flashed, volunteers walk slowly.
4 When the word stupid is
flashed, volunteers perform poorly on tests.
5 When these volunteers are later
asked to explain why they judged, walked, or scored the way they did, two things
happen: First, they don’t know, and second, they do not say, “I don’t know.”
Instead, their brains quickly consider the facts of which they are aware (“I
walked slowly”) and draw the same kinds of plausible but mistaken inferences
about themselves that an observer would probably draw about them (“I’m
tired”).
6
When we cook facts, we are similarly unaware of why we are doing it, and
this turns out to be a good thing, because deliberate attempts to generate positive
views (“There must be something good about bankruptcy, and I’m not leaving
this chair until I discover it”) contain the seeds of their own destruction.
Volunteers in one study listened to Stravinsky’s Rite of Spring.
7 Some were told
to listen to the music, and others were told to listen to the music while
consciously trying to be happy. At the end of the interlude, the volunteers who
had tried to be happy were in a worse mood than were the volunteers who had
simply listened to the music. Why? Two reasons. First, we may be able
deliberately to generate positive views of our own experiences if we close our
eyes, sit very still, and do nothing else,
8 but research suggests that if we become
even slightly distracted, these deliberate attempts tend to backfire and we end up
feeling worse than we did before.
9 Second, deliberate attempts to cook the facts
are so transparent that they make us feel cheap. Sure, we want to believe that
we’re better off without the fiancée who left us standing at the altar, and we will
feel better soon as we begin to discover facts that support this conclusion (“She
was never really right for me, was she, Mom?”), but the process by which we
discover those facts must feel like a discovery and not like a snow job. If we see
ourselves cooking the facts (“If I phrase the question just this way and ask
nobody but Mom, I stand a pretty good chance of having my favored conclusion
confirmed”), then the jig is up and self-deluded joins jilted in our list of pitiful
qualities. For positive views to be credible, they must be based on facts that we
believe we have come upon honestly. We accomplish this by unconsciously
cooking the facts and then consciously consuming them. The diner is in the
dining room, but the chef is in the basement. The benefit of all this unconscious
cookery is that it works; but the cost is that it makes us strangers to ourselves.
Let me show you how.
Looking Forward to Looking Backward
To my knowledge, no one has ever done a systematic study of people who’ve
been left standing at the altar by a cold-footed fiancé. But I’m willing to bet a
good bottle of wine that if you rounded up a healthy sample of almost-brides and
nearly grooms and asked them whether they would describe the incident as “the
worst thing that ever happened to me” or “the best thing that ever happened to
me,” more would endorse the latter description than the former. And I’ll bet an
entire case of that wine that if you found a sample of people who’d never been
through this experience and asked them to predict which of all their possible
future experiences they are most likely to look back on as “the best thing that
ever happened to me,” not one of them will list “getting jilted.” Like so many
things, getting jilted is more painful in prospect and more rosy in retrospect.
When we contemplate being hung out to dry this way, we naturally generate the
most dreadful possible view of the experience; but once we’ve actually been
heartbroken and humiliated in front of our family, friends, and florists, our
brains begin shopping for a less dreadful view—and as we’ve seen, the human
brain is one smart shopper. However, because our brains do their shopping
unconsciously, we tend not to realize they will do it at all, hence we blithely
assume that the dreadful view we have when we look forward to the event is the
dreadful view we’ll have when we look back on it. In short, we do not realize
that our views will change because we are normally unaware of the processes
that change them.
This fact can make it quite difficult to predict one’s emotional future. In one
study, volunteers were given the opportunity to apply for a good-paying job that
involved nothing more than tasting ice cream and making up funny names for
it.
10 The application procedure required the volunteer to undergo an on-camera
interview. Some of the volunteers were told that their interview would be seen
by a judge who had sole discretionary authority to decide whether they would be
hired (judge group). Other volunteers were told that their interview would be
seen by a jury whose members would vote to decide whether the volunteer
should be hired (jury group). Volunteers in the jury group were told that as long
as one juror voted for them, they would get the job—and thus the only
circumstance under which they would not get the job was if the jury voted
unanimously against them. All of the volunteers then underwent an interview,
and all predicted how they would feel if they didn’t get the job. A few minutes
later, the researcher came into the room and explained apologetically that after
careful deliberation, the judge or jury had decided that the volunteer just wasn’t
quite right for the job. The researcher then asked the volunteers to report how
they felt.
Fig. 19. Volunteers were happier when they were rejected by a capricious judge than by a unanimous
jury (bars on right). But they could not foresee this moments before it happened (bars on left).
The results of the study are shown in figure 19. As the bars on the left show,
volunteers in the two groups expected to feel equally unhappy. After all,
rejection is a major whack on the nose, and we expect it to hurt whether the
whacker is a judge, a jury, or a gang of Orthodox rabbis. And yet, as the bars on
the right show, the whacks hurt more when they were administered by a jury
than by a judge. Why? Well, just imagine that you’ve applied for a job as a
swimsuit model, which requires that you don something skimpy and parade back
and forth in front of some gimlet-eyed twit in a three-dollar suit. If the twit
looked you over, shook his head, and said, “Sorry, but you’re not model
material,” you’d probably feel bad. For a minute or two. But this is the sort of
interpersonal rejection that everyone experiences from time to time, and after a
few minutes, most of us get over it and on with our lives. We do this quickly
because our psychological immune systems have no trouble finding ways to
exploit the ambiguity of this experience and soften its sting: “The guy wasn’t
paying attention to my extraordinary pivot” or “He’s one of those weirdos who
prefers height to weight” or “I’m supposed to take fashion advice from a guy
with a suit like that?”
But now imagine that you’ve just modeled the skimpy thing for a whole
roomful of people—some men, some women, some old, some young—and they
all look you over and shake their heads in unison. You’d probably feel bad.
Truly bad. Humiliated, hurt, and confused. You’d probably hurry offstage with a
warm feeling in your ears, a tight feeling in your throat, and a wet feeling in your
eyes. Being rejected by a large and diverse group of people is a demoralizing
experience because it is so thoroughly unambiguous, and hence it is difficult for
the psychological immune system to find a way to think about it that is both
positive and credible. It’s easy to blame failure on the eccentricities of a judge,
but it’s much more difficult to blame failure on the eccentricities of a unanimous
jury. Claims such as “a synchronized mass blink caused ninety-four people to
miss my pivot at precisely the same moment” are just not credible. Similarly,
volunteers in this study found it easier to blame their rejection on an
idiosyncratic judge than on a panel of jurors, which is why they felt worse when
they were rejected by a jury.
Now, all this may seem painfully obvious to you as you contemplate the
results of this study from the comfort of your sofa, but allow me to suggest that
it is painfully obvious only after someone has taken pains to point it out to you.
Indeed, if it were really painfully obvious, then why were a bunch of smart
volunteers unable to predict that it would happen just a few minutes before it
did? Why didn’t the volunteers realize that they would have more success
blaming a judge than a jury? Because when volunteers were asked to predict
their emotional reactions to rejection, they imagined its sharp sting. Period. They
did not go on to imagine how their brains might try to relieve that sting. Because
they were unaware that they would alleviate their suffering by blaming those
who caused it, it never occurred to them that they would be more successful if a
single person were to blame rather than an entire group. Other studies have
confirmed this general finding. For example, people expect to feel equally bad
when a tragic accident is the result of human negligence as when it is the result
of dumb luck, but they actually feel worse when luck is dumb and no one is
blameworthy.
11
Ignorance of our psychological immune systems causes us to mispredict the
circumstances under which we will blame others, but it also causes us to
mispredict the circumstances under which we will blame ourselves.
12 Who can
forget the scene at the end of the 1942 film Casablanca in which Humphrey
Bogart and Ingrid Bergman are standing on the tarmac as she tries to decide
whether to stay in Casablanca with the man she loves or board the plane and
leave with her husband? Bogey turns to Bergman and says: “Inside we both
know you belong with Victor. You’re part of his work, the thing that keeps him
going. If that plane leaves the ground and you’re not with him, you’ll regret it.
Maybe not today. Maybe not tomorrow. But soon and for the rest of your life.”
13
This thin slice of melodrama is among the most memorable scenes in the
history of cinema—not because it is particularly well acted or particularly well
written but because most of us have stood on that same runway from time to
time. Our most consequential choices—whether to marry, have children, buy a
house, enter a profession, move abroad—are often shaped by how we imagine
our future regrets (“Oh no, I forgot to have a baby!”). Regret is an emotion we
feel when we blame ourselves for unfortunate outcomes that might have been
prevented had we only behaved differently in the past, and because that emotion
is decidedly unpleasant, our behavior in the present is often designed to preclude
it.
14
Indeed, most of us have elaborate theories about when and why people feel
regret, and these theories allow us to avoid the experience. For instance, we
expect to feel more regret when we learn about alternatives to our choices than
when we don’t,
15 when we accept bad advice than when we reject good
advice,
16 when our bad choices are unusual rather than conventional,
17 and when
we fail by a narrow margin rather than by a wide margin.
18
But sometimes these theories are wrong. Consider this scenario. You own
shares in Company A. During the past year you considered switching to stock in
Company B but decided against it. You now find that you would have been
better off by $1,200 if you had switched to the stock of Company B. You also
owned shares in Company C. During the past year you switched to stock in
Company D. You now find out that you’d have been better off by $1,200 if you
kept your stock in Company C. Which error causes you more regret? Studies
show that about nine out of ten people expect to feel more regret when they
foolishly switch stocks than when they foolishly fail to switch stocks, because
most people think they will regret foolish actions more than foolish inactions.
19
But studies also show that nine out of ten people are wrong. Indeed, in the long
run, people of every age and in every walk of life seem to regret not having done
things much more than they regret things they did, which is why the most
popular regrets include not going to college, not grasping profitable business
opportunities, and not spending enough time with family and friends.
20
But why do people regret inactions more than actions? One reason is that the
psychological immune system has a more difficult time manufacturing positive
and credible views of inactions than of actions.
21 When our action causes us to
accept a marriage proposal from someone who later becomes an axe murderer,
we can console ourselves by thinking of all the things we learned from the
experience (“Collecting hatchets is not a healthy hobby”). But when our inaction
causes us to reject a marriage proposal from someone who later becomes a
movie star, we can’t console ourselves by thinking of all the things we learned
from the experience because . . . well, there wasn’t one. The irony is all too
clear: Because we do not realize that our psychological immune systems can
rationalize an excess of courage more easily than an excess of cowardice, we
hedge our bets when we should blunder forward. As students of the silver screen
recall, Bogart’s admonition about future regret led Bergman to board the plane
and fly away with her husband. Had she stayed with Bogey in Casablanca, she
would probably have felt just fine. Not right away, perhaps, but soon, and for the
rest of her life.
Little Triggers
Civilized people have learned the hard way that a handful of iniquitous
individuals can often cause more death and destruction than an invading army. If
an enemy were to launch hundreds of airplanes and missiles against the United
States, the odds are that none would reach its target because an offensive strike
of that magnitude would trigger America’s defensive systems, which are
presumably adequate to quash the threat. On the other hand, were an enemy to
launch seven guys with baggy pants and baseball caps, those men might well
reach their targets and detonate bombs, release toxins, or fly hijacked airplanes
into tall buildings. Terrorism is a strategy based on the idea that the best offense
is the one that fails to trigger the best defense, and small-scale incursions are less
likely to set off the alarm bells than are large-scale assaults. Although it is
possible to design a defensive system that counters even the smallest threat (e.g.,
electrified borders, a travel ban, electronic surveillance, random searches), such
systems are extraordinarily costly, in terms of both the resources required to run
them and the number of false alarms they produce. A system like that would be
an exercise in overkill. To be effective, a defensive system must respond to
threats; but to be practical, it must respond only to threats that exceed some
critical threshold—which means that threats that fall short of the critical
threshold may have a destructive potential that belies their diminutive size.
Unlike large threats, small threats can sneak in under the radar.
The Intensity Trigger
The psychological immune system is a defensive system, and it obeys this same
principle. When experiences make us feel sufficiently unhappy, the
psychological immune system cooks facts and shifts blame in order to offer us a
more positive view. But it doesn’t do this every time we feel the slightest tingle
of sadness, jealousy, anger, or frustration. Failed marriages and lost jobs are the
kinds of large-scale assaults on our happiness that trigger our psychological
defenses, but these defenses are not triggered by broken pencils, stubbed toes, or
slow elevators. Broken pencils may be annoying, but they do not pose a grave
threat to our psychological well-being and hence do not trigger our
psychological defenses. The paradoxical consequence of this fact is that it is
sometimes more difficult to achieve a positive view of a bad experience than of
a very bad experience.
For example, volunteers in one study were students who were invited to join
an extracurricular club whose initiation ritual required that they receive three
electric shocks.
22 Some of the volunteers had a truly dreadful experience
because the shocks they received were quite severe (severe-initiation group), and
others had a slightly unpleasant experience because the shocks they received
were relatively mild (mild-initiation group). Although you might expect people
to dislike anything associated with physical pain, the volunteers in the severeinitiation group actually liked the club more. Because these volunteers suffered
greatly, the intensity of their suffering triggered their defensive systems, which
immediately began working to help them achieve a credible and positive view of
their experience. It isn’t easy to find such a view, but it can be done. For
example, physical suffering is bad (“Oh my God, that really hurt!”), but it isn’t
entirely bad if the thing one suffers for is extremely valuable (“But I’m joining a
very elite group of very special people”). Indeed, research shows that when
people are given electric shocks, they actually feel less pain when they believe
they are suffering for something of great value.
23 The intense shocks were
unpleasant enough to trigger the volunteers’ psychological defenses, but the mild
shocks were not, hence the volunteers valued the club most when its initiation
was most painful.
24
If you’ve managed to forgive your spouse for some
egregious transgression but still find yourself miffed about the dent in the garage
door or the trail of dirty socks on the staircase, then you have experienced this
paradox.
Intense suffering triggers the very processes that eradicate it, while mild
suffering does not, and this counterintuitive fact can make it difficult for us to
predict our emotional futures. For example, would it be worse if your best friend
insulted you or insulted your cousin? As much as you may like your cousin, it’s
a pretty good bet that you like yourself more, hence you probably think that it
would be worse if the epithet were hurled your way. And you’re right. It would
be worse. At first. But if intense suffering triggers the psychological immune
system and mild suffering does not, then over time you should be more likely to
generate a positive view of an insult that was directed at you (“Felicia called me
a pea-brain . . . boy, she can really crack me up sometimes”) than one that was
directed at your cousin (“Felicia called Cousin Dwayne a pea-brain . . . I mean,
she’s right, of course, but it wasn’t very nice of her to say”). The irony is that
you may ultimately feel better when you are the victim of an insult than when
you are a bystander to it.
This possibility was tested in a study in which two volunteers took a
personality test and then one of them received feedback from a psychologist.
25
The feedback was professional, detailed, and unrelentingly negative. For
example, it contained statements such as “You have few qualities that
distinguish you from others” and “People like you primarily because you don’t
threaten their competence.” Both of the volunteers read the feedback and then
reported how much they liked the psychologist who had written it. Ironically, the
volunteer who was the victim of the negative feedback liked the psychologist
more than did the volunteer who was merely a bystander to it. Why? Because
bystanders were miffed (“Man, that was a really crummy thing to do to the other
volunteer”), but they were not devastated, hence their psychological immune
systems did nothing to ameliorate their mildly negative feelings. But victims
were devastated (“Yikes, I’m a certified loser!”), hence their brains quickly went
shopping for a positive view of the experience (“But now that I think of it, that
test could only provide a small glimpse into my very complex personality, so I
rather doubt it means much”). Now here’s the important finding: When a new
group of volunteers was asked to predict how much they would like the
psychologist, they predicted that they would like the psychologist less if they
were victims than if they were bystanders. Apparently, people are not aware of
the fact that their defenses are more likely to be triggered by intense than mild
suffering, thus they mispredict their own emotional reactions to misfortunes of
different sizes.
The Inescapability Trigger
Intense suffering is one factor that can trigger our defenses and thus influence
our experiences in ways we don’t anticipate. But there are others. For example,
why do we forgive our siblings for behavior we would never tolerate in a friend?
Why aren’t we disturbed when the president does something that would have
kept us from voting for him had he done it before the election? Why do we
overlook an employee’s chronic tardiness but refuse to hire a job seeker who is
two minutes late for the interview? One possibility is that blood is thicker than
water, flags were made to be rallied around, and first impressions matter most.
But another possibility is that we are more likely to look for and find a positive
view of the things we’re stuck with than of the things we’re not.
26 Friends come
and go, and changing candidates is as easy as changing socks. But siblings and
presidents are ours, for better or for worse, and there’s not much we can do
about it once they’ve been born or elected. When the experience we are having
is not the experience we want to be having, our first reaction is to go out and
have a different one, which is why we return unsatisfactory rental cars, check out
of bad hotels, and stop hanging around with people who pick their noses in
public. It is only when we cannot change the experience that we look for ways to
change our view of the experience, which is why we love the clunker in the
driveway, the shabby cabin that’s been in the family for years, and Uncle
Sheldon despite his predilection for nasal spelunking. We find silver linings only
when we must, which is why people experience an increase in happiness when
genetic tests reveal that they don’t have a dangerous genetic defect, or when the
tests reveal that they do have a dangerous genetic defect, but not when the tests
are inconclusive.
27 We just can’t make the best of a fate until it is inescapably,
inevitably, and irrevocably ours.
Inescapable, inevitable, and irrevocable circumstances trigger the
psychological immune system, but, as with the intensity of suffering, people do
not always recognize that this will happen. For example, college students in one
study signed up for a course in black-and-white photography.
28 Each student
took a dozen photographs of people and places that were personally meaningful,
then reported for a private lesson. In these lessons, the teacher spent an hour or
two showing students how to print their two best photographs. When the prints
were dry and ready, the teacher said that the student could keep one of the
photographs but that the other would be kept on file as an example of student
work. Some students (inescapable group) were told that once they had chosen a
photograph to take home, they would not be allowed to change their minds.
Other students (escapable group) were told that once they had chosen a
photograph to take home, they would have several days to change their minds—
and if they did, the teacher would gladly swap the photograph they’d taken home
for the one they’d left behind. Students made their choices and took one of their
photographs home. Several days later, the students responded to a survey asking
them (among other things) how much they liked their photographs. The results
showed that students in the escapable group liked their photograph less than did
students in the inescapable group. Interestingly, when a new group of students
was asked to predict how much they would like their photographs if they were or
were not given the opportunity to change their minds, these students predicted
that escapability would have no influence whatsoever on their satisfaction with
the photograph. Apparently, inescapable circumstances trigger the psychological
defenses that enable us to achieve positive views of those circumstances, but we
do not anticipate that this will happen.
Our failure to anticipate that inescapability will trigger our psychological
immune systems (hence promote our happiness and satisfaction) can cause us to
make some painful mistakes. For example, when a new group of photography
students was asked whether they would prefer to have or not to have the
opportunity to change their minds about which photograph to keep, the vast
majority preferred to have that opportunity—that is, the vast majority of students
preferred to enroll in a photography course in which they would ultimately be
dissatisfied with the photograph they produced. Why would anyone prefer less
satisfaction to more? No one does, of course, but most people do seem to prefer
more freedom to less. Indeed, when our freedom to make up our minds—or to
change our minds once we’ve made them up—is threatened, we experience a
strong impulse to reassert it,
29 which is why retailers sometimes threaten your
freedom to own their products with claims such as “Limited stock” or “You
must order by midnight tonight.”
30 Our fetish for freedom leads us to patronize
expensive department stores that allow us to return merchandise rather than
attend auctions that don’t, to lease cars at a dramatic markup rather than buying
them at a bargain, and so on.
Most of us will pay a premium today for the opportunity to change our minds
tomorrow, and sometimes it makes sense to do so. A few days spent test-driving
a little red roadster tells us a lot about what it might be like to own one, thus it is
sometimes wise to pay a modest premium for a contract that includes a short
refund period. But if keeping our options open has benefits, it also has costs.
Little red roadsters are naturally cramped, and while the committed owner will
find positive ways to view that fact (“Wow! It feels like a fighter jet!”), the
buyer whose contract includes an escape clause may not (“This car is so tiny.
Maybe I should return it”). Committed owners attend to a car’s virtues and
overlook its flaws, thus cooking the facts to produce a banquet of satisfaction,
but the buyer for whom escape is still possible (and whose defenses have not yet
been triggered) is likely to evaluate the new car more critically, paying special
attention to its imperfections as she tries to decide whether to keep it. The costs
and benefits of freedom are clear—but alas, they are not equally clear: We have
no trouble anticipating the advantages that freedom may provide, but we seem
blind to the joys it can undermine.
31
Explaining Away
If you’ve ever puked your guts out shortly after eating chili con carne and found
yourself unable to eat it again for years, you have a pretty good idea of what it’s
like to be a fruit fly. No, fruit flies don’t eat chili, and no, fruit flies don’t puke.
But they do associate their best and worst experiences with the circumstances
that accompanied and preceded them, which allows them to seek or avoid those
circumstances in the future. Expose a fruit fly to the odor of tennis shoes, give it
a very tiny electric shock, and for the rest of its very tiny life it will avoid places
that smell tennis-shoey. The ability to associate pleasure or pain with its
circumstances is so vitally important that nature has installed that ability in every
one of her creatures, from Drosophila melanogaster to Ivan Pavlov.
But if that ability is necessary for creatures like us, it certainly isn’t sufficient,
because the kind of learning it enables is far too limited. If an organism can do
no more than associate particular experiences with particular circumstances, then
it can learn only a very small lesson, namely, to seek or avoid those particular
circumstances in the future. A well-timed shock may teach a fruit fly to avoid
the tennis-shoe smell, but it won’t teach it to avoid the smell of snowshoes,
ballet slippers, Manolo Blahniks, or a scientist armed with a miniature stun gun.
To maximize our pleasures and minimize our pains, we must be able to associate
our experiences with the circumstances that produced them, but we must also be
able to explain how and why those circumstances produced the experiences they
did. If we feel nauseous after a few turns on the Ferris wheel and our explanation
involves poor equilibrium, then we avoid Ferris wheels in the future—just as a
fruit fly would. But unlike a fruit fly, we also avoid some things that are not
associated with our nauseating experience (such as bungee jumping and
sailboats) and we do not avoid some things that are associated with our
nauseating experience (such as hurdy-gurdy music and clowns). Unlike a mere
association, an explanation allows us to identify particular aspects of a
circumstance (spinning) as the cause of our experience, and other aspects
(music) as irrelevant. In so doing, we learn more from our upchucks than a fruit
fly ever could.
Explanations allow us to make full use of our experiences, but they also
change the nature of those experiences. As we have seen, when experiences are
unpleasant, we quickly move to explain them in ways that make us feel better (“I
didn’t get the job because the judge was biased against people who barf on Ferris
wheels”). And indeed, studies show that the mere act of explaining an unpleasant
event can help to defang it. For example, simply writing about a trauma—such
as the death of a loved one or a physical assault—can lead to surprising
improvements in both subjective well-being and physical health (e.g., fewer
visits to the physician and improved production of viral antibodies).
32 What’s
more, the people who experience the greatest benefit from these writing
exercises are those whose writing contains an explanation of the trauma.
33
But just as explanations ameliorate the impact of unpleasant events, so too do
they ameliorate the impact of pleasant events. For example, college students
volunteered for a study in which they believed they were interacting in an online
chat room with students from other universities.
34
In fact, they were actually
interacting with a sophisticated computer program that simulated the presence of
other students. After the simulated students had provided the real student with
information about themselves (“Hi, I’m Eva, and I like to do volunteer work”),
the researcher pretended to ask the simulated students to decide which of the
people in the chat room they liked most, to write a paragraph explaining why,
and then to send it to that person. In just a few minutes, something remarkable
happened: The real student received e-mail messages from every one of the
simulated students indicating that they liked the real student best! For example,
one simulated message read: “I just felt that something clicked between us when
I read your answers. It’s too bad we’re not at the same school!” Another read:
“You stood out as the one I would like the most. I was especially interested in
the way you described your interests and values.” A third read: “I wish I could
talk with you directly because . . . I’d ask you if you like being around water (I
love water-skiing) and if you like Italian food (it’s my favorite).”
Now, here’s the catch: Some real students (informed group) received e-mail
that allowed them to know which simulated student wrote each of the messages,
and other real students (uninformed group) received e-mail messages that had
been stripped of that identifying information. In other words, every real student
received exactly the same e-mail messages indicating that they had won the
hearts and minds of all the simulated people in the chat room, but only real
students in the informed group knew which simulated individual had written
each of the messages. Hence, real students in the informed group were able to
generate explanations for their good fortune (“Eva appreciates my values
because we’re both involved with Habitat for Humanity, and it makes sense that
Catarina would mention Italian food”), whereas real students in the uninformed
group were not (“Someone appreciates my values . . . I wonder who? And why
would anyone mention Italian food?”). The researchers measured how happy the
real students were immediately after receiving these messages and then again
fifteen minutes later. Although real students in both groups were initially
delighted to have been chosen as everyone’s best friend, only the real students in
the uninformed group remained delighted fifteen minutes later. If you’ve ever
had a secret admirer, then you understand why real students in the uninformed
group remained on cloud nine while real students in the informed group quickly
descended to clouds two through five.
Unexplained events have two qualities that amplify and extend their emotional
impact. First, they strike us as rare and unusual.
35
If I told you that my brother,
my sister, and I were all born on the same day, you’d probably consider that a
rare and unusual occurrence. Once I explained that we were triplets, you’d find it
considerably less so. In fact, just about any explanation I offered (“By same day
I meant we were all born on a Thursday” or “We were all delivered by cesarean
section, so Mom and Dad timed our births for maximum tax benefits”) would
tend to reduce the amazingness of the coincidence and make the event seem
more probable. Explanations allow us to understand how and why an event
happened, which immediately allows us to see how and why it might happen
again. Indeed, whenever we say that something can’t happen—for example,
mind reading or levitation or a law that limits the power of incumbents—we
usually just mean that we’d have no way to explain it if it did. Unexplained
events seem rare, and rare events naturally have a greater emotional impact than
common events do. We are awed by a solar eclipse but merely impressed by a
sunset despite the fact that the latter is by far the more spectacular visual treat.
The second reason why unexplained events have a disproportionate emotional
impact is that we are especially likely to keep thinking about them. People
spontaneously try to explain events,
36 and studies show that when people do not
complete the things they set out to do, they are especially likely to think about
and remember their unfinished business.
37 Once we explain an event, we can
fold it up like freshly washed laundry, put it away in memory’s drawer, and
move on to the next one; but if an event defies explanation, it becomes a mystery
or a conundrum—and if there’s one thing we all know about mysterious
conundrums, it is that they generally refuse to stay in the back of our minds.
Filmmakers and novelists often capitalize on this fact by fitting their narratives
with mysterious endings, and research shows that people are, in fact, more likely
to keep thinking about a movie when they can’t explain what happened to the
main character. And if they liked the movie, this morsel of mystery causes them
to remain happy longer.
38
Explanation robs events of their emotional impact because it makes them
seem likely and allows us to stop thinking about them. Oddly enough, an
explanation doesn’t actually have to explain anything to have these effects—it
merely needs to seem as though it does. For instance, in one study, a researcher
approached college students in the university library, handed them one of two
cards with a dollar coin attached, then walked away. You’d probably agree that
this is a curious event that begs for explanation. As figure 20 shows, both cards
stated that the researcher was a member of the “Smile Society,” which was
devoted to “random acts of kindness.” But one card also contained two extra
phrases—“Who are we?” and “Why do we do this?” These empty phrases didn’t
really provide any new information, of course, but they made students feel as
though the curious event had been explained (“Aha, now I understand why they
gave me a dollar!”). About five minutes later, a different researcher approached
the student and claimed to be doing a class project on “community thoughts and
feelings.” The researcher asked the student to complete some survey questions,
one of which was “How positive or negative are you feeling right now?” The
results showed that those students who had received a card with the pseudoexplanatory phrases felt less happy than those who had received a card without
them. Apparently, even a fake explanation can cause us to tuck an event away
and move along to the next one.
Fig. 20.
Uncertainty can preserve and prolong our happiness, thus we might expect
people to cherish it. In fact, the opposite is generally the case. When a new group
of students was asked which of the two cards shown in figure 20 would make
them happier, 75 percent chose the one with the meaningless explanation.
Similarly, when a group of students was asked whether they would prefer to
know or not know which of the simulated students had written each of the
glowing reports in the online chat-room study, 100 percent chose to know. In
both cases, students chose certainty over uncertainty and clarity over mystery—
despite the fact that in both cases clarity and certainty had been shown to
diminish happiness. The poet John Keats noted that whereas great authors are
“capable of being in uncertainties, mysteries, doubts, without any irritable
reaching after fact and reason,” the rest of us are “incapable of remaining content
with half-knowledge.”
39 Our relentless desire to explain everything that happens
may well distinguish us from fruit flies, but it can also kill our buzz.
Onward
The eye and the brain are conspirators, and like most conspiracies, theirs is
negotiated behind closed doors, in the back room, outside of our awareness.
Because we do not realize that we have generated a positive view of our current
experience, we do not realize that we will do so again in the future. Not only
does our naïveté cause us to overestimate the intensity and duration of our
distress in the face of future adversity, but it also leads us to take actions that
may undermine the conspiracy. We are more likely to generate a positive and
credible view of an action than an inaction, of a painful experience than of an
annoying experience, of an unpleasant situation that we cannot escape than of
one we can. And yet, we rarely choose action over inaction, pain over
annoyance, and commitment over freedom. The processes by which we generate
positive views are many: We pay more attention to favorable information, we
surround ourselves with those who provide it, and we accept it uncritically.
These tendencies make it easy for us to explain unpleasant experiences in ways
that exonerate us and make us feel better. The price we pay for our irrepressible
explanatory urge is that we often spoil our most pleasant experiences by making
good sense of them.
Our tour of imagination has covered a lot of ground—from realism to
presentism to rationalization—so before moving on to our final destination, it
may be useful to locate ourselves on the big map. We’ve seen how difficult it is
to predict accurately our emotional reactions to future events because it is
difficult to imagine them as they will happen, and difficult to imagine how we’ll
think about them once they do. Throughout this book, I’ve compared
imagination to perception and memory, and I’ve tried to convince you that
foresight is just as fallible as eyesight and hindsight. Fallible eyesight can be
remedied by glasses and fallible hindsight can be remedied by written records of
the past—but what of fallible foresight? There are no spectacles that can sharpen
our view of tomorrow and no records of things to come. Can we remedy the
problems of foresight? As we are about to see, we can. But we generally choose
not to.
PART VI
Corrigibility
corrigibility (kor•i•dzĭ•b´l•ĭ•tee)
Capable of being corrected, reformed, or improved.
CHAPTER 10
Once Bitten
Experience, O, thou disprov’st report!
Shakespeare, Cymbeline
THE LAST DECADE has seen an explosion of books about poop. When my twoyear-old granddaughter crawls up onto my lap, she typically brings with her a fat
stack of picture books, including several that explore in considerable detail the
miracle of defecation and the mysteries of indoor plumbing. Some offer detailed
descriptions for the budding anatomist; some offer little more than drawings of
happy children, squatting, standing, and wiping. Despite their many differences,
each of these books communicates the same message: Grown-ups do not poop in
their pants, but if you do, then don’t worry too much about it. My granddaughter
seems to find this message both reassuring and inspirational. She understands
that there is a right way and a wrong way to poop, and that while we don’t
expect her to poop the right way just yet, we do want her to notice that most of
the people around her have learned to poop the right way, which suggests that
with a little practice and a little coaching, she can learn to poop the right way
too.
As it turns out, the benefits of practice and coaching are not limited to this
particular skill. In fact, practice and coaching are the two means by which we
learn just about everything we know. Firsthand knowledge and secondhand
knowledge are the only two kinds of knowledge there are, and no matter what
task we master—pooping, cooking, investing, bobsledding—that mastery is
always a product of direct experience and/or of listening to those who have had
direct experience. Babies poop in their diapers because they are rookies and
because they cannot take advantage of the lessons that veterans can provide.
Because babies lack both firsthand knowledge and secondhand knowledge of
proper potty protocol, we expect them to make a stinky mess—but we also
expect that within a few years, practice and coaching will begin to have their
remedial effects, innocence will yield to experience and education, and pooping
errors will disappear altogether. So why doesn’t this analysis extend to errors of
every kind? We all have direct experience with things that do or don’t make us
happy, we all have friends, therapists, cabdrivers, and talk-show hosts who tell
us about things that will or won’t make us happy, and yet, despite all this
practice and all this coaching, our search for happiness often culminates in a
stinky mess. We expect the next car, the next house, or the next promotion to
make us happy even though the last ones didn’t and even though others keep
telling us that the next ones won’t. Why don’t we learn to avoid these mistakes
in the same way that we learn to avoid warm diapers? If practice and coaching
can teach us to keep our pants dry, then why can’t they teach us to predict our
emotional futures?
The Least Likely of Times
There are many good things about getting older, but no one knows what they are.
We fall asleep and wake up at all the wrong times, avoid more foods than we can
eat, and take pills to help us remember which other pills to take. In fact, the only
really good thing about getting older is that people who still have all their hair
are occasionally forced to stand back and admire our wealth of experience. They
think of our experience as a form of wealth because they assume it allows us to
avoid making the same mistake twice—and sometimes it does. There are a few
experiences that those of us who are filthy rich with it just don’t repeat, and
bathing a cat while drinking peppermint schnapps comes to mind for reasons I’d
rather not discuss right now. On the other hand, there are plenty of mistakes that
we highly experienced folks seem to make over and over again. We marry
people who are oddly like the people we divorced, we attend annual family
gatherings and make an annual vow never to return, and we carefully time our
monthly expenditures to ensure that we will once again be flat broke on all the
dates that begin with a three. These cycles of recidivism seem difficult to
explain. After all, shouldn’t we learn from our own experience? Imagination has
its shortcomings, to be sure, and it is perhaps inevitable that we will mispredict
how future events will make us feel when we’ve never experienced those events
before. But once we’ve been married to a busy executive who spends more hours
at work than at home, once we’ve attended a family reunion at which the aunts
fight with the uncles who do their best to offend the cousins, and once we’ve
spent a few lean days between paychecks acquiring intimate knowledge of rice
and beans, shouldn’t we be able to imagine these events with a reasonable
degree of accuracy and hence take steps to avoid them in the future?
We should and we do, but not as often or as well as you might expect. We try
to repeat those experiences that we remember with pleasure and pride, and we
try to avoid repeating those that we remember with embarrassment and regret.
1
The trouble is that we often don’t remember them correctly. Remembering an
experience feels a lot like opening a drawer and retrieving a story that was filed
away on the day it was written, but as we’ve seen in previous chapters, that
feeling is one of our brain’s most sophisticated illusions. Memory is not a dutiful
scribe that keeps a complete transcript of our experiences, but a sophisticated
editor that clips and saves key elements of an experience and then uses these
elements to rewrite the story each time we ask to reread it. The clip-and-save
method usually works pretty well because the editor usually has a keen sense of
which elements are essential and which are disposable. That’s why we remember
how the groom looked when he kissed the bride but not which finger the flower
girl had up her nose when it happened. Alas, as keen as its editorial skills may
be, memory does have a few quirks that cause it to misrepresent the past and
hence causes us to misimagine the future.
For example, you may or may not use four-letter words, but I trust you’ve
never counted them. So take a guess: Are there more four-letter words in the
English language that begin with k (k-1’s) or that have k as their third letter (k3’s)? If you are like most people, you guessed that the k-1’s outnumber the k3’s.
2 You probably answered this question by briefly checking your memory
(“Hmmm, there’s kite, kilt, kale . . . “), and because you found it easier to recall
k-1’s than k-3’s, you assumed there must be more of the former than the latter.
This would normally be a very fine deduction. After all, you can recall more
four-legged elephants (e-4’s) than six-legged elephants (e-6’s) because you have
seen more e-4’s than e-6’s, and you have seen more e-4’s than e-6’s because
there are more e-4’s than e-6’s. The actual number of e-4’s and e-6’s in the
world determines how frequently you encounter them, and the frequency of your
encounters determines how easily you can remember those encounters.
Alas, the reasoning that serves you so well when it comes to elephants serves
you quite poorly when it comes to words. It is indeed easier to recall k-1’s than
k-3’s, but not because you have encountered more of the former than the latter.
Rather, it’s easier to recall words that start with k because it is easier to recall
any word by its first letter than by its third letter. Our mental dictionaries are
organized more or less alphabetically, like Webster’s itself, hence we can’t
easily “look up” a word in our memories by any letter except the first one. The
fact is that there are many more k-3’s than k-1’s in the English language, but
because the latter are easier to recall, people routinely get this question wrong.
The k-word puzzle works because we naturally (but incorrectly) assume that
things that come easily to mind are things we have frequently encountered.
What is true of elephants and words is also true of experiences.
3 Most of us
can bring to mind memories of riding a bicycle more easily than we can bring to
mind memories of riding a yak, hence we correctly conclude that we’ve ridden
more bikes than yaks in the past. This would be impeccable logic—except for
the fact that the frequency with which we’ve had an experience is not the only
determinant of the ease with which we remember it. In fact, infrequent or
unusual experiences are often among the most memorable, which is why most
Americans know precisely where they were on the morning of September 11,
2001, but not on the morning of September 10.
4 The fact that infrequent
experiences come so readily to mind can lead us to draw some peculiar
conclusions. For instance, for most of my adult life I have had the distinct
impression that I tend to pick the slowest line at the grocery store, and that
whenever I get tired of waiting in the slowest line and switch to another, the line
I switched from begins moving faster than the one I switched to.
5 Now, if this
were true—if I really did have bad karma, bad juju, or some other metaphysical
form of badness that caused any line I joined to slow down—then there would
have to be someone out there who felt that they had a metaphysical form of
goodness that caused any line they joined to speed up. After all, everyone can’t
get in the slowest line on every occasion, can they? And yet, nobody I know
feels that they have the power to quicken lines by joining them. On the contrary,
just about everyone I know seems to believe that they, like me, are inexorably
drawn to the slowest of all possible lines, and that their occasional attempts to
thwart fate merely slow the lines they join and hasten the lines they abandon.
Why do we all believe this?
Because standing in a line that is moving at a rapid pace, or even an average
pace, is such a mind-numbingly ordinary experience that we don’t notice or
remember it. Instead we just stand there bored, glancing at the tabloids,
contemplating the Clark bars, and wondering what idiot decided that batteries of
different sizes should be labeled with different numbers of A’s rather than with
words we can actually remember such as large, medium, and small. As we do
this, we rarely turn to our partners and say, “Have you noticed how normally this
line is moving? I mean, it’s just so darned average that I’m feeling compelled to
make notes so that I can charm others with the tale at a later date.” No, the linemoving experiences we remember are those in which the guy in the bright red
hat who was originally standing behind us before he switched to the other line
has made it out of the store and into his car before we’ve even made it to the
cash register because the bovine grandmother ahead of us is waving her coupons
at the clerk and debating the true meaning of the phrase expiration date. This
doesn’t really happen that often, but because it is so memorable, we tend to think
it does.
The fact that the least likely experience is often the most likely memory can
wreak havoc with our ability to predict future experiences.
6 For example, in one
study, researchers asked commuters waiting on a subway platform to imagine
how they would feel if they missed their train that day.
7 Before making this
prediction, some of the commuters (any-memory group) were asked to
remember and describe “a time you missed your train.” Other commuters (worstmemory group) were asked to remember and describe “the worst time you
missed your train.” The results showed that commuters in the any-memory group
remembered an episode that was every bit as awful as the episode remembered
by commuters in the worst-memory group. In other words, when commuters
thought about train-missing, the single most inconvenient and frustrating
episodes tended to come to their minds (“I could hear the train arriving and so I
started to run to catch it, but I tripped on the stairs and knocked over this guy
who was selling umbrellas, and as a result I was a half hour late for a job
interview and by the time I got there they had already hired someone else”).
Most instances of train missing are ordinary and forgettable, hence when we
think about train missing, we tend to remember the most extraordinary instances.
Now, what does this have to do with predicting our emotional futures? K-1
words come quickly to mind because of the way our mental dictionaries are
organized and not because they are common, and memories of slow-moving
grocery lines come quickly to mind because we pay special attention when we’re
stuck in them and not because they are common. But because we don’t recognize
the real reasons why these memories come quickly to mind, we mistakenly
conclude that they are more common than they actually are. Similarly, awful
train-missing incidents come quickly to mind not because they are common but
because they are uncommon. But because we don’t recognize the real reasons
why these awful episodes come quickly to mind, we mistakenly conclude that
they are more common than they actually are. And indeed, when commuters
were asked to make predictions about how they would feel if they missed their
train that day, they mistakenly expected the experience to be much more
inconvenient and frustrating than it likely would have been.
This tendency to recall and rely on unusual instances is one of the reasons
why we so often repeat mistakes. When we think about last year’s family
vacation we do not recruit a fair and representative sample of instances from our
two-week tour of Idaho. Instead, the memory that comes most naturally and
quickly to mind is of that first Saturday afternoon when we took the kids
horseback riding, crested the ridge on our palominos, and found ourselves
looking down into a magnificent valley, the river wending its way to the horizon
like a mirrored ribbon as the sun played on its surface. The air was crisp, the
woods were quiet. The kids suddenly stopped arguing and sat transfixed on their
horses, someone said “Wow” in a very soft voice, everyone smiled at everyone
else, and the moment was forever crystallized as the high point of the vacation.
Which is why it instantly springs to mind. But if we rely on this memory as we
plan our next vacation while overlooking the fact that the rest of the trip was
generally disappointing, we risk finding ourselves at the same overcrowded
campground the next year, eating the same stale sandwiches, being bitten by the
same surly ants, and wondering how we managed to learn so little from our
previous visit. Because we tend to remember the best of times and the worst of
times instead of the most likely of times, the wealth of experience that young
people admire does not always pay clear dividends.
All’s Well
I recently had an argument with my wife, who insisted that I like the movie
Schindler’s List. Now, let me be clear: She was not insisting that I would like the
film or that I should like the film. She was insisting that I do like the film, which
we saw together in 1993. This struck me as supremely unfair. I don’t get to be
right about too many things, but the one thing I reserve the right to be right about
is what I like. And as I have been telling everyone who would listen for more
than a decade, I do not like Schindler’s List. But my wife said I was wrong, and
as a scientist I feel morally bound to test any hypothesis that involves me eating
popcorn. So we rented Schindler’s List, watched it again, and the results of my
experiment unequivocally proved who was right: We were. She was right
because I was indeed riveted by the movie for all of the first two hundred
minutes. But I was right because at the end something awful happened. Rather
than leaving me at the story’s conclusion, the director, Steven Spielberg, added a
final scene in which the real people on whom the characters were based came
on-screen and honored the movie’s hero. I found that scene so intrusive, so
mawkish, so thoroughly superfluous, that I actually said to my wife, “Oh, give
me a break,” which is apparently what I’d said in a rather loud voice to the entire
theater in 1993. The first 98 percent of the movie was brilliant, the final 2
percent was stupid, and I remembered not liking the movie because (for me) it
had ended badly. The only strange thing about this memory is that I’ve sat
through an awful lot of films whose proportion of brilliance was significantly
less than 98 percent, and I remember liking some of them quite a bit. The
difference is that in those films the stupid parts were at the beginning, or in the
middle, or somewhere other than the very end. So why do I like average films
that end superbly more than nearly perfect films that end badly? After all, don’t I
get more minutes of intense and satisfying emotional involvement with the
nearly perfect film than with the average film?
Yes, but apparently that’s not what matters. As we’ve seen, memory does not
store a feature-length film of our experience but instead stores an idiosyncratic
synopsis, and among memory’s idiosyncrasies is its obsession with final scenes.
8
Whether we hear a series of sounds, read a series of letters, see a series of
pictures, smell a series of odors, or meet a series of people, we show a
pronounced tendency to recall the items at the end of the series far better than
the items at the beginning or in the middle.
9 As such, when we look back on the
entire series, our impression is strongly influenced by its final items.
10 This
tendency is particularly acute when we look back on experiences of pleasure and
pain. For instance, volunteers in one study were asked to submerge their hands
in icy water (a common laboratory task that is quite painful but that causes no
harm) while using an electronic rating scale to report their moment-to-moment
discomfort.
11 Every volunteer performed both a short trial and a long trial. On
the short trial, the volunteers submerged their hand for sixty seconds in a water
bath that was kept at a chilly fifty-seven degrees Fahrenheit. On the long trial,
volunteers submerged their hand for ninety seconds in a water bath that was kept
at a chilly fifty-seven degrees Fahrenheit for the first sixty seconds, then
surreptitiously warmed to a not-quite-as-chilly fifty-nine degrees over the
remaining thirty seconds. So the short trial consisted of sixty cold seconds, and
the long trial consisted of the same sixty cold seconds with an additional thirty
cool seconds. Which trial was more painful?
Well, it depends on what we mean by painful. The long trial clearly comprised
a greater number of painful moments, and indeed, the volunteers’ moment-tomoment reports revealed that they experienced equal discomfort for the first
sixty seconds on both trials, but much more discomfort in the next thirty seconds
if they kept their hand in the water (as they did on the long trial) than if they
removed it (as they did on the short trial). On the other hand (sorry), when
volunteers were later asked to remember their experience and say which trial had
been more painful, they tended to say that the short trial had been more painful
than the long one. Although the long trial required the volunteers to endure 50
percent more seconds of immersion in ice water, it had a slightly warmer finish
and hence was remembered as the less painful of the two experiences. Memory’s
fetish for endings explains why women often remember childbirth as less painful
than it actually was,
12 and why couples whose relationships have gone sour
remember that they were never really happy in the first place.
13 As Shakespeare
wrote, “The setting sun, and music at the close / As the last taste of sweets, is
sweetest last / Writ in remembrance more than things long past.”
14
The fact that we often judge the pleasure of an experience by its ending can
cause us to make some curious choices. For example, when the researchers who
performed the cold-water study asked the volunteers which of the two trials they
would prefer to repeat, 69 percent of the volunteers chose to repeat the long one
—that is, the one that entailed an extra thirty seconds of pain. Because the
volunteers remembered the long trial as less painful than the short one, that was
the one they chose to repeat. It would be easy to impugn the rationality of this
choice—after all, the “total pleasure” of an experience is a function of both the
quality and the quantity of the moments that constitute it, and these volunteers
were clearly not considering quantity.
15 But it would be just as easy to defend
the rationality of this choice. We don’t ride the mechanical bull or pose for a
picture with a handsome movie star because these momentary experiences are
inherently pleasurable; we do it so that we can spend the rest of our years
immersed in blissful recollection (“I stayed on for a full minute!”). If we can
spend hours enjoying the memory of an experience that lasted just a few
seconds, and if memories tend to overemphasize endings, then why not endure a
little extra pain in order to have a memory that is a little less painful?
16
Both of these positions are sensible, and you could sensibly hold either of
them. The problem is that you more than likely hold both of them. Consider, for
example, a study in which volunteers learned about a woman (whom we’ll call
Ms. Dash) who had an utterly fabulous life until she was sixty years old, at
which point her life went from utterly fabulous to merely satisfactory.
17 Then, at
the age of sixty-five, Ms. Dash was killed in an auto accident. How good was her
life (which is depicted by the dashed line in figure 21)? On a nine-point scale,
volunteers said that Ms. Dash’s life was a 5.7. A second group of volunteers
learned about a woman (whom we’ll call Ms. Solid) who had an utterly fabulous
life until she was killed in an auto accident at the age of sixty. How good was her
life (which is depicted by the solid line in figure 21)? Volunteers said that Ms.
Solid’s life was a 6.5. It appears, then, that these volunteers preferred a fabulous
life (Ms. Solid’s) to an equally fabulous life with a few additional merely
satisfactory years (Ms. Dash’s). If you think about it for a moment, you’ll realize
that this is just how the volunteers in the ice-water study were thinking. Ms.
Dash’s life had more “total pleasure” than did Ms. Solid’s, Ms. Solid’s life had a
better ending than Ms. Dash’s, and the volunteers were clearly more concerned
with the quality of a life’s ending than with the total quantity of pleasure the life
contained. But wait a minute. When a third group of volunteers was asked to
compare the two lives side by side (as you can do at the bottom of figure 21),
they showed no such preference. When the difference in the quantity of the two
lives was made salient by asking volunteers to consider them simultaneously, the
volunteers were no longer so sure that they preferred to live fast, die young, and
leave a happy corpse. Apparently, the way an experience ends is more important
to us than the total amount of pleasure we receive—until we think about it.
Fig. 21. When considered separately, the shapes of the curves matter. But when directly compared, the
lengths of the curves matter.
The Way We Weren’t
If you were an American of voting age on the evening of November 8, 1988,
then you were probably at home watching the results of the presidential contest
between Michael Dukakis and George Bush. When you think back on that
election you may recall the infamous Willie Horton ad, or the phrase “cardcarrying member of the ACLU,” or Lloyd Bentsen’s stinging retort to Dan
Quayle: “Senator, you’re no Jack Kennedy.” You most certainly recall that when
all the votes were tallied, Americans decided not to send a Massachusetts liberal
to the White House. Although Dukakis lost the election, he did win some of the
more liberal states, and because we’re talking about memory, I’d like to ask you
to use yours right now. Close your eyes for a moment and try to remember
exactly how you felt when the newscaster announced that Dukakis had won the
state of California. Were you disappointed or delighted? Did you jump up and
down or did you shake your head? Did you shed tears of joy or tears of sorrow?
Did you say, “Thank God for the left coast!” or “What do you expect of fruits
and nuts?” If you inhabit the liberal end of the political spectrum, then you
probably remember feeling happy when California was called, and if you live
toward the conservative end, then you probably remember feeling less so. And if
that’s what you remember, then my friends and fellow citizens, I stand before
you today to announce that your memory is mistaken. Because in 1988,
Californians voted for George Herbert Walker Bush.
Why is it so easy to pull a cheap stunt like this? Because memory is a
reconstructive process that uses every piece of information at its disposal to
build the mental images that come trippingly to mind when we engage in an act
of remembering. One such piece of information is the fact that California is the
liberal state that gave us Transcendental Meditation, granola, psychedelic rock,
Governor Moonbeam, and Debbie Does Dallas. So it makes sense that Michael
Dukakis—like Bill Clinton, Al Gore, and John Kerry—would have won the state
handily. But before Californians began voting for Bill Clinton, Al Gore, and
John Kerry, they voted as many times as they possibly could for Gerald Ford,
Ronald Reagan, and Richard Nixon. Unless you are a political scientist, a CNN
junkie, or a longtime Californian, you probably didn’t remember that bit of
historical politrivia. Instead you made a logical inference, namely, that because
California is a liberal state, and because Dukakis was a liberal candidate,
Californians must have voted for him. Just as anthropologists use both facts (a
thirteen-thousand-year-old skull found near Mexico City is long and narrow) and
theories (“Long, narrow skulls indicate European ancestry”) to make guesses
about past events (“Caucasians came to the New World two thousand years
before the Mongoloids replaced them”), so did your brain use a fact (“Dukakis
was a liberal”) and a theory (“Californians are liberal”) to make a guess about a
past event (“Californians voted for Dukakis”). Alas, because your theory was
wrong, your guess was wrong too.
Our brains use facts and theories to make guesses about past events, and so
too do they use facts and theories to make guesses about past feelings.
18 Because
feelings do not leave behind the same kinds of facts that presidential elections
and ancient civilizations do, our brains must rely even more heavily on theories
to construct memories of how we once felt. When those theories are wrong, we
end up misremembering our own emotions. Consider, for instance, how your
theories about something—oh, say, how about gender?—might influence your
recollection of past feelings. Most of us believe that men are less emotional than
women (“She cried, he didn’t”), that men and women have different emotional
reactions to similar events (“He was angry, she was sad”), and that women are
particularly prone to negative emotions at particular points in their menstrual
cycles (“She’s a bit irritable today, if you know what I mean”). As it turns out,
there is little evidence for any of these beliefs—but that’s not the point. The
point is that these beliefs are theories that can influence how we remember our
own emotions. Consider:
• In one study, volunteers were asked to remember how they had felt a
few months earlier, and the male and female volunteers remembered feeling
equally intense emotions.
19 Another group of volunteers was asked to
remember how they had felt a month earlier, but before doing so, they were
asked to think a bit about gender. When volunteers were prompted to think
about gender, female volunteers remembered feeling more intense emotion
and male volunteers remembered feeling less intense emotion.
• In one study, male and female volunteers became members of teams
and played a game against an opposing team.
20 Some volunteers
immediately reported the emotions they had felt while playing the game,
and others recalled their emotions a week later. Male and female volunteers
did not differ in the kinds of emotions they reported. But a week later
female volunteers recalled feeling more stereotypically feminine emotions
(e.g., sympathy and guilt) and male volunteers recalled feeling more
stereotypically masculine emotions (e.g., anger and pride).
• In one study, female volunteers kept diaries and made daily ratings of
their feelings for four to six weeks.
21 These ratings revealed that women’s
emotions did not vary with the phase of their menstrual cycles. However,
when the women were later asked to reread the diary entry for a particular
day and remember how they had been feeling, they remembered feeling
more negative emotion on the days on which they were menstruating.
It seems that our theories about how people of our gender usually feel can
influence our memory of how we actually felt. Gender is but one of many
theories that have this power to alter our memories. For instance, Asian culture
does not emphasize the importance of personal happiness as much as European
culture does, and thus Asian Americans believe that they are generally less
happy than their European American counterparts. In one study, volunteers
carried handheld computers everywhere they went for a week and recorded how
they were feeling when the computer beeped at random intervals throughout the
day.
22 These reports showed that the Asian American volunteers were slightly
happier than the European American volunteers. But when the volunteers were
asked to remember how they had felt that week, the Asian American volunteers
reported that they had felt less happy and not more. In a study using similar
methodology, Hispanic Americans and European Americans reported feeling
pretty much the same during a particular week, but the Hispanic Americans
remembered feeling happier than the European Americans did.
23 Not all theories
involve some immutable characteristic of persons, such as gender or culture. For
example, which students tend to score highest on an exam—those who worry
about grades, or those who don’t? As a college professor, I can tell you that my
own theory is that students who are deeply concerned about their performance
tend to study more and hence outscore their more lackadaisical classmates.
Apparently students have the same theory, because research shows that when
students do well on an exam, they remember feeling more anxious before the
exam than they actually felt, and when students do poorly on an exam, they
remember feeling less anxious before the exam than they actually felt.
24
We remember feeling as we believe we must have felt. The problem with this
error of retrospection is that it can keep us from discovering our errors of
prospection. Consider the case of the 2000 U.S. presidential election. Voters
went to the polls on November 7, 2000, to decide whether George Bush or Al
Gore would become the forty-third president of the United States, but it quickly
became clear that the election was too close to call and that its outcome would
take weeks to decide. The next day, November 8, researchers asked some voters
to predict how happy they would be on the day the election was ultimately
decided for or against their favored candidate. On December 13 Al Gore
conceded to George Bush, and the next day, December 14, the researchers
measured the actual happiness of the voters. Four months later, in April 2001,
the researchers contacted the voters again and asked them to recall how they had
felt on December 14. As figure 22 shows, the study revealed three things. First,
on the day after the election, pro-Gore voters expected to be devastated and proBush voters expected to be elated if George Bush was ultimately declared the
winner. Second, when George Bush was ultimately declared the winner, proGore voters were less devastated and pro-Bush voters were less elated than they
had expected to be (a tendency you’ve seen before in other chapters). But third
and most important, a few months after the election was decided, both groups of
voters remembered feeling as they had expected to feel, and not as they had
actually felt. Apparently, prospections and retrospections can be in perfect
agreement despite the fact that neither accurately describes our actual
experience.
25 The theories that lead us to predict that an event will make us
happy (“If Bush wins, I’ll be elated”) also lead us to remember that it did
(“When Bush won, I was elated”), thereby eliminating evidence of their own
inaccuracy. This makes it unusually difficult for us to discover that our
predictions were wrong. We overestimate how happy we will be on our
birthdays,
26 we underestimate how happy we will be on Monday mornings,
27
and we make these mundane but erroneous predictions again and again, despite
their regular disconfirmation. Our inability to recall how we really felt is one of
the reasons why our wealth of experience so often turns out to be a poverty of
riches.
Fig. 22. In the 2000 U.S. presidential election, partisans expected the Supreme Court’s decision to
strongly influence how happy they would feel a day after the decision was announced (bars on the
left). A few months later they remembered that it had (bars on the right). In fact, the decision had a far
smaller impact on happiness than the partisans either predicted or remembered (bars in the middle).
Onward
When people are asked to name the single object they would try to save if their
home caught fire, the most common answer (much to the chagrin of the family
dog) is “My photo album.” We don’t just treasure our memories; we are our
memories. And yet, research reveals that memory is less like a collection of
photographs than it is like a collection of impressionist paintings rendered by an
artist who takes considerable license with his subject. The more ambiguous the
subject is, the more license the artist takes, and few subjects are more ambiguous
than emotional experience. Our memory for emotional episodes is overly
influenced by unusual instances, closing moments, and theories about how we
must have felt way back then, all of which gravely compromise our ability to
learn from our own experience. Practice, it seems, doesn’t always make perfect.
But if you think back to all that talk about pooping, you’ll remember that
practice is just one of the two ways in which we learn. If practice doesn’t fix us,
then what about coaching?
CHAPTER 11
Reporting Live from Tomorrow
Instructed by the antiquary times,
He must, he is, he cannot but be wise.
Shakespeare, Troilus and Cressida
IN ALFRED HITCHCOCK’S 1956 REMAKE of The Man Who Knew Too Much, Doris
Day sang a waltz whose final verse went like this:
When I was just a child in school,
I asked my teacher, “What will I try?
Should I paint pictures, should I sing songs?”
This was her wise reply:
“Que sera, sera. Whatever will be, will be.
The future’s not ours to see. Que sera, sera.”
1
Now, I don’t mean to quibble with the lyricist, and I have nothing but fond
memories of Doris Day, but the fact is that this is not a particularly wise reply.
When a child asks for advice about which of two activities to pursue, a teacher
should be able to provide more than a musical cliché. Yes, of course the future is
hard to see. But we’re all heading that way anyhow, and as difficult as it may be
to envision, we have to make some decisions about which futures to aim for and
which to avoid. If we are prone to mistakes when we try to imagine the future,
then how should we decide what to do?
Even a child knows the answer to that one: We should ask the teacher. One of
the benefits of being a social and linguistic animal is that we can capitalize on
the experience of others rather than trying to figure everything out for ourselves.
For millions of years, human beings have conquered their ignorance by dividing
the labor of discovery and then communicating their discoveries to one another,
which is why the average newspaper boy in Pittsburgh knows more about the
universe than did Galileo, Aristotle, Leonardo, or any of those other guys who
were so smart they only needed one name. We all make ample use of this
resource. If you were to write down everything you know and then go back
through the list and make a check mark next to the things you know only
because somebody told you, you’d develop a repetitive-motion disorder because
almost everything you know is secondhand. Was Yury Gagarin the first man in
space? Is croissant a French word? Are there more Chinese than North
Dakotans? Does a stitch in time save nine? Most of us know the answers to these
questions despite the fact that none of us actually witnessed the launching of
Vostok I, personally supervised the evolution of language, hand-counted all the
people in Beijing and Bismarck, or performed a fully randomized double-blind
study of stitching. We know the answers because someone shared them with us.
Communication is a kind of “vicarious observation”
2
that allows us to learn
about the world without ever leaving the comfort of our Barcaloungers. The six
billion interconnected people who cover the surface of our planet constitute a
leviathan with twelve billion eyes, and anything that is seen by one pair of eyes
can potentially be known to the entire beast in a matter of months, days, or even
minutes.
The fact that we can communicate with one another about our experiences
should provide a simple solution to the core problem with which this book has
been concerned. Yes, our ability to imagine our future emotions is flawed—but
that’s okay, because we don’t have to imagine what it would feel like to marry a
lawyer, move to Texas, or eat a snail when there are so many people who have
done these things and are all too happy to tell us about them. Teachers,
neighbors, coworkers, parents, friends, lovers, children, uncles, cousins, coaches,
cabdrivers, bartenders, hairstylists, dentists, advertisers—each of these folks has
something to say about what it would be like to live in this future rather than that
one, and at any point in time we can be fairly sure that one of these folks has
actually had the experience that we are merely contemplating. Because we are
the mammal that shows and tells, each of us has access to information about
almost any experience we can possibly imagine—and many that we can’t.
Guidance counselors tell us about the best careers, critics tell us about the best
restaurants, travel agents tell us about the best vacations, and friends tell us
about the best travel agents. Every one of us is surrounded by a platoon of Dear
Abbys who can recount their own experiences and in so doing tell us which
futures are most worth wanting.
Given the overabundance of consultants, role models, gurus, mentors, yentas,
and nosy relatives, we might expect people to do quite well when it comes to
making life’s most important decisions, such as where to live, where to work,
and whom to marry. And yet, the average American moves more than six times,
3
changes jobs more than ten times,
4 and marries more than once,
5 which suggests
that most of us are making more than a few poor choices. If humanity is a living
library of information about what it feels like to do just about anything that can
be done, then why do the people with the library cards make so many bad
decisions? There are just two possibilities. The first is that a lot of the advice we
receive from others is bad advice that we foolishly accept. The second is that a
lot of the advice we receive from others is good advice that we foolishly reject.
So which is it? Do we listen too well when others speak, or do we not listen well
enough? As we shall see, the answer to that question is yes.
Super-replicators
The philosopher Bertrand Russell once claimed that believing is “the most
mental thing we do.”
6 Perhaps, but it is also the most social thing we do. Just as
we pass along our genes in an effort to create people whose faces look like ours,
so too do we pass along our beliefs in an effort to create people whose minds
think like ours. Almost any time we tell anyone anything, we are attempting to
change the way their brains operate—attempting to change the way they see the
world so that their view of it more closely resembles our own. Just about every
assertion—from the sublime (“God has a plan for you”) to the mundane (“Turn
left at the light, go two miles, and you’ll see the Dunkin’ Donuts on your right”)
—is meant to bring the listener’s beliefs about the world into harmony with the
speaker’s. Sometimes these attempts succeed and sometimes they fail. So what
determines whether a belief will be successfully transmitted from one mind to
another?
The principles that explain why some genes are transmitted more successfully
than others also explain why some beliefs are transmitted more successfully than
others.
7 Evolutionary biology teaches us that any gene that promotes its own
“means of transmission” will be represented in increasing proportions in the
population over time. For instance, imagine that a single gene were responsible
for the complex development of the neural circuitry that makes orgasms feel so
good. For a person having this gene, orgasms would feel . . . well, orgasmic. For
a person lacking this gene, orgasms would feel more like sneezes—brief, noisy,
physical convulsions that pay rather paltry hedonic dividends. Now, if we took
fifty healthy, fertile people who had the gene and fifty healthy, fertile people
who didn’t, and left them on a hospitable planet for a million years or so, when
we returned we would probably find a population of thousands or millions of
people, almost all of whom had the gene. Why? Because a gene that made
orgasms feel good would tend to be transmitted from generation to generation
simply because people who enjoy orgasms are inclined to do the thing that
transmits their genes. The logic is so circular that it is virtually inescapable:
Genes tend to be transmitted when they make us do the things that transmit
genes. What’s more, even bad genes—those that make us prone to cancer or
heart disease—can become super-replicators if they compensate for these costs
by promoting their own means of transmission. For instance, if the gene that
made orgasms feel delicious also left us prone to arthritis and tooth decay, that
gene might still be represented in increasing proportions because arthritic,
toothless people who love orgasms are more likely to have children than are
limber, toothy people who do not.
The same logic can explain the transmission of beliefs. If a particular belief
has some property that facilitates its own transmission, then that belief tends to
be held by an increasing number of minds. As it turns out, there are several such
properties that increase a belief’s transmissional success, the most obvious of
which is accuracy. When someone tells us where to find a parking space
downtown or how to bake a cake at high altitude, we adopt that belief and pass it
along because it helps us and our friends do the things we want to do, such as
parking and baking. As one philosopher noted, “The faculty of communication
would not gain ground in evolution unless it was by and large the faculty of
transmitting true beliefs.”
8 Accurate beliefs give us power, which makes it easy
to understand why they are so readily transmitted from one mind to another.
It is a bit more difficult to understand why inaccurate beliefs are so readily
transmitted from one mind to another—but they are. False beliefs, like bad
genes, can and do become super-replicators, and a thought experiment illustrates
how this can happen. Imagine a game that is played by two teams, each of which
has a thousand players, each of whom is linked to teammates by a telephone.
The object of the game is to get one’s team to share as many accurate beliefs as
possible. When players receive a message that they believe to be accurate, they
call a teammate and pass it along. When they receive a message that they believe
to be inaccurate, they don’t. At the end of the game, the referee blows a whistle
and awards each team a point for every accurate belief that the entire team shares
and subtracts one point for every inaccurate belief the entire team shares. Now,
consider a contest played one sunny day between a team called the Perfects
(whose members always transmit accurate beliefs) and a team called the
Imperfects (whose members occasionally transmit an inaccurate belief). We
should expect the Perfects to win, right?
Not necessarily. In fact, there are some special circumstances under which the
Imperfects will beat their pants off. For example, imagine what would happen if
one of the Imperfect players sent the false message “Talking on the phone all
day and night will ultimately make you very happy,” and imagine that other
Imperfect players were gullible enough to believe it and pass it on. This message
is inaccurate and thus will cost the Imperfects a point in the end. But it may have
the compensatory effect of keeping more of the Imperfects on the telephone for
more of the time, thus increasing the total number of accurate messages they
transmit. Under the right circumstances, the costs of this inaccurate belief would
be outweighed by its benefits, namely, that it led players to behave in ways that
increased the odds that they would share other accurate beliefs. The lesson to be
learned from this game is that inaccurate beliefs can prevail in the belieftransmission game if they somehow facilitate their own “means of
transmission.” In this case, the means of transmission is not sex but
communication, and thus any belief—even a false belief—that increases
communication has a good chance of being transmitted over and over again.
False beliefs that happen to promote stable societies tend to propagate because
people who hold these beliefs tend to live in stable societies, which provide the
means by which false beliefs propagate.
Some of our cultural wisdom about happiness looks suspiciously like a super-
replicating false belief. Consider money. If you’ve ever tried to sell anything,
then you probably tried to sell it for as much as you possibly could, and other
people probably tried to buy it for as little as they possibly could. All the parties
involved in the transaction assumed that they would be better off if they ended
up with more money rather than less, and this assumption is the bedrock of our
economic behavior. Yet, it has far fewer scientific facts to substantiate it than
you might expect. Economists and psychologists have spent decades studying
the relation between wealth and happiness, and they have generally concluded
that wealth increases human happiness when it lifts people out of abject poverty
and into the middle class but that it does little to increase happiness thereafter.
9
Americans who earn $50,000 per year are much happier than those who earn
$10,000 per year, but Americans who earn $5 million per year are not much
happier than those who earn $100,000 per year. People who live in poor nations
are much less happy than people who live in moderately wealthy nations, but
people who live in moderately wealthy nations are not much less happy than
people who live in extremely wealthy nations. Economists explain that wealth
has “declining marginal utility,” which is a fancy way of saying that it hurts to
be hungry, cold, sick, tired, and scared, but once you’ve bought your way out of
these burdens, the rest of your money is an increasingly useless pile of paper.
10
So once we’ve earned as much money as we can actually enjoy, we quit
working and enjoy it, right? Wrong. People in wealthy countries generally work
long and hard to earn more money than they can ever derive pleasure from.
11
This fact puzzles us less than it should. After all, a rat can be motivated to run
through a maze that has a cheesy reward at its end, but once the little guy is all
topped up, then even the finest Stilton won’t get him off his haunches. Once
we’ve eaten our fill of pancakes, more pancakes are not rewarding, hence we
stop trying to procure and consume them. But not so, it seems, with money. As
Adam Smith, the father of modern economics, wrote in 1776: “The desire for
food is limited in every man by the narrow capacity of the human stomach; but
the desire of the conveniences and ornaments of building, dress, equipage, and
household furniture, seems to have no limit or certain boundary.”
12
If food and money both stop pleasing us once we’ve had enough of them, then
why do we continue to stuff our pockets when we would not continue to stuff
our faces? Adam Smith had an answer. He began by acknowledging what most
of us suspect anyway, which is that the production of wealth is not necessarily a
source of personal happiness.
In what constitutes the real happiness of human life, [the poor] are in no
respect inferior to those who would seem so much above them. In ease of
body and peace of mind, all the different ranks of life are nearly upon a
level, and the beggar, who suns himself by the side of the highway,
possesses that security which kings are fighting for.
13
That sounds lovely, but if it’s true, then we’re all in big trouble. If rich kings are
no happier than poor beggars, then why should poor beggars stop sunning
themselves by the roadside and work to become rich kings? If no one wants to
be rich, then we have a significant economic problem, because flourishing
economies require that people continually procure and consume one another’s
goods and services. Market economies require that we all have an insatiable
hunger for stuff, and if everyone were content with the stuff they had, then the
economy would grind to a halt. But if this is a significant economic problem, it is
not a significant personal problem. The chair of the Federal Reserve may wake
up every morning with a desire to do what the economy wants, but most of us
get up with a desire to do what we want, which is to say that the fundamental
needs of a vibrant economy and the fundamental needs of a happy individual are
not necessarily the same. So what motivates people to work hard every day to do
things that will satisfy the economy’s needs but not their own? Like so many
thinkers, Smith believed that people want just one thing—happiness—hence
economies can blossom and grow only if people are deluded into believing that
the production of wealth will make them happy.
14
If and only if people hold this
false belief will they do enough producing, procuring, and consuming to sustain
their economies.
The pleasures of wealth and greatness . . . strike the imagination as
something grand and beautiful and noble, of which the attainment is well
worth all the toil and anxiety which we are so apt to bestow upon it. . . . It is
this deception which rouses and keeps in continual motion the industry of
mankind. It is this which first prompted them to cultivate the ground, to
build houses, to found cities and commonwealths, and to invent and
improve all the sciences and arts, which ennoble and embellish human life;
which have entirely changed the whole face of the globe, have turned the
rude forests of nature into agreeable and fertile plains, and made the
trackless and barren ocean a new fund of subsistence, and the great high
road of communication to the different nations of the earth.
15
In short, the production of wealth does not necessarily make individuals
happy, but it does serve the needs of an economy, which serves the needs of a
stable society, which serves as a network for the propagation of delusional
beliefs about happiness and wealth. Economies thrive when individuals strive,
but because individuals will only strive for their own happiness, it is essential
that they mistakenly believe that producing and consuming are routes to personal
well-being. Although words such as delusional may seem to suggest some sort
of shadowy conspiracy orchestrated by a small group of men in dark suits, the
belief-transmission game teaches us that the propagation of false beliefs does not
require that anyone be trying to perpetrate a magnificent fraud on an innocent
populace. There is no cabal at the top, no star chamber, no master manipulator
whose clever program of indoctrination and propaganda has duped us all into
believing that money can buy us love. Rather, this particular false belief is a
super-replicator because holding it causes us to engage in the very activities that
perpetuate it.
16
The belief-transmission game explains why we believe some things about
happiness that simply aren’t true. The joy of money is one example. The joy of
children is another that for most of us hits a bit closer to home. Every human
culture tells its members that having children will make them happy. When
people think about their offspring—either imagining future offspring or thinking
about their current ones—they tend to conjure up images of cooing babies
smiling from their bassinets, adorable toddlers running higgledy-piggledy across
the lawn, handsome boys and gorgeous girls playing trumpets and tubas in the
school marching band, successful college students going on to have beautiful
weddings, satisfying careers, and flawless grandchildren whose affections can be
purchased with candy. Prospective parents know that diapers will need changing,
that homework will need doing, and that orthodontists will go to Aruba on their
life savings, but by and large, they think quite happily about parenthood, which
is why most of them eventually leap into it. When parents look back on
parenthood, they remember feeling what those who are looking forward to it
expect to feel. Few of us are immune to these cheery contemplations. I have a
twenty-nine-year-old son, and I am absolutely convinced that he is and always
has been one of the greatest sources of joy in my life, having only recently been
eclipsed by my two-year-old granddaughter, who is equally adorable but who
has not yet asked me to walk behind her and pretend we’re unrelated. When
people are asked to identify their sources of joy, they do just what I do: They
point to their kids.
Yet if we measure the actual satisfaction of people who have children, a very
different story emerges. As figure 23 shows, couples generally start out quite
happy in their marriages and then become progressively less satisfied over the
course of their lives together, getting close to their original levels of satisfaction
only when their children leave home.
17 Despite what we read in the popular
press, the only known symptom of “empty nest syndrome” is increased
smiling.
18
Interestingly, this pattern of satisfaction over the life cycle describes
women (who are usually the primary caretakers of children) better than men.
19
Careful studies of how women feel as they go about their daily activities show
that they are less happy when taking care of their children than when eating,
exercising, shopping, napping, or watching television.
20
Indeed, looking after the
kids appears to be only slightly more pleasant than doing housework.
Fig. 23. As the four separate studies in this graph show, marital satisfaction decreases dramatically
after the birth of the first child and increases only when the last child leaves home.
None of this should surprise us. Every parent knows that children are a lot of
work—a lot of really hard work—and although parenting has many rewarding
moments, the vast majority of its moments involve dull and selfless service to
people who will take decades to become even begrudgingly grateful for what we
are doing. If parenting is such difficult business, then why do we have such a
rosy view of it? One reason is that we have been talking on the phone all day
with society’s stockholders—our moms and uncles and personal trainers—who
have been transmitting to us an idea that they believe to be true but whose
accuracy is not the cause of its successful transmission. “Children bring
happiness” is a super-replicator. The belief-transmission network of which we
are a part cannot operate without a continuously replenished supply of people to
do the transmitting, thus the belief that children are a source of happiness
becomes a part of our cultural wisdom simply because the opposite belief
unravels the fabric of any society that holds it. Indeed, people who believed that
children bring misery and despair—and who thus stopped having them—would
put their belief-transmission network out of business in around fifty years, hence
terminating the belief that terminated them. The Shakers were a utopian farming
community that arose in the 1800s and at one time numbered about six thousand.
They approved of children, but they did not approve of the natural act that
creates them. Over the years, their strict belief in the importance of celibacy
caused their network to contract, and today there are just a few elderly Shakers
left, transmitting their doomsday belief to no one but themselves.
The belief-transmission game is rigged so that we must believe that children
and money bring happiness, regardless of whether such beliefs are true. This
doesn’t mean that we should all now quit our jobs and abandon our families.
Rather, it means that while we believe we are raising children and earning
paychecks to increase our share of happiness, we are actually doing these things
for reasons beyond our ken. We are nodes in a social network that arises and
falls by a logic of its own, which is why we continue to toil, continue to mate,
and continue to be surprised when we do not experience all the joy we so
gullibly anticipated.
The Myth of Fingerprints
My friends tell me that I have a tendency to point out problems without offering
solutions, but they never tell me what I should do about it. In one chapter after
another, I’ve described the ways in which imagination fails to provide us with
accurate previews of our emotional futures. I’ve claimed that when we imagine
our futures we tend to fill in, leave out, and take little account of how differently
we will think about the future once we actually get there. I’ve claimed that
neither personal experience nor cultural wisdom compensates for imagination’s
shortcomings. I’ve so thoroughly marinated you in the foibles, biases, errors, and
mistakes of the human mind that you may wonder how anyone ever manages to
make toast without buttering their kneecaps. If so, you will be heartened to learn
that there is a simple method by which anyone can make strikingly accurate
predictions about how they will feel in the future. But you may be disheartened
to learn that, by and large, no one wants to use it.
Why do we rely on our imaginations in the first place? Imagination is the poor
man’s wormhole. We can’t do what we’d really like to do—namely, travel
through time, pay a visit to our future selves, and see how happy those selves are
—and so we imagine the future instead of actually going there. But if we cannot
travel in the dimension of time, we can travel in the dimensions of space, and the
chances are pretty good that somewhere in those other three dimensions there is
another human being who is actually experiencing the future event that we are
merely thinking about. Surely we aren’t the first people ever to consider a move
to Cincinnati, a career in motel management, another helping of rhubarb pie, or
an extramarital affair, and for the most part, those who have already tried these
things are more than willing to tell us about them. It is true that when people tell
us about their past experiences (“That ice water wasn’t really so cold” or “I love
taking care of my daughter”), memory’s peccadilloes may render their testimony
unreliable. But it is also true that when people tell us about their current
experiences (“How am I feeling right now? I feel like pulling my arm out of this
freezing bucket and sticking my teenager’s head in it instead!”), they are
providing us with the kind of report about their subjective state that is considered
the gold standard of happiness measures. If you believe (as I do) that people can
generally say how they are feeling at the moment they are asked, then one way
to make predictions about our own emotional futures is to find someone who is
having the experience we are contemplating and ask them how they feel. Instead
of remembering our past experience in order to simulate our future experience,
perhaps we should simply ask other people to introspect on their inner states.
Perhaps we should give up on remembering and imagining entirely and use other
people as surrogates for our future selves.
This idea sounds all too simple, and I suspect you have an objection to it that
goes something like this: Yes, other people are probably right now experiencing
the very things I am merely contemplating, but I can’t use other people’s
experiences as proxies for my own because those other people are not me. Every
human being is as unique as his or her fingerprints, so it won’t help me much to
learn about how others feel in the situations that I’m facing. Unless these other
people are my clones and have had all the same experiences I’ve had, their
reactions and my reactions are bound to differ. I am a walking, talking
idiosyncrasy, and thus I am better off basing my predictions on my somewhat
fickle imagination than on the reports of people whose preferences, tastes, and
emotional proclivities are so radically different from my own. If that’s your
objection, then it is a good one—so good that it will take two steps to dismantle
it. First let me prove to you that the experience of a single randomly selected
individual can sometimes provide a better basis for predicting your future
experience than your own imagination can. And then let me show you why you
—and I—find this so difficult to believe.
Finding the Solution
Imagination has three shortcomings, and if you didn’t know that then you may
be reading this book backward. If you did know that, then you also know that
imagination’s first shortcoming is its tendency to fill in and leave out without
telling us (which we explored in the section on realism). No one can imagine
every feature and consequence of a future event, hence we must consider some
and fail to consider others. The problem is that the features and consequences we
fail to consider are often quite important. You may recall the study in which
college students were asked to imagine how they would feel a few days after
their school’s football team played a game against its archrival.
21 The results
showed that students overestimated the duration of the game’s emotional impact
because when they tried to imagine their future experience, they imagined their
team winning (“The clock will hit zero, we’ll storm the field, everyone will
cheer . . .”) but failed to imagine what they would be doing afterward (“And then
I’ll go home and study for my final exams”). Because the students were focused
on the game, they failed to imagine how events that happened after the game
would influence their happiness. So what should they have done instead?
They should have abandoned imagination altogether. Consider a study that put
people in a similar predicament and then forced them to abandon their
imaginations. In this study, a group of volunteers (reporters) first received a
delicious prize—a gift certificate from a local ice cream parlor—and then
performed a long, boring task in which they counted and recorded geometric
shapes that appeared on a computer screen.
22 The reporters then reported how
they felt. Next, a new group of volunteers was told that they would also receive a
prize and do the same boring task. Some of these new volunteers (simulators)
were told what the prize was and were asked to use their imaginations to predict
their future feelings. Other volunteers (surrogators) were not told what the prize
was but were instead shown the report of a randomly selected reporter. Not
knowing what the prize was, they couldn’t possibly use their imaginations to
predict their future feelings. Instead, they had to rely on the reporter’s report.
Once all the volunteers had made their predictions, they received the prize, did
the long, boring task, and reported how they actually felt. As the leftmost bars in
figure 24 show, simulators were not as happy as they thought they would be.
Why? Because they failed to imagine how quickly the joy of receiving a gift
certificate would fade when it was followed by a long, boring task. This is
precisely the same mistake that the college-football fans made. But now look at
the results for the surrogators. As you can see, they made extremely accurate
predictions of their future happiness. These surrogators didn’t know what kind of
prize they would receive, but they did know that someone who had received that
prize had been less than ecstatic at the conclusion of the boring task. So they
shrugged and reasoned that they too would feel less than ecstatic at the
conclusion of the boring task—and they were right!
Fig. 24. Volunteers made much more accurate predictions of their future feelings when they learned
how someone else had felt in the same situation (surrogators) than when they tried to imagine how
they themselves would feel (simulators).
Imagination’s second shortcoming is its tendency to project the present onto
the future (which we explored in the section on presentism). When imagination
paints a picture of the future, many of the details are necessarily missing, and
imagination solves this problem by filling in the gaps with details that it borrows
from the present. Anyone who has ever shopped on an empty stomach, vowed to
quit smoking after stubbing out a cigarette, or proposed marriage while on shore
leave knows that how we feel now can erroneously influence how we think we’ll
feel later. As it turns out, surrogation can remedy this shortcoming too. In one
study, volunteers (reporters) ate a few potato chips and reported how much they
enjoyed them.
23 Next, a new group of volunteers was fed pretzels, peanut-butter
cheese crackers, tortilla chips, bread sticks, and melba toast, which, as you might
guess, left them thoroughly stuffed and with little desire for salty snack foods.
These stuffed volunteers were then asked to predict how much they would enjoy
eating a particular food the next day. Some of these stuffed volunteers
(simulators) were told that the food they would eat the next day was potato
chips, and they were asked to use their imaginations to predict how they would
feel after eating them. Other stuffed volunteers (surrogators) were not told what
the next day’s food would be but were instead shown the report of one randomly
selected reporter. Because surrogators didn’t know what the next day’s food
would be, they couldn’t use their imaginations to predict their future enjoyment
of it and thus they had to rely on the reporter’s report. Once all the volunteers
had made their predictions, they went away, returned the next day, ate some
potato chips, and reported how much they enjoyed them. As the middle bars in
figure 24 show, simulators enjoyed eating the potato chips more than they
thought they would. Why? Because when they made their predictions they had
bellies full of pretzels and crackers. But surrogators—who were equally full
when they made their predictions—relied on the report of someone without a full
belly and hence made much more accurate predictions. It is important to note
that the surrogators accurately predicted their future enjoyment of a food despite
the fact that they didn’t even know what the food was!
Imagination’s third shortcoming is its failure to recognize that things will look
different once they happen—in particular, that bad things will look a whole lot
better (which we explored in the section on rationalization). When we imagine
losing a job, for instance, we imagine the painful experience (“The boss will
march into my office, shut the door behind him . . .”) without also imagining
how our psychological immune systems will transform its meaning (“I’ll come
to realize that this was an opportunity to quit retail sales and follow my true
calling as a sculptor”). Can surrogation remedy this shortcoming? To find out,
researchers arranged for some people to have an unpleasant experience. A group
of volunteers (reporters) was told that the experimenter would flip a coin, and if
it came up heads, the volunteer would receive a gift certificate to a local pizza
parlor. The coin was flipped and—oh, so sorry—it came up tails and the
reporters received nothing.
24 The reporters then reported how they felt. Next, a
new group of volunteers was told about the coin-flipping game and was asked to
predict how they would feel if the coin came up tails and they didn’t get the
pizza gift certificate. Some of these volunteers (simulators) were told the precise
monetary value of the gift certificate, and others (surrogators) were instead
shown the report of one randomly selected reporter. Once the volunteers had
made their predictions, the coin was flipped and—oh, so sorry—came up tails.
The volunteers then reported how they felt. As the rightmost bars in figure 24
show, simulators felt better than they predicted they’d feel if they lost the coin
flip. Why? Because simulators did not realize how quickly and easily they would
rationalize the loss (“Pizza is too fattening, and besides, I don’t like that
restaurant anyway”). But surrogators—who had nothing to go on except the
report of another randomly selected individual—assumed that they wouldn’t feel
too bad after losing the prize, hence made more accurate predictions.
Rejecting the Solution
This trio of studies suggests that when people are deprived of the information
that imagination requires and are thus forced to use others as surrogates, they
make remarkably accurate predictions about their future feelings, which suggests
that the best way to predict our feelings tomorrow is to see how others are
feeling today.
25 Given the impressive power of this simple technique, we should
expect people to go out of their way to use it. But they don’t. When an entirely
new group of volunteers was told about the three situations I just described—
winning a prize, eating a mystery food, or failing to receive a gift certificate—
and was then asked whether they would prefer to make predictions about their
future feelings based on (a) information about the prize, the food, and the
certificate; or (b) information about how a randomly selected individual felt after
winning them, eating them, or losing them, virtually every volunteer chose the
former. If you hadn’t seen the results of these studies, you’d probably have done
the same. If I offered to pay for your dinner at a restaurant if you could
accurately predict how much you were going to enjoy it, would you want to see
the restaurant’s menu or some randomly selected diner’s review? If you are like
most people, you would prefer to see the menu, and if you are like most people,
you would end up buying your own dinner. Why?
Because if you are like most people, then like most people, you don’t know
you’re like most people. Science has given us a lot of facts about the average
person, and one of the most reliable of these facts is that the average person
doesn’t see herself as average. Most students see themselves as more intelligent
than the average student,
26 most business managers see themselves as more
competent than the average business manager,
27 and most football players see
themselves as having better “football sense” than their teammates.
28 Ninety
percent of motorists consider themselves to be safer-than-average drivers,
29 and
94 percent of college professors consider themselves to be better-than-average
teachers.
30
Ironically, the bias toward seeing ourselves as better than average
causes us to see ourselves as less biased than average too.
31 As one research
team concluded, “Most of us appear to believe that we are more athletic,
intelligent, organized, ethical, logical, interesting, fair-minded, and healthy—not
to mention more attractive—than the average person.”
32
This tendency to think of ourselves as better than others is not necessarily a
manifestation of our unfettered narcissism but may instead be an instance of a
more general tendency to think of ourselves as different from others—often for
better but sometimes for worse. When people are asked about generosity, they
claim to perform a greater number of generous acts than others do; but when
they are asked about selfishness, they claim to perform a greater number of
selfish acts than others do.
33 When people are asked about their ability to
perform an easy task, such as driving a car or riding a bike, they rate themselves
as better than others; but when they are asked about their ability to perform a
difficult task, such as juggling or playing chess, they rate themselves as worse
than others.
34 We don’t always see ourselves as superior, but we almost always
see ourselves as unique. Even when we do precisely what others do, we tend to
think that we’re doing it for unique reasons. For instance, we tend to attribute
other people’s choices to features of the chooser (“Phil picked this class because
he’s one of those literary types”), but we tend to attribute our own choices to
features of the options (“But I picked it because it was easier than
economics”).
35 We recognize that our decisions are influenced by social norms
(“I was too embarrassed to raise my hand in class even though I was terribly
confused”), but fail to recognize that others’ decisions were similarly influenced
(“No one else raised a hand because no one else was as confused as I was”).
36
We know that our choices sometimes reflect our aversions (“I voted for Kerry
because I couldn’t stand Bush”), but we assume that other people’s choices
reflect their appetites (“If Rebecca voted for Kerry, then she must have liked
him”).
37 The list of differences is long but the conclusion to be drawn from it is
short: The self considers itself to be a very special person.
38
What makes us think we’re so darned special? Three things, at least. First,
even if we aren’t special, the way we know ourselves is. We are the only people
in the world whom we can know from the inside. We experience our own
thoughts and feelings but must infer that other people are experiencing theirs.
We all trust that behind those eyes and inside those skulls, our friends and
neighbors are having subjective experiences very much like our own, but that
trust is an article of faith and not the palpable, self-evident truth that our own
subjective experiences constitute. There is a difference between making love and
reading about it, and it is the same difference that distinguishes our knowledge
of our own mental lives from our knowledge of everyone else’s. Because we
know ourselves and others by such different means, we gather very different
kinds and amounts of information. In every waking moment we monitor the
steady stream of thoughts and feelings that runs through our heads, but we only
monitor other people’s words and deeds, and only when they are in our
company. One reason why we seem so special, then, is that we learn about
ourselves in such a special way.
The second reason is that we enjoy thinking of ourselves as special. Most of
us want to fit in well with our peers, but we don’t want to fit in too well.
39 We
prize our unique identities, and research shows that when people are made to feel
too similar to others, their moods quickly sour and they try to distance and
distinguish themselves in a variety of ways.
40
If you’ve ever shown up at a party
and found someone else wearing exactly the same dress or necktie that you were
wearing, then you know how unsettling it is to share the room with an unwanted
twin whose presence temporarily diminishes your sense of individuality.
Because we value our uniqueness, it isn’t surprising that we tend to overestimate
it.
The third reason why we tend to overestimate our uniqueness is that we tend
to overestimate everyone’s uniqueness—that is, we tend to think of people as
more different from one another than they actually are. Let’s face it: All people
are similar in some ways and different in others. The psychologists, biologists,
economists, and sociologists who are searching for universal laws of human
behavior naturally care about the similarities, but the rest of us care mainly about
the differences. Social life involves selecting particular individuals to be our
sexual partners, business partners, bowling partners, and more. That task
requires that we focus on the things that distinguish one person from another and
not on the things that all people share, which is why personal ads are much more
likely to mention the advertiser’s love of ballet than his love of oxygen. A
penchant for respiration explains a great deal about human behavior—for
example, why people live on land, become ill at high altitudes, have lungs, resist
suffocation, love trees, and so on. It surely explains more than does a person’s
penchant for ballet. But it does nothing to distinguish one person from another,
and thus for ordinary folks who are in the ordinary business of selecting others
for commerce, conversation, or copulation, the penchant for air is stunningly
irrelevant. Individual similarities are vast, but we don’t care much about them
because they don’t help us do what we are here on earth to do, namely,
distinguish Jack from Jill and Jill from Jennifer. As such, these individual
similarities are an inconspicuous backdrop against which a small number of
relatively minor individual differences stand out in bold relief.
Because we spend so much time searching for, attending to, thinking about,
and remembering these differences, we tend to overestimate their magnitude and
frequency, and thus end up thinking of people as more varied than they actually
are. If you spent all day sorting grapes into different shapes, colors, and kinds,
you’d become one of those annoying grapeophiles who talks endlessly about the
nuances of flavor and the permutations of texture. You’d come to think of grapes
as infinitely varied, and you’d forget that almost all of the really important
information about a grape can be deduced from the simple fact of its grapehood.
Our belief in the variability of others and in the uniqueness of the self is
especially powerful when it comes to emotion.
41 Because we can feel our own
emotions but must infer the emotions of others by watching their faces and
listening to their voices, we often have the impression that others don’t
experience the same intensity of emotion that we do, which is why we expect
others to recognize our feelings even when we can’t recognize theirs.
42 This
sense of emotional uniqueness starts early. When kindergarteners are asked how
they and others would feel in a variety of situations, they expect to experience
unique emotions (“Billy would be sad but I wouldn’t”) and they provide unique
reasons for experiencing them (“I’d tell myself that the hamster was in heaven,
but Billy would just cry”).
43 When adults make these same kinds of predictions,
they do just the same thing.
44
Our mythical belief in the variability and uniqueness of individuals is the main
reason why we refuse to use others as surrogates. After all, surrogation is only
useful when we can count on a surrogate to react to an event roughly as we
would, and if we believe that people’s emotional reactions are more varied than
they actually are, then surrogation will seem less useful to us than it actually is.
The irony, of course, is that surrogation is a cheap and effective way to predict
one’s future emotions, but because we don’t realize just how similar we all are,
we reject this reliable method and rely instead on our imaginations, as flawed
and fallible as they may be.
Onward
Despite its watery connotation, the word hogwash refers to the feeding—and not
to the bathing—of pigs. Hogwash is something that pigs eat, that pigs like, and
that pigs need. Farmers provide pigs with hogwash because without it, pigs get
grumpy. The word hogwash also refers to the falsehoods people tell one another.
Like the hogwash that farmers feed their pigs, the hogwash that our friends and
teachers and parents feed us is meant to make us happy; but unlike hogwash of
the porcine variety, human hogwash does not always achieve its end. As we
have seen, ideas can flourish if they preserve the social systems that allow them
to be transmitted. Because individuals don’t usually feel that it is their personal
duty to preserve social systems, these ideas must disguise themselves as
prescriptions for individual happiness. We might expect that after spending some
time in the world, our experiences would debunk these ideas, but it doesn’t
always work that way. To learn from our experience we must remember it, and
for a variety of reasons, memory is a faithless friend. Practice and coaching get
us out of our diapers and into our britches, but they are not enough to get us out
of our presents and into our futures. What’s so ironic about this predicament is
that the information we need to make accurate predictions of our emotional
futures is right under our noses, but we don’t seem to recognize its aroma. It
doesn’t always make sense to heed what people tell us when they communicate
their beliefs about happiness, but it does make sense to observe how happy they
are in different circumstances. Alas, we think of ourselves as unique entities—
minds unlike any others—and thus we often reject the lessons that the emotional
experience of others has to teach us.
AFTERWORD
My mind presageth happy gain and conquest.
Shakespeare, King Henry VI, Part III
MOST OF US MAKE at least three important decisions in our lives: where to live,
what to do, and with whom to do it. We choose our towns and our
neighborhoods, we choose our jobs and our hobbies, we choose our spouses and
our friends. Making these decisions is such a natural part of adulthood that it is
easy to forget that we are among the first human beings to make them. For most
of recorded history, people lived where they were born, did what their parents
had done, and associated with those who were doing the same. Millers milled,
Smiths smithed, and little Smiths and little Millers married whom and when they
were told. Social structures (such as religions and castes) and physical structures
(such as mountains and oceans) were the great dictators that determined how,
where, and with whom people would spend their lives, which left most folks
with little to decide for themselves. But the agricultural, industrial, and
technological revolutions changed all that, and the resulting explosion of
personal liberty has created a bewildering array of options, alternatives, choices,
and decisions that our ancestors never faced. For the very first time, our
happiness is in our hands.
How are we to make these choices? In 1738, a Dutch polymath named Daniel
Bernoulli claimed he had the answer. He suggested that the wisdom of any
decision could be calculated by multiplying the probability that the decision will
give us what we want by the utility of getting what we want. By utility, Bernoulli
meant something like goodness or pleasure.
1 The first part of Bernoulli’s
prescription is fairly easy to follow because in most circumstances we can
roughly estimate the odds that our choices will get us where we want to be. How
likely is it that you’ll be promoted to general manager if you take the job at
IBM? How likely is it that you’ll spend your weekends at the beach if you move
to St. Petersburg? How likely is it that you’ll have to sell your motorcycle if you
marry Eloise? Calculating such odds is relatively straightforward stuff, which is
why insurance companies get rich by doing little more than estimating the
likelihood that your house will burn down, your car will be stolen, and your life
will end early. With a little detective work, a pencil, and a good eraser, we can
usually estimate—at least roughly—the probability that a choice will give us
what we desire.
The problem is that we cannot easily estimate how we’ll feel when we get it.
Bernoulli’s brilliance lay not in his mathematics but in his psychology—in his
realization that what we objectively get (wealth) is not the same as what we
subjectively experience when we get it (utility). Wealth may be measured by
counting dollars, but utility must be measured by counting how much goodness
those dollars buy.
2 Wealth doesn’t matter; utility does. We don’t care about
money or promotions or beach vacations per se; we care about the goodness or
pleasure that these forms of wealth may (or may not) induce. Wise choices are
those that maximize our pleasure, not our dollars, and if we are to have any hope
of choosing wisely, then we must correctly anticipate how much pleasure those
dollars will buy us. Bernoulli knew that it was much easier to predict how much
wealth a choice might produce than how much utility a choice might produce, so
he devised a simple conversion formula that he hoped would allow anyone to
translate estimates of the former into estimates of the latter. He suggested that
each successive dollar provides a little less pleasure than the one before it, and
that a person can therefore calculate the pleasure they will derive from a dollar
simply by correcting for the number of dollars they already have.
The determination of the value of an item must not be based on its price,
but rather on the utility it yields. The price of the item is dependent only on
the thing itself and is equal for everyone; the utility, however, is dependent
on the particular circumstances of the person making the estimate. Thus
there is no doubt that a gain of one thousand ducats is more significant to a
pauper than to a rich man though both gain the same amount.
3
Bernoulli correctly realized that people are sensitive to relative rather than
absolute magnitudes, and his formula was meant to take this basic psychological
truth into account. But he also knew that translating wealth into utility was not as
simple as he’d made it out to be, and that there were other psychological truths
that his formula ignored.
Although a poor man generally obtains more utility than does a rich man
from an equal gain, it is nevertheless conceivable, for example, that a rich
prisoner who possesses two thousand ducats but needs two thousand ducats
more to repurchase his freedom, will place a higher value on a gain of two
thousand ducats than does another man who has less money than he.
Though innumerable examples of this kind may be constructed, they
represent exceedingly rare exceptions.
4
It was a good try. Bernoulli was right in thinking that the hundredth dollar (or
kiss or doughnut or romp in the meadow) generally does not make us as happy
as the first one did, but he was wrong in thinking that this was the only thing that
distinguished wealth from utility and hence the only thing one must correct for
when predicting utility from wealth. As it turns out, the “innumerable
exceptions” that Bernoulli swept under the rug are not exceedingly rare. There
are many things other than the size of a person’s bank account that influence
how much utility they derive from the next dollar. For instance, people often
value things more after they own them than before, they often value things more
when they are imminent than distant, they are often hurt more by small losses
than by large ones, they often imagine that the pain of losing something is
greater than the pleasure of getting it, and so on—and on and on and on. The
myriad phenomena with which this book has been concerned are just some of
the not-so-rare exceptions that make Bernoulli’s principle a beautiful, useless
abstraction. Yes, we should make choices by multiplying probabilities and
utilities, but how can we possibly do this if we can’t estimate those utilities
beforehand? The same objective circumstances give rise to a remarkably wide
variety of subjective experiences, and thus it is very difficult to predict our
subjective experiences from foreknowledge of our objective circumstances. The
sad fact is that converting wealth to utility—that is, predicting how we will feel
from knowledge of what we will get—isn’t very much like converting meters to
yards or German to Japanese. The simple, lawful relationships that bind numbers
to numbers and words to words do not bind objective events to emotional
experiences.
So what’s a chooser to do? Without a formula for predicting utility, we tend to
do what only our species does: imagine. Our brains have a unique structure that
allows us to mentally transport ourselves into future circumstances and then ask
ourselves how it feels to be there. Rather than calculating utilities with
mathematical precision, we simply step into tomorrow’s shoes and see how well
they fit. Our ability to project ourselves forward in time and experience events
before they happen enables us to learn from mistakes without making them and
to evaluate actions without taking them. If nature has given us a greater gift, no
one has named it. And yet, as impressive as it is, our ability to simulate future
selves and future circumstances is by no means perfect. When we imagine future
circumstances, we fill in details that won’t really come to pass and leave out
details that will. When we imagine future feelings, we find it impossible to
ignore what we are feeling now and impossible to recognize how we will think
about the things that happen later. Daniel Bernoulli dreamed of a world in which
a simple formula would allow us all to determine our futures with perspicacity
and foresight. But foresight is a fragile talent that often leaves us squinting,
straining to see what it would be like to have this, go there, or do that. There is
no simple formula for finding happiness. But if our great big brains do not allow
us to go surefootedly into our futures, they at least allow us to understand what
makes us stumble.
NOTES
Foreword
1. The notes in this book contain references to the scientific research that supports the claims I make in
the text. Occasionally they contain some extra information that may be of interest but that is not essential to
the argument. If you don’t care about sources, aren’t interested in nonessentials, and are annoyed by books
that make you flip back and forth all the time, then be assured that the only important note in the book is
this one.
Chapter 1: Journey to Elsewhen
1. W. A. Roberts, “Are Animals Stuck in Time?” Psychological Bulletin 128: 473–89 (2002).
2. D. Dennett, Kinds of Minds. (New York: Basic Books, 1996).
3. M. M. Haith, “The Development of Future Thinking as Essential for the Emergence of Skill in
Planning,” in The Developmental Psychology of Planning: Why, How, and When Do We Plan?, ed. S. L.
Friedman and E. K. Scholnick (Mahwah, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum, 1997), 25–42.
4. E. Bates, J. Elman, and P. Li, “Language In, On, and About Time,” in The Development of Future
Oriented Processes, ed. M. M. Haith et al. (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1994).
5. B. M. Hood et al., “Gravity Biases in a Nonhuman Primate?” Developmental Science 2: 35–41 (1999).
See also D. A. Washburn and D. M. Rumbaugh, “Comparative Assessment of Psychomotor Performance:
Target Prediction by Humans and Macaques (Macaca mulatta),” Journal of Experimental Psychology:
General 121: 305–12 (1992).
6. L. M. Oakes and L. B. Cohen, “Infant Perception of a Causal Event,” Cognitive Development 5: 193–
207 (1990). See also N. Wentworth and M. M. Haith, “Event-Specific Expectations of 2- and 3-Month-Old
Infants,” Developmental Psychology 28: 842–50 (1992).
7. C. M. Atance and D. K. O’Neill, “Planning in 3-Year-Olds: A Reflection of the Future Self?” in The
Self in Time: Developmental Perspectives, ed. C. Moore and K. Lemmon (Mahwah, N.J.: Lawrence
Erlbaum, 2001); and J. B. Benson, “The Development of Planning: It’s About Time,” in Friedman and
Scholnick, Developmental Psychology of Planning.
8. Although children begin to talk about the future at about two years, they don’t seem to have a full
understanding of it until about age four. See D. J. Povinelli and B. B. Simon, “Young Children’s
Understanding of Briefly Versus Extremely Delayed Images of the Self: Emergence of the
Autobiographical Stance,” Developmental Psychology 34: 188–94 (1998); and K. Nelson, “Finding One’s
Self in Time,” in The Self Across Psychology: Self-Recognition, Self-Awareness, and the Self Concept, ed. J.
G. Snodgrass and R. L. Thompson (New York: New York Academy of Sciences, 1997), 103–16.
9. C. A. Banyas, “Evolution and Phylogenetic History of the Frontal Lobes,” in The Human Frontal
Lobes, ed. B. L. Miller and J. L. Cummings (New York: Guilford Press, 1999), 83–106.
10. Phineas apparently took the rod with him wherever he went for the rest of his life and would probably
be pleased that both it and his skull ended up on permanent display at Harvard’s Warren Anthropological
Museum.
11. Modern authors cite the Gage case as evidence for the importance of the frontal lobe, but this is not
the way people thought about the incident when it happened. See M. B. Macmillan, “A Wonderful Journey
Through Skull and Brains: The Travels of Mr. Gage’s Tamping Iron,” Brain and Cognition 5: 67–107
(1986).
12. M. B. Macmillan, “Phineas Gage’s Contribution to Brain Surgery,” Journal of the History of the
Neurosciences 5: 56–77 (1996).
13. S. M. Weingarten, “Psychosurgery,” in Miller and Cummings, Human Frontal Lobes, 446–60.
14. D. R. Weinberger et al., “Neural Mechanisms of Future-Oriented Processes,” in Haith et al.,
Development of Future Oriented Processes, 221–42.
15. J. M. Fuster, The Prefrontal Cortex: Anatomy, Physiology, and Neuropsychology of the Frontal Lobe
(New York: Lippincott-Raven, 1997), 160–61.
16. A. K. MacLeod and M. L. Cropley, “Anxiety, Depression, and the Anticipation of Future Positive
and Negative Experiences,” Journal of Abnormal Psychology 105: 286–89 (1996).
17. M. A. Wheeler, D. T. Stuss, and E. Tulving, “Toward a General Theory of Episodic Memory: The
Frontal Lobes and Autonoetic Consciousness,” Psychological Bulletin 121: 331–54 (1997).
18. F. T. Melges, “Identity and Temporal Perspective,” in Cognitive Models of Psychological Time, ed.
R. A. Block (Hillsdale, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum, 1990), 255–66.
19. P. Faglioni, “The Frontal Lobes,” in The Handbook of Clinical and Experimental Neuropsychology,
ed. G. Denes and L. Pizzamiglio (East Sussex, U.K.: Psychology Press, 1999), 525–69.
20. J. M. Fuster, “Cognitive Functions of the Frontal Lobes,” in Miller and Cummings, Human Frontal
Lobes, 187–95.
21. E. Tulving, “Memory and Consciousness,” Canadian Psychology 26: 1–12 (1985). The same case is
described extensively under the pseudonym “K.C.” in E. Tulving et al., “Priming of Semantic
Autobiographical Knowledge: A Case Study of Retrograde Amnesia,” Brain and Cognition 8: 3–20 (1988).
22. Tulving, “Memory and Consciousness.”
23. R. Dass, Be Here Now (New York: Crown, 1971).
24. L. A. Jason et al., “Time Orientation: Past, Present, and Future Perceptions,” Psychological Reports
64: 1199–1205 (1989).
25. E. Klinger and W. M. Cox, “Dimensions of Thought Flow in Everyday Life,” Imagination,
Cognition, and Personality 72: 105–28 (1987–88); and E. Klinger, “On Living Tomorrow Today: The
Quality of Inner Life as a Function of Goal Expectations,” in Psychology of Future Orientation, ed. Z.
Zaleski (Lublin, Poland: Towarzystwo Naukowe KUL, 1994), 97–106.
26. J. L. Singer, Daydreaming and Fantasy (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1981); E. Klinger,
Daydreaming: Using Waking Fantasy and Imagery for Self-Knowledge and Creativity (Los Angeles:
Tarcher, 1990); G. Oettingen, Psychologie des Zukunftdenkens [On the Psychology of Future Thought]
(Göttingen, Germany: Hogrefe, 1997).
27. G. F. Loewenstein and D. Prelec, “Preferences for Sequences of Outcomes,” Psychological Review
100: 91–108 (1993). See also G. Loewenstein, “Anticipation and the Valuation of Delayed Consumption,”
Economy Journal 97: 666–84 (1987); and J. Elster and G. F. Loewenstein, “Utility from Memory and
Anticipation,” in Choice Over Time, ed. G. F. Loewenstein and J. Elster (New York: Russell Sage
Foundation, 1992), 213–34.
28. G. Oettingen and D. Mayer, “The Motivating Function of Thinking About the Future: Expectations
Versus Fantasies,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 83: 1198–1212 (2002).
29. A. Tversky and D. Kahneman, “Availability: A Heuristic for Judgment Frequency and Probability,”
Cognitive Psychology 5: 207–32 (1973).
30. N. Weinstein, “Unrealistic Optimism About Future Life Events,” Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology 39: 806–20 (1980).
31. P. Brickman, D. Coates, and R. J. Janoff-Bulman, “Lottery Winners and Accident Victims: Is
Happiness Relative?,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 36: 917–27 (1978).
32. E. C. Chang, K. Asakawa, and L. J. Sanna, “Cultural Variations in Optimistic and Pessimistic Bias:
Do Easterners Really Expect the Worst and Westerners Really Expect the Best When Predicting Future Life
Events?” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 81: 476–91 (2001).
33. J. M. Burger and M. L. Palmer, “Changes in and Generalization of Unrealistic Optimism Following
Experiences with Stressful Events: Reactions to the 1989 California Earthquake,” Personality and Social
Psychology Bulletin 18: 39–43 (1992).
34. H. E. Stiegelis et al., “Cognitive Adaptation: A Comparison of Cancer Patients and Healthy
References,” British Journal of Health Psychology 8: 303–18 (2003).
35. A. Arntz, M. Van Eck, and P. J. de Jong, “Unpredictable Sudden Increases in Intensity of Pain and
Acquired Fear,” Journal of Psychophysiology 6: 54–64 (1992).
36. Speaking of electric shock, this is probably a good time to mention that psychological experiments
such as these are always performed according to the strict ethical guidelines of the American Psychological
Association and must be approved by university committees before they are implemented. Those who
participate do so voluntarily, are always fully informed of any risks the study may pose to their health or
happiness, and are given the opportunity to withdraw at any time without fear of penalty. If people are
given any false information in the course of an experiment, they are told the truth when the experiment is
over. In short, we’re really very nice people.
37. M. Miceli and C. Castelfranchi, “The Mind and the Future: The (Negative) Power of Expectations,”
Theory and Psychology 12: 335–66 (2002).
38. J. N. Norem, “Pessimism: Accentuating the Positive Possibilities,” in Virtue, Vice, and Personality:
The Complexity of Behavior, ed. E. C. Chang and L. J. Sanna (Washington, D.C.: American Psychological
Association, 2003), 91–104; J. K. Norem and N. Cantor, “Defensive Pessimism: Harnessing Anxiety as
Motivation,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 51: 1208–17 (1986).
39. A. Bandura, “Self-Efficacy: Toward a Unifying Theory of Behavioral Change,” Psychological
Review 84: 191–215 (1977); and A. Bandura, “Self-Efficacy: Mechanism in Human Agency,” American
Psychologist 37: 122–47 (1982).
40. M. E. P. Seligman, Helplessness: On Depression, Development, and Death (San Francisco: Freeman,
1975).
41. E. Langer and J. Rodin, “The Effect of Choice and Enhanced Personal Responsibility for the Aged: A
Field Experiment in an Institutional Setting,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 34: 191–98
(1976); and J. Rodin and E. J. Langer, “Long-Term Effects of a Control-Relevant Intervention with the
Institutional Aged,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 35: 897–902 (1977).
42. R. Schulz and B. H. Hanusa, “Long-Term Effects of Control and Predictability-Enhancing
Interventions: Findings and Ethical Issues,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 36: 1202–12
(1978).
43. E. J. Langer, “The Illusion of Control,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 32: 311–28
(1975).
44. Ibid.
45. D. S. Dunn and T. D. Wilson, “When the Stakes Are High: A Limit to the Illusion of Control Effect,”
Social Cognition 8: 305–23 (1991).
46. L. H. Strickland, R. J. Lewicki, and A. M. Katz, “Temporal Orientation and Perceived Control as
Determinants of Risk Taking,” Journal of Experimental Social Psychology 2: 143–51 (1966).
47. Dunn and Wilson, “When the Stakes Are High.”
48. S. Gollin et al., “The Illusion of Control Among Depressed Patients,” Journal of Abnormal
Psychology 88: 454–57 (1979).
49. L. B. Alloy and L. Y. Abramson, “Judgment of Contingency in Depressed and Nondepressed
Students: Sadder but Wiser?” Journal of Experimental Psychology: General 108: 441–85 (1979). For a
contrary view, see D. Dunning and A. L. Story, “Depression, Realism and the Overconfidence Effect: Are
the Sadder Wiser When Predicting Future Actions and Events?” Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology 61: 521–32 (1991); and R. M. Msetfi et al., “Depressive Realism and Outcome Density Bias in
Contingency Judgments: The Effect of the Context and Intertrial Interval,” Journal of Experimental
Psychology: General 134: 10–22 (2005).
50. S. E. Taylor and J. D. Brown, “Illusion and Well-Being: A Social-Psychological Perspective on
Mental Health,” Psychological Bulletin 103: 193–210 (1988).
Chapter 2: The View from in Here
1. N. L. Segal, Entwined Lives: Twins and What They Tell Us About Human Behavior (New York:
Dutton, 1999).
2. N. Angier, “Joined for Life, and Living Life to the Full,” New York Times, 23 December 1997, F1.
3. A. D. Dreger, “The Limits of Individuality: Ritual and Sacrifice in the Lives and Medical Treatment of
Conjoined Twins,” Studies in History and Philosophy of Biological and Biomedical Sciences 29: 1–29
(1998).
4. Ibid. Since this paper was published, at least one pair of adult conjoined twins sought separation and
died during surgery. “A Lost Surgical Gamble,” New York Times, 9 July 2003, 20.
5. J. R. Searle, Mind, Language, and Society: Philosophy in the Real World (New York: Basic Books,
1998).
6. Subjective states can be defined only in terms of their objective antecedents or other subjective states,
but the same is true for physical objects. If we were not allowed to define a physical object (Marshmallow
Fluf) in terms of the subjective states it brought about (“It’s soft, gooey, and sweet”) or in terms of any
other physical object (“It’s made from corn syrup, sugar syrup, vanilla flavoring, and egg whites”), we
could not define it. All definitions are achieved by comparing the thing we wish to define with things that
inhabit the same ontological category (e.g., physical things to physical things) or by mapping them onto
things in a different ontological category (e.g., physical things to subjective states). No one has yet
discovered a third way.
7. R. D. Lane et al., “Neuroanatomical Correlates of Pleasant and Unpleasant Emotion,”
Neuropsychologia 35: 1437–44 (1997).
8. C. Osgood, G. J. Suci, and P. H. Tannenbaum, The Measurement of Meaning (Urbana: University of
Illinois Press, 1957). The typical finding is that words differ on three dimensions: evaluation (good or bad);
activity (active or passive); and potency (strong or weak). So psychologists talk about a word’s E-ness, Aness, and P-ness. Say these terms aloud and then tell me that scientists have no sense of humor.
9. T. Nagel, “What Is It Like to Be a Bat?” Philosophical Review 83: 435–50 (1974).
10. See A. Pope, Essay on Man, Epistle 4 (1744), in The Complete Poetical Works of Alexander Pope,
ed. H. W. Boynton (New York: Houghton Mifflin, 1903).
11. S. Freud, Civilization and Its Discontents, vol. 1 of The Standard Edition of the Complete
Psychological Works of Sigmund Freud (1930; London: Hogarth Press and Institute of Psychoanalysis,
1953), 75–76.
12. B. Pascal, “Pensees,” in Pensees, ed. W. F. Trotter (1660; New York: Dutton, 1908).
13. R. Nozick, The Examined Life (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1989), 102.
14. J. S. Mill, “Utilitarianism” (1863), in On Liberty, the Subjection of Women and Utilitarianism, in The
Basic Writings of John Stuart Mill, ed. D. E. Miller (New York: Modern Library, 2002).
15. R. Nozick, Anarchy, State, and Utopia (New York: Basic Books, 1974).
16. Nozick, The Examined Life, p. 111. Nozick’s “happiness machine” problem is popular among
academics, who generally fail to consider three things. First, who says that no one would want to be hooked
up? The world is full of people who want happiness and don’t care one bit about whether it is “well
deserved.” Second, those who claim that they would not agree to be hooked up may already be hooked up.
After all, the deal is that you forget your previous decision. Third, no one can really answer this question
because it requires them to imagine a future state in which they do not know the very thing they are
currently contemplating. See E. B. Royzman, K. W. Cassidy, and J. Baron, “ ‘I Know, You Know’:
Epistemic Egocentrism in Children and Adults,” Review of General Psychology 7: 38–65 (2003).
17. D. M. MacMahon, “From the Happiness of Virtue to the Virtue of Happiness: 400 BC–AD 1780,”
Daedalus: Journal of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences 133: 5–17 (2004).
18. Ibid.
19. For some discussions of the distinction between moral and emotional happiness, all of which take a
position contrary to mine, see D. W. Hudson, Happiness and the Limits of Satisfaction (London: Rowman
& Littlefield, 1996); M. Kingwell, Better Living: In Pursuit of Happiness from Plato to Prozac (Toronto:
Viking, 1998); and E. Telfer, Happiness (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1980).
20. N. Block, “Begging the Question Against Phenomenal Consciousness,” Behavioral and Brain
Sciences 15: 205–6 (1992).
21. J. W. Schooler and T. Y. Engstler-Schooler, “Verbal Overshadowing of Visual Memories: Some
Things Are Better Left Unsaid,” Cognitive Psychology 22: 36–71 (1990.)
22. G. W. McConkie and D. Zola, “Is Visual Information Integrated in Successive Fixations in
Reading?,” Perception and Psychophysics 25: 221–24 (1979).
23. D. J. Simons and D. T. Levin, “Change Blindness,” Trends in Cognitive Sciences 1: 261–67 (1997).
24. M. R. Beck, B. L. Angelone, and D. T. Levin, “Knowledge About the Probability of Change Affects
Change Detection Performance,” Journal of Experimental Psychology: Human Perception and
Performance 30: 778–91 (2004).
25. D. J. Simons and D. T. Levin, “Failure to Detect Changes to People in a Real-World Interaction,”
Psychonomic Bulletin and Review 5: 644–49 (1998).
26. R. A. Rensink, J. K. O’Regan, and J. J. Clark, “To See or Not to See: The Need for Attention to
Perceive Changes in Scenes,” Psychological Science 8: 368–73 (1997).
27. “Hats Off to the Amazing Hondo,” www.hondomagic.com/html/a_little_magic.htm.
28. B. Fischoff, “Perceived Informativeness of Facts,” Journal of Experimental Psychology: Human
Perception and Performance 3: 349–58 (1977).
29. A. Parducci, Happiness, Pleasure, and Judgment: The Contextual Theory and Its Applications
(Mahwah, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum, 1995).
30. E. Shackleton, South (1959; New York: Carroll & Graf, 1998), 192.
Chapter 3: Outside Looking In
1. J. LeDoux, The Emotional Brain: The Mysterious Underpinnings of Emotional Life (New York: Simon
& Schuster, 1996).
2. R. B. Zajonc, “Feeling and Thinking: Preferences Need No Inferences,” American Psychologist 35:
151–75 (1980); R. B. Zajonc, “On the Primacy of Affect,” American Psychologist 39: 117–23 (1984); and
“Emotions,” in The Handbook of Social Psychology, ed. D. T. Gilbert, S. T. Fiske, and G. Lindzey, 4th ed.,
vol. 1 (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1998), 591–632.
3. S. Schachter and J. Singer, “Cognitive, Social and Physiological Determinants of Emotional State,”
Psychological Review 69: 379–99 (1962).
4. D. G. Dutton and A. P. Aron, “Some Evidence for Heightened Sexual Attraction Under Conditions of
High Anxiety,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 30: 510–17 (1974).
5. It is also interesting to note that the mere act of identifying an emotion can sometimes eliminate it. See
A. R. Hariri, S. Y. Bookheimer, and J. C. Mazziotta, “Modulating Emotional Response: Effects of a
Neocortical Network on the Limbic System,” NeuroReport 11: 43–48 (2000); and M. D. Lieberman et al.,
“Two Captains, One Ship: A Social Cognitive Neuroscience Approach to Disrupting Automatic Affective
Processes” (unpublished manuscript, UCLA, 2003).
6. G. Greene, The End of the Affair (New York: Viking Press, 1951), 29.
7. R. A. Dienstbier and P. C. Munter, “Cheating as a Function of the Labeling of Natural Arousal,”
Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 17: 208–13 (1971).
8. M. P. Zanna and J. Cooper, “Dissonance and the Pill: An Attribution Approach to Studying the
Arousal Properties of Dissonance,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 29: 703–9 (1974).
9. D. C. Dennett, Brainstorms: Philosophical Essays on Mind and Psychology (Cambridge, Mass.:
Bradford/MIT Press, 1981), 218.
10. J. W. Schooler, “Re-representing Consciousness: Dissociations Between Consciousness and MetaConsciousness,” Trends in Cognitive Science 6: 339–44 (2002).
11. L. Weiskrantz, Blindsight (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1986).
12. A. Cowey and P. Stoerig, “The Neurobiology of Blindsight,” Trends in Neuroscience 14: 140–45
(1991).
13. E. J. Vanman, M. E. Dawson, and P. A. Brennan, “Affective Reactions in the Blink of an Eye:
Individual Differences in Subjective Experience and Physiological Responses to Emotional Stimuli,”
Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin 24: 994–1005 (1998).
14. R. D. Lane et al., “Is Alexithymia the Emotional Equivalent of Blindsight?” Biological Psychiatry 42:
834–44 (1997).
15. The nineteenth-century economist Francis Edgeworth referred to this device as a hedonimeter. See F.
Y. Edgeworth, Mathematical Psychics: An Essay on the Application of Mathematics to the Moral Sciences
(London: Kegan Paul, 1881).
16. N. Schwarz and F. Strack, “Reports of Subjective Well-Being: Judgmental Processes and Their
Methodological Implications,” in Well-Being: The Foundations of Hedonic Psychology, ed. D. Kahneman,
E. Diener, and N. Schwarz (New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1999), 61–84; D. Kahneman, “Objective
Happiness,” in Well-Being, 3–25.
17. R. J. Larsen and B. L. Fredrickson, “Measurement Issues in Emotion Research,” in Well-Being, 40–
60.
18. M. Minsky, The Society of Mind (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1985); W. G. Lycan, “Homuncular
Functionalism Meets PDP,” in Philosophy and Connectionist Theory, ed. W. Ramsey, S. P. Stich, and D. E.
Rumelhart (Mahwah, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum, 1991), 259–86.
19. O. Jowett, Plato: Protagoras, facsimile ed. (New York: Prentice Hall, 1956).
Chapter 4: In the Blind Spot of the Mind’s Eye
1. R. O. Boyer and H. M. Morais, Labor’s Untold Story (New York: Cameron, 1955); P. Avrich, The
Haymarket Tragedy (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1984).
2. E. Brayer, George Eastman: A Biography (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996).
3. R. Karniol and M. Ross, “The Motivational Impact of Temporal Focus: Thinking About the Future and
the Past,” Annual Review of Psychology 47: 593–620 (1996); and B. A. Mellers, “Choice and the Relative
Pleasure of Consequences,” Psychological Bulletin 126: 910–24 (2000).
4. D. L. Schacter, Searching for Memory: The Brain, the Mind and the Past (New York: Basic Books,
1996).
5. E. F. Loftus, D. G. Miller, and H. J. Burns, “Semantic Integration of Verbal Information into Visual
Memory,” Journal of Experimental Psychology: Human Learning and Memory 4: 19–31 (1978).
6. E. F. Loftus, “When a Lie Becomes Memory’s Truth: Memory Distortion After Exposure to
Misinformation,” Current Directions in Psychological Sciences 1: 121–23 (1992). For an opposing view,
see M. S. Zaragoza, M. McCloskey, and M. Jamis, “Misleading Postevent Information and Recall of the
Original Event: Further Evidence Against the Memory Impairment Hypothesis,” Journal of Experimental
Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition 13: 36–44 (1987).
7. M. K. Johnson and S. J. Sherman, “Constructing and Reconstructing the Past and the Future in the
Present,” in Handbook of Motivation and Cognition: Foundations of Social Behavior, ed. E. T. Higgins and
R. M. Sorrentino, vol. 2 (New York: Guilford Press, 1990), 482–526; and M. K. Johnson and C. L. Raye,
“Reality Monitoring,” Psychological Review 88: 67–85 (1981).
8. J. Deese, “On the Predicted Occurrence of Particular Verbal Intrusions in Immediate Recall,” Journal
of Experimental Psychology 58: 17–22 (1959).
9. H. L. Roediger and K. B. McDermott, “Creating False Memories: Remembering Words Not Presented
in Lists,” Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory, and Cognition 21: 803–14 (1995).
10. K. B. McDermott and H. L. Roediger, “Attempting to Avoid Illusory Memories: Robust False
Recognition of Associates Persists Under Conditions of Explicit Warnings and Immediate Testing,” Journal
of Memory and Language 39: 508–20 (1998).
11. R. Warren, “Perceptual Restoration of Missing Speech Sounds,” Science 167: 392–93 (1970).
12. A. G. Samuel, “A Further Examination of Attentional Effects in the Phonemic Restoration Illusion,”
Quarterly Journal of Experimental Psychology 43A: 679–99 (1991).
13. R. Warren, “Perceptual Restoration of Obliterated Sounds,” Psychological Bulletin 96: 371–83
(1984).
14. L. F. Baum, The Wonderful Wizard of Oz (New York: G. M. Hill, 1900), 113–19.
15. J. Locke, Book IV, An Essay Concerning Human Understanding, vol. 2 (1690; New York: Dover,
1959).
16. I. Kant, Critique of Pure Reason, trans. N. K. Smith (1781; New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1965), 93.
17. W. Durant, The Story of Philosophy (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1926).
18. A. Gopnik and J. W. Astington, “Children’s Understanding of Representational Change and Its
Relation to the Understanding of False Beliefs and the Appearance-Reality Distinction,” Child Development
59: 26–37 (1988); and H. Wimmer and J. Perner, “Beliefs About Beliefs: Representation and Constraining
Function of Wrong Beliefs in Young Children’s Understanding of Deception,” Cognition 13: 103–28
(1983).
19. J. Piaget, The Child’s Conception of the World (London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1929), 166.
20. B. Keysar et al., “Taking Perspective in Conversation: The Role of Mutual Knowledge in
Comprehension,” Psychological Science 11: 32–38 (2000).
21. D. T. Gilbert, “How Mental Systems Believe,” American Psychologist 46: 107–19 (1991).
22. Interestingly, the ability to do this increases with age but begins to deteriorate in old age. See C.
Ligneau-Hervé and E. Mullet, “Perspective-Taking Judgments Among Young Adults, Middle-Aged, and
Elderly People,” Journal of Experimental Psychology: Applied 11: 53–60 (2005).
23. Piaget, Child’s Conception, 124.
24. G. A. Miller, “Trends and Debates in Cognitive Psychology,” Cognition 10: 215–25 (1981).
25. D. T. Gilbert and T. D. Wilson, “Miswanting: Some Problems in the Forecasting of Future Affective
States,” in Feeling and Thinking: The Role of Affect in Social Cognition, ed. J. Forgas (Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 2000), 178–97.
26. D. Dunning et al., “The Overconfidence Effect in Social Prediction,” Journal of Personality and
Social Psychology 58: 568–81 (1990); and R. Vallone et al., “Overconfident Predictions of Future Actions
and Outcomes by Self and Others,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 58: 582–92 (1990).
27. D. W. Griffin, D. Dunning, and L. Ross, “The Role of Construal Processes in Overconfident
Predictions About the Self and Others,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 59: 1128–39 (1990).
28. Kant, Critique, 93.
Chapter 5: The Hound of Silence
1. A. C. Doyle, “Silver Blaze,” in The Complete Sherlock Holmes (1892; New York: Gramercy, 2002),
149.
2. Ibid.
3. R. S. Sainsbury and H. M. Jenkins, “Feature-Positive Effect in Discrimination Learning,” Proceedings
of the Annual Convention of the American Psychological Association 2: 17–18 (1967).
4. J. P. Newman, W. T. Wolff, and E. Hearst, “The Feature-Positive Effect in Adult Human Subjects,”
Journal of Experimental Psychology: Human Learning and Memory 6: 630–50 (1980).
5. H. M. Jenkins and W. C. Ward, “Judgment of Contingency Between Responses and Outcomes,”
Psychological Monographs 79 (1965); P. C. Wason, “Reasoning About a Rule,” Quarterly Journal of
Experimental Psychology 20: 273–81 (1968); and D. L. Hamilton and R. K. Gifford, “Illusory Correlation
in Interpersonal Perception: A Cognitive Basis of Stereotypic Judgements,” Journal of Experimental Social
Psychology 12: 392–407 (1976). See also J. Crocker, “Judgment of Covariation by Social Perceivers,”
Psychological Bulletin 90: 272–92 (1981); L. B. Alloy and N. Tabachnik, “The Assessment of Covariation
by Humans and Animals: The Joint Influence of Prior Expectations and Current Situational Information,”
Psychological Review 91: 112–49 (1984).
6. F. Bacon, Novum organum, ed. and trans. P. Urbach and J. Gibson (1620; Chicago: Open Court,
1994), 60.
7. Ibid., 57.
8. J. Klayman and Y. W. Ha, “Confirmation, Disconfirmation, and Information in Hypothesis-Testing,”
Psychological Review 94: 211–28 (1987).
9. A. Tversky, “Features of Similarity,” Psychological Review 84: 327–52 (1977).
10. E. Shafir, “Choosing Versus Rejecting: Why Some Options Are Both Better and Worse Than
Others,” Memory & Cognition 21: 546–56 (1993).
11. T. D. Wilson et al., “Focalism: A Source of Durability Bias in Affective Forecasting,” Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology 78: 821–36 (2000).
12. This study was described in a paper that also described some other studies in which people were
asked to make predictions about how they would feel if (a) the space shuttle Columbia exploded and killed
all the astronauts on board, or (b) an American-led war in Iraq deposed Saddam Hussein. The spooky thing
is that the studies were conducted in 1998—five years before either of these events actually took place.
Believe it or not.
13. D. A. Schkade and D. Kahneman, “Does Living in California Make People Happy? A Focusing
Illusion in Judgments of Life Satisfaction,” Psychological Science 9: 340–46 (1998).
14. This may be less true of people who live in cultures that emphasize holistic thinking. See K. C. H.
Lam et al., “Cultural Differences in Affective Forecasting: The Role of Focalism,” Personality and Social
Psychology Bulletin 31: 1296–309 (2005).
15. P. Menzela et al., “The Role of Adaptation to Disability and Disease in Health State Valuation: A
Preliminary Normative Analysis,” Social Science & Medicine 55: 2149–58 (2002).
16. C. Turnbull, The Forest People (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1961), 222.
17. Y. Trope and N. Liberman, “Temporal Construal,” Psychological Review 110: 403–21 (2003).
18. R. R. Vallacher and D. M. Wegner, A Theory of Action Identification (Hillsdale, N.J.: Lawrence
Erlbaum, 1985), 61–88.
19. N. Liberman and Y. Trope, “The Role of Feasibility and Desirability Considerations in Near and
Distant Future Decisions: A Test of Temporal Construal Theory,” Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology 75: 5–18 (1998).
20. M. D. Robinson and G. L. Clore, “Episodic and Semantic Knowledge in Emotional Self-Report:
Evidence for Two Judgment Processes,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 83: 198–215 (2002).
21. T. Eyal et al., “The Pros and Cons of Temporally Near and Distant Action,” Journal of Personality
and Social Psychology 86: 781–95 (2004).
22. I. R. Newby-Clark and M. Ross, “Conceiving the Past and Future,” Personality and Social
Psychology Bulletin 29: 807–18 (2003); and M. Ross and I. R. Newby-Clark, “Construing the Past and
Future,” Social Cognition 16: 133–50 (1998).
23. N. Liberman, M. Sagristano, and Y. Trope, “The Effect of Temporal Distance on Level of Mental
Construal,” Journal of Experimental Social Psychology 38: 523–34 (2002).
24. G. Ainslie, “Specious Reward: A Behavioral Theory of Impulsiveness and Impulse Control,”
Psychological Bulletin 82: 463–96 (1975); and G. Ainslie, Picoeconomics: The Strategic Interaction of
Successive Motivational States Within the Person (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992).
25. The first author to notice this was Plato, who used this fact to make his case for an objective
measurement of happiness: “Do not the same magnitudes appear larger to your sight when near, and smaller
when at a distance? . . . Now suppose happiness to consist in doing or choosing the greater, and in not doing
or in avoiding the less, what would be the saving principle of human life? Would not the art of measuring
be the saving principle; or would the power of appearance? Is not the latter that deceiving art which makes
us wander up and down and take the things at one time of which we repent at another, both in our actions
and in our choice of things great and small?” O. Jowett, Plato: Protagoras, facsimile ed. (New York:
Prentice Hall, 1956).
26. G. Loewenstein, “Anticipation and the Valuation of Delayed Consumption,” Economy Journal 97:
666–84 (1987).
27. S. M. McClure et al., “The Grasshopper and the Ant: Separate Neural Systems Value Immediate and
Delayed Monetary Rewards,” Science 306: 503–7 (2004).
28. Doyle, Complete Sherlock Holmes, 147.
Chapter 6: The Future Is Now
1. Everyone seems sure that Kelvin said this in 1895, but for the life of me I can’t find the original source
to prove it.
2. S. A. Newcomb, Side-Lights on Astronomy (New York: Harper & Brothers, 1906), 355.
3. W. Wright, “Speech to the Aero Club of France,” in The Papers of Wilbur and Orville Wright, ed. M.
McFarland (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1908), 934.
4. A. C. Clarke, Profiles of the Future (New York: Bantam, 1963), 14. By the way, Clarke defines
“elderly” as somewhere between thirty and forty-five. Yikes!
5. G. R. Goethals and R. F. Reckman, “The Perception of Consistency in Attitudes,” Journal of
Experimental Social Psychology 9: 491–501 (1973).
6. C. McFarland and M. Ross, “The Relation Between Current Impressions and Memories of Self and
Dating Partners,” Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin 13: 228–38 (1987).
7. M. A. Safer, L. J. Levine, and A. L. Drapalski, “Distortion in Memory for Emotions: The
Contributions of Personality and Post-Event Knowledge,” Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin 28:
1495–1507 (2002).
8. E. Eich et al., “Memory for Pain: Relation Between Past and Present Pain Intensity,” Pain 23: 375–80
(1985).
9. L. N. Collins et al., “Agreement Between Retrospective Accounts of Substance Use and Earlier
Reported Substance Use,” Applied Psychological Measurement 9: 301–9 (1985); G. B. Markus, “Stability
and Change in Political Attitudes: Observe, Recall, and ‘Explain,’ ” Political Behavior 8: 21–44 (1986); D.
Offer et al., “The Altering of Reported Experiences,” Journal of the American Academy of Child and
Adolescent Psychiatry 39: 735–42 (2000).
10. M. A. Safer, G. A. Bonanno, and N. P. Field, “ ‘It Was Never That Bad’: Biased Recall of Grief and
Long-Term Adjustment to the Death of a Spouse,” Memory 9: 195–204 (2001).
11. For reviews, see M. Ross, “Relation of Implicit Theories to the Construction of Personal Histories,”
Psychological Review 96: 341–57 (1989); L. J. Levine and M. A. Safer, “Sources of Bias in Memory for
Emotions,” Current Directions in Psychological Science 11: 169–73 (2002).
12. L. J. Levine, “Reconstructing Memory for Emotions,” Journal of Experimental Psychology: General
126: 165–77 (1997).
13. G. F. Loewenstein, “Out of Control: Visceral Influences on Behavior,” Organizational Behavior and
Human Decision Processes 65: 272–92 (1996); G. F. Loewenstein, T. O’Donoghue, and M. Rabin,
“Projection Bias in Predicting Future Utility,” Quarterly Journal of Economics 118: 1209–48 (2003); G.
Loewenstein and E. Angner, “Predicting and Indulging Changing Preferences,” in Time and Decision, ed.
G. Loewenstein, D. Read, and R. F. Baumeister (New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 2003), 351–91; L.
van Boven, D. Dunning, and G. F. Loewenstein, “Egocentric Empathy Gaps Between Owners and Buyers:
Misperceptions of the Endowment Effect,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 79: 66–76 (2000).
14. R. E. Nisbett and D. E. Kanouse, “Obesity, Food Deprivation and Supermarket Shopping Behavior,”
Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 12: 289–94 (1969); D. Read and B. van Leeuwen,
“Predicting Hunger: The Effects of Appetite and Delay on Choice,” Organizational Behavior and Human
Decision Processes 76: 189–205 (1998).
15. G. F. Loewenstein, D. Prelec, and C. Shatto, “Hot/Cold Intrapersonal Empathy Gaps and the Underprediction of Curiosity” (unpublished manuscript, Carnegie-Mellon University 1998), cited in G. F.
Loewenstein, “The Psychology of Curiosity: A Review and Reinterpretation,” Psychological Bulletin 116:
75–98 (1994).
16. S. M. Kosslyn et al., “The Role of Area 17 in Visual Imagery: Convergent Evidence from PET and
rTMS,” Science 284: 167–70 (1999).
17. P. K. McGuire, G. M. S. Shah, and R. M. Murray, “Increased Blood Flow in Broca’s Area During
Auditory Hallucinations in Schizophrenia,” Lancet 342: 703–6 (1993).
18. D. J. Kavanagh, J. Andrade, and J. May, “Imaginary Relish and Exquisite Torture: The Elaborated
Intrusion Theory of Desire,” Psychological Review 112: 446–67 (2005).
19. A. K. Anderson and E. A. Phelps, “Lesions of the Human Amygdala Impair Enhanced Perception of
Emotionally Salient Events,” Nature 411: 305–9 (2001); E. A. Phelps et al., “Activation of the Left
Amygdala to a Cognitive Representation of Fear,” Nature Neuroscience 4: 437–41 (2001); and H. C.
Breiter et al., “Functional Imaging of Neural Responses to Expectancy and Experience of Monetary Gains
and Losses,” Neuron 30 (2001).
20. As far as I can tell, the word prefeel was first used as a song title on the 1999 album Prize, by Arto
Lindsay. See also C. M. Atance and D. K. O’Neill, “Episodic Future Thinking,” Trends in Cognitive
Sciences 5: 533–39 (2001).
21. T. D. Wilson et al., “Introspecting About Reasons Can Reduce Post-Choice Satisfaction,” Personality
and Social Psychology Bulletin 19: 331–39 (1993). See also T. D. Wilson and J. W. Schooler, “Thinking
Too Much: Introspection Can Reduce the Quality of Preferences and Decisions,” Journal of Personality
and Social Psychology 60: 181–92 (1991).
22. C. N. DeWall and R. F. Baumeister, “Alone but Feeling No Pain: Effects of Social Exclusion on
Physical Pain Tolerance and Pain Threshold, Affective Forecasting, and Interpersonal Empathy,” Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology (in press).
23. D. Reisberg et al., “ ‘Enacted’ Auditory Images Are Ambiguous; ‘Pure’ Auditory Images Are Not,”
Quarterly Journal of Experimental Psychology: Human Experimental Psychology 41: 619–41 (1989).
24. Clever psychologists have been able to design some unusual circumstances that provide exceptions to
this rule; see C. W. Perky, “An Experimental Study of Imagination,” American Journal of Psychology 21:
422–52 (1910). It is also worth noting that while we can almost always distinguish between what we are
seeing and what we are imagining, we are not always able to distinguish between what we saw and what we
imagined; see M. K. Johnson and C. L. Raye, “Reality Monitoring,” Psychological Review 88: 67–85
(1981).
25. N. Schwarz and G. L. Clore, “Mood, Misattribution, and Judgments of Well-Being: Informative and
Directive Functions of Affective States,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 45: 513–23 (1983).
26. L. van Boven and G. Loewenstein, “Social Projection of Transient Drive States,” Personality and
Social Psychology Bulletin 29: 1159–68 (2003).
27. A. K. MacLeod and M. L. Cropley, “Anxiety, Depression, and the Anticipation of Future Positive
and Negative Experiences,” Journal of Abnormal Psychology 105: 286–89 (1996).
28. E. J. Johnson and A. Tversky, “Affect, Generalization, and the Perception of Risk,” Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology 45: 20–31 (1983); and D. DeSteno et al., “Beyond Valence in the
Perception of Likelihood: The Role of Emotion Specificity,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology
78: 397–416 (2000).
Chapter 7: Time Bombs
1. M. Hegarty, “Mechanical Reasoning by Mental Simulation,” Trends in Cognitive Sciences 8: 280–85
(2004).
2. G. Lakoff and M. Johnson, Metaphors We Live By (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1980).
3. D. Gentner, M. Imai, and L. Boroditsky, “As Time Goes By: Evidence for Two Systems in Processing
Space Time Metaphors,” Language and Cognitive Processes 17: 537–65 (2002); and L. Boroditsky,
“Metaphoric Structuring: Understanding Time Through Spatial Metaphors,” Cognition 75: 1–28 (2000).
4. B. Tversky, S. Kugelmass, and A. Winter, “Cross-Cultural and Developmental Trends in Graphic
Productions,” Cognitive Psychology 23: 515–57 (1991).
5. L. Boroditsky, “Does Language Shape Thought? Mandarin and English Speakers’ Conceptions of
Time,” Cognitive Psychology 43: 1–22 (2001).
6. R. K. Ratner, B. E. Kahn, and D. Kahneman, “Choosing Less-Preferred Experiences for the Sake of
Variety,” Journal of Consumer Research 26: 1–15 (1999).
7. D. Read and G. F. Loewenstein, “Diversification Bias: Explaining the Discrepancy in Variety Seeking
Between Combined and Separated Choices,” Journal of Experimental Psychology: Applied 1: 34–49
(1995). See also I. Simonson, “The Effect of Purchase Quantity and Timing on Variety-Seeking Behavior,”
Journal of Marketing Research 27: 150–62(1990).
8. T. D. Wilson and D. T. Gilbert, “Making Sense: A Model of Affective Adaptation” (unpublished
manuscript, University of Virginia, 2005).
9. Human beings are not the only animals that appreciate variety. The Coolidge effect ostensibly got its
name when President Calvin Coolidge and his wife were touring a farm. The foreman noted the sexual
prowess of his prize rooster: “This rooster can have sex all day without stopping,” he said. “Really?” said
Mrs. Coolidge. “Please tell that to my husband.” The president turned to the foreman and asked, “Does the
rooster mate with the same chicken each time?” “No,” said the foreman, “always with a different chicken.”
To which the president replied, “Really? Please tell that to my wife.” The story is probably apocryphal, but
the phenomenon is not: Male mammals who have mated to exhaustion can usually be induced to mate again
with a novel female; see J. Wilson, R. Kuehn, and F. Beach, “Modifications in the Sexual Behavior of Male
Rats Produced by Changing the Stimulus Female,” Journal of Comparative and Physiological Psychology
56: 636–44 (1963). In fact, even breeding bulls whose sperm is collected by a machine show a greatly
reduced time to ejaculation when the machine to which they’ve become habituated is moved to a novel
location. E. B. Hale and J. O. Almquist, “Relation of Sexual Behavior to Germ Cell Output in Farm
Animals,” Journal of Dairy Science 43: Supp., 145–67 (1960).
10. It is worth noting that if we change our assumptions (particularly the habituation assumption), then
switching plates exactly at the point at which our favorite meal has lost its edge can be a poor strategy for
maximizing pleasure in the long term; R. J. Hernstein, The Matching Law: Papers in Psychology and
Economics, ed. H. Rachlin and D. I. Laibson (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1997).
11. I would like to take this opportunity to note that while my apparent fixation on adulterous mailmen
betrays my juvenile sense of humor, the example is entirely fictitious and is not meant to reflect poorly on
the many fine mailmen and spouses I have had.
12. D. T. Gilbert, “Inferential Correction,” in Heuristics and Biases: The Psychology of Intuitive
Judgment, ed. T. Gilovich, D. W. Griffin, and D. Kahneman (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,
2002), 167–84.
13. A. Tversky and D. Kahneman, “Judgment Under Uncertainty: Heuristics and Biases,” Science 185:
1124–31 (1974).
14. N. Epley and T. Gilovich, “Putting Adjustment Back in the Anchoring and Adjustment Heuristic:
Differential Processing of Self-Generated and Experimenter-Provided Anchors,” Psychological Science 12:
391–96 (2001).
15. D. T. Gilbert, M. J. Gill, and T. D. Wilson, “The Future Is Now: Temporal Correction in Affective
Forecasting,” Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes 88: 430–44 (2002).
16. See also J. E. J. Ebert, “The Role of Cognitive Resources in the Valuation of Near and Far Future
Events,” Acta Psychologica 108: 155–71 (2001).
17. G. F. Loewenstein and D. Prelec, “Preferences for Sequences of Outcomes,” Psychological Review
100: 91–108 (1993).
18. D. Kahneman and A. Tversky, “Prospect Theory: An Analysis of Decision Under Risk,”
Econometrica 47: 263–91 (1979).
19. J. W. Pratt, D. A. Wise, and R. Zeckhauser, “Price Differences in Almost Competitive Markets,”
Quarterly Journal of Economics 93: 189–211 (1979); A. Tversky and D. Kahneman, “The Framing of
Decisions and the Psychology of Choice,” Science 211: 453–58 (1981); R. H. Thaler, “Toward a Positive
Theory of Consumer Choice,” Journal of Economic Behavior and Organization 1: 39–60 (1980).
20. R. H. Thaler, “Mental Accounting Matters,” Journal of Behavioral Decision Making 12: 183–206
(1999).
21. R. B. Cialdini et al., “Reciprocal Concessions Procedure for Inducing Compliance: The Door-in-theFace Technique,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 31: 206–15 (1975). There is some
controversy about whether this effect is, in fact, due to the contrast between the large and small requests.
See J. P. Dillard, “The Current Status of Research on Sequential-Request Compliance Techniques,”
Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin 17: 283–88 (1991).
22. D. Kahneman and D. T. Miller, “Norm Theory: Comparing Reality to Its Alternatives,”
Psychological Review 93: 136–53 (1986).
23. O. E. Tykocinski and T. S. Pittman, “The Consequences of Doing Nothing: Inaction Inertia as
Avoidance of Anticipated Counterfactual Regret,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 75: 607–
16 (1998); and O. E. Tykocinski, T. S. Pittman, and E. E. Tuttle, “Inaction Inertia: Forgoing Future Benefits
as a Result of an Initial Failure to Act,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 68: 793–803 (1995).
24. D. Kahneman and A. Tversky, “Choices, Values, and Frames,” American Psychologist 39: 341–50
(1984).
25. I. Simonson and A. Tversky, “Choice in Context: Tradeoff Contrast and Extremeness Aversion,”
Journal of Marketing Research 29: 281–95 (1992).
26. R. B. Cialdini, Influence: Science and Practice (Glenview, Ill.: Scott, Foresman, 1985).
27. D. A. Redelmeier and E. Shafir, “Medical Decision Making in Situations That Offer Multiple
Alternatives,” JAMA: Journal of the American Medical Association 273: 302–5 (1995).
28. S. S. Iyengar and M. R. Lepper, “When Choice Is Demotivating: Can One Desire Too Much of a
Good Thing?” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 79: 995–1006 (2000); and B. Schwartz, “SelfDetermination: The Tyranny of Freedom,” American Psychologist 55: 79–88 (2000).
29. A. Tversky, S. Sattath, and P. Slovic, “Contingent Weighting in Judgment and Choice,”
Psychological Review 95: 371–84 (1988).
30. C. K. Hsee et al., “Preference Reversals Between Joint and Separate Evaluations of Options: A
Review and Theoretical Analysis,” Psychological Bulletin 125: 576–90 (1999).
31. C. Hsee, “The Evaluability Hypothesis: An Explanation for Preference Reversals Between Joint and
Separate Evaluations of Alternatives,” Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes 67: 247–
57 (1996).
32. J. R. Priester, U. M. Dholakia, and M. A. Fleming, “When and Why the Background Contrast Effect
Emerges: Thought Engenders Meaning by Influencing the Perception of Applicability,” Journal of
Consumer Research 31: 491–501 (2004).
33. K. Myrseth, C. K. Morewedge, and D. T. Gilbert, unpublished raw data, Harvard University, 2004.
34. D. Kahneman and A. Tversky, “Prospect Theory: An Analysis of Decision Under Risk,”
Econometrica 47: 263–91 (1979); A. Tversky and D. Kahneman, “The Framing of Decisions and the
Psychology of Choice,” Science 211: 453–58 (1981); and A. Tversky and D. Kahneman, “Loss Aversion in
Riskless Choice: A Reference-Dependent Model,” Quarterly Journal of Economics 106: 1039–61 (1991).
35. D. Kahneman, J. L. Knetsch, and R. H. Thaler, “Experimental Tests of the Endowment Effect and the
Coase Theorem,” Journal of Political Economy 98: 1325–48 (1990); and D. Kahneman, J. Kentsch, and D.
Thaler, “The Endowment Effect, Loss Aversion, and Status Quo Bias,” Journal of Economic Perspectives
5: 193–206 (1991).
36. L. van Boven, D. Dunning, and G. F. Loewenstein, “Egocentric Empathy Gaps Between Owners and
Buyers: Misperceptions of the Endowment Effect,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 79: 66–
76 (2000); and Z. Carmon and D. Ariely, “Focusing on the Foregone: How Value Can Appear So Different
to Buyers and Sellers,” Journal of Consumer Research 27: 360–70 (2000).
37. L. Hunt, “Against Presentism,” Perspectives 40 (2002).
Chapter 8: Paradise Glossed
1. C. B. Wortman and R. C. Silver, “The Myths of Coping with Loss,” Journal of Consulting and
Clinical Psychology 57: 349–57 (1989); G. A. Bonanno, “Loss, Trauma, and Human Resilience: Have We
Underestimated the Human Capacity to Thrive After Extremely Aversive Events?” American Psychologist
59: 20–28 (2004); and C. S. Carver, “Resilience and Thriving: Issues, Models, and Linkages,” Journal of
Social Issues 54: 245–66 (1998).
2. G. A. Bonanno and S. Kaltman, “Toward an Integrative Perspective on Bereavement,” Psychological
Bulletin 125: 760–76 (1999); and G. A. Bonnano et al., “Resilience to Loss and Chronic Grief: A
Prospective Study from Preloss to 18-Months Postloss,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 83:
1150–64 (2002).
3. E. J. Ozer et al., “Predictors of Posttraumatic Stress Disorder and Symptoms in Adults: A Metaanalysis,” Psychological Bulletin 129: 52–73 (2003).
4. G. A. Bonanno, C. Rennicke, and S. Dekel, “Self-Enhancement Among High-Exposure Survivors of
the September 11th Terrorist Attack: Resilience or Social Maladjustment?” Journal of Personality and
Social Psychology 88: 984–98 (2005).
5. R. G. Tedeschi and L. G. Calhoun, “Posttraumatic Growth: Conceptual Foundations and Empirical
Evidence,” Psychological Inquiry 15: 1–18 (2004); P. A. Linley and S. Joseph, “Positive Change Following
Trauma and Adversity: A Review,” Journal of Traumatic Stress 17: 11–21 (2004); and C. S. Carver,
“Resilience and Thriving: Issues, Models, and Linkages,” Journal of Social Issues 54: 245–66 (1998).
6. K. Sack, “After 37 Years in Prison, Inmate Tastes Freedom,” New York Times, 11 January 1996, 18.
7. C. Reeve, Ohio State University commencement speech, 13 June 2003.
8. D. Becker, “Cycling Through Adversity: Ex-World Champ Stays on Cancer Comeback Course,” USA
Today, 22 May 1998, 3C.
9. R. G. Tedeschi and L. G. Calhoun, Trauma and Transformation: Growing in the Aftermath of
Suffering (Sherman Oaks, Calif.: Sage, 1995), 1.
10. R. Schulz and S. Decker, “Long-Term Adjustment to Physical Disability: The Role of Social Support,
Perceived Control, and Self-Blame,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 48: 1162–72 (1985); C.
B. Wortman and R. C. Silver, “Coping with Irrevocable Loss,” in Cataclysms, Crises, and Catastrophes:
Psychology in Action, ed. G. R. VandenBos and B. K. Bryant (Washington, D.C.: American Psychological
Association, 1987), 185–235; and P. Brickman, D. Coates, and R. J. Janoff-Bulman, “Lottery Winners and
Accident Victims: Is Happiness Relative?” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 36: 917–27
(1978).
11. S. E. Taylor, “Adjustment to Threatening Events: A Theory of Cognitive Adaptation,” American
Psychologist 38: 1161–73 (1983).
12. D. T. Gilbert, E. Driver-Linn, and T. D. Wilson, “The Trouble with Vronsky: Impact Bias in the
Forecasting of Future Affective States,” in The Wisdom in Feeling: Psychological Processes in Emotional
Intelligence, ed. L. F. Barrett and P. Salovey (New York: Guilford Press, 2002), 114–43; and T. D. Wilson
and D. T. Gilbert, “Affective Forecasting,” in Advances in Experimental Social Psychology, ed. M. Zanna,
vol. 35 (New York: Elsevier, 2003).
13. D. L. Sackett and G. W. Torrance, “The Utility of Different Health States as Perceived by the General
Public,” Journal of Chronic Disease 31: 697–704 (1978); P. Dolan and D. Kahneman, “Interpretations of
Utility and Their Implications for the Valuation of Health” (unpublished manuscript, Princeton University,
2005); and J. Riis et al., “Ignorance of Hedonic Adaptation to Hemo-Dialysis: A Study Using Ecological
Momentary Assessment,” Journal of Experimental Psychology: General 134: 3–9 (2005).
14. P. Menzela et al., “The Role of Adaptation to Disability and Disease in Health State Valuation: A
Preliminary Normative Analysis,” Social Science & Medicine 55: 2149–58 (2002).
15. P. Dolan, “Modelling Valuations for EuroQol Health States,” Medical Care 11: 1095–1108 (1997).
16. J. Jonides and H. Gleitman, “A Conceptual Category Effect in Visual Search: O as Letter or as Digit,”
Perception and Psychophysics 12: 457–60 (1972).
17. C. M. Solley and J. F. Santos, “Perceptual Learning with Partial Verbal Reinforcement,” Perceptual
and Motor Skills 8: 183–93 (1958); and E. D. Turner and W. Bevan, “Patterns of Experience and the
Perceived Orientation of the Necker Cube,” Journal of General Psychology 70: 345–52 (1964).
18. D. Dunning, J. A. Meyerowitz, and A. D. Holzberg, “Ambiguity and Self-Evaluation: The Role of
Idiosyncratic Trait Definitions in Self-Serving Assessments of Ability,” Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology 57: 1–9 (1989).
19. C. K. Morewedge and D. T. Gilbert, unpublished raw data, Harvard University, 2004.
20. J. W. Brehm, “Post-decision Changes in Desirability of Alternatives,” Journal of Abnormal and
Social Psychology 52: 384–89 (1956).
21. E. E. Lawler et al., “Job Choice and Post Decision Dissonance,” Organizational Behavior and
Human Decision Processes 13: 133–45 (1975).
22. S. Lyubomirsky and L. Ross, “Changes in Attractiveness of Elected, Rejected, and Precluded
Alternatives: A Comparison of Happy and Unhappy Individuals,” Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology 76: 988–1007 (1999).
23. R. E. Knox and J. A. Inkster, “Postdecision Dissonance at Post Time,” Journal of Personality and
Social Psychology 8: 319–23 (1968).
24. O. J. Frenkel and A. N. Doob, “Post-decision Dissonance at the Polling Booth,” Canadian Journal of
Behavioural Science 8: 347–50 (1976).
25. F. M. Voltaire, Candide (1759), chap. 1. I’ve never found an English translation that I like, so I’ve
cobbled together my own. Pardon my French.
26. R. F. Baumeister, “The Optimal Margin of Illusion,” Journal of Social and Clinical Psychology 8:
176–89 (1989); S. E. Taylor, Positive Illusions (New York: Basic Books, 1989); S. E. Taylor and J. D.
Brown, “Illusion and Well-Being: A Social-Psychological Perspective on Mental Health,” Psychological
Bulletin 103: 193–210 (1988); Z. Kunda, “The Case for Motivated Reasoning,” Psychological Bulletin 108:
480–98 (1990); and T. Pyszczynski and J. Greenberg, “Toward an Integration of Cognitive and
Motivational Perspectives on Social Inference: A Biased Hypothesis-Testing Model,” in Advances in
Experimental Social Psychology, ed. L. E. Berkowitz, vol. 20 (San Diego: Academic Press, 1987), 297–
340.
27. Both Sigmund and Anna Freud called this a system of “defense mechanisms,” and just about every
psychologist since has remarked on that system and given it a different name. A recent summary of the
literature on psychological defense can be found in D. L. Paulhus, B. Fridhandler, and S. Hayes,
“Psychological Defense: Contemporary Theory and Research,” in Handbook of Personality Psychology, ed.
R. Hogan, J. Johnson, and S. Briggs (San Diego: Academic Press, 1997), 543–79.
28. W. B. Swann, B. W. Pelham, and D. S. Krull, “Agreeable Fancy or Disagreeable Truth? Reconciling
Self-Enhancement and Self-Verification,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 57: 782–91
(1989); W. B. Swann, P. J. Rentfrow, and J. Guinn, “Self-Verification: The Search for Coherence,” in
Handbook of Self and Identity, ed. M. Leary and J. Tagney (New York: Guilford Press, 2002), 367–83; and
W. B. Swann, Self-Traps: The Elusive Quest for Higher Self-Esteem (New York: Freeman, 1996).
29. W. B. Swann and B. W. Pelham, “Who Wants Out When the Going Gets Good? Psychological
Investment and Preference for Self-Verifying College Roommates,” Journal of Self and Identity 1: 219–33
(2002).
30. J. L. Freedman and D. O. Sears, “Selective Exposure,” in Advances in Experimental Social
Psychology, ed. L. Berkowitz, vol. 2 (New York: Academic Press, 1965), 57–97; and D. Frey, “Recent
Research on Selective Exposure to Information,” in Advances in Experimental Social Psychology, ed. L.
Berkowitz, vol. 19 (New York: Academic Press, 1986), 41–80.
31. D. Frey and D. Stahlberg, “Selection of Information After Receiving More or Less Reliable SelfThreatening Information,” Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin 12: 434–41 (1986).
32. B. Holton and T. Pyszczynski, “Biased Information Search in the Interpersonal Domain,” Personality
and Social Psychology Bulletin 15: 42–51 (1989).
33. D. Ehrlich et al., “Postdecision Exposure to Relevant Information,” Journal of Abnormal and Social
Psychology 54: 98–102 (1957).
34. R. Sanitioso, Z. Kunda, and G. T. Fong, “Motivated Recruitment of Autobiographical Memories,”
Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 59: 229–41 (1990).
35. A. Tesser and S. Rosen, “Similarity of Objective Fate as a Determinant of the Reluctance to Transmit
Unpleasant Information: The MUM Effect,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 23: 46–53
(1972).
36. M. Snyder and W. B. Swann, Jr., “Hypothesis Testing Processes in Social Interaction,” Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology 36: 1202–12 (1978); and W. B. J. Swann, T. Giuliano, and D. M.
Wegner, “Where Leading Questions Can Lead: The Power of Conjecture in Social Interaction,” Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology 42: 1025–35 (1982).
37. D. T. Gilbert and E. E. Jones, “Perceiver-Induced Constraint: Interpretations of Self-Generated
Reality,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 50: 269–80 (1986).
38. L. Festinger, “A Theory of Social Comparison Processes,” Human Relations 7: 117–40 (1954); A.
Tesser, M. Millar, and J. Moore, “Some Affective Consequences of Social Comparison and Reflection
Processes: The Pain and Pleasure of Being Close,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 54: 49–61
(1988); S. E. Taylor and M. Lobel, “Social Comparison Activity Under Threat: Downward Evaluation and
Upward Contacts,” Psychological Review 96: 569–75 (1989); and T. A. Wills, “Downward Comparison
Principles in Social Psychology,” Psychological Bulletin 90: 245–71 (1981).
39. T. Pyszczynski, J. Greenberg, and J. LaPrelle, “Social Comparison After Success and Failure: Biased
Search for Information Consistent with a Self-Servicing Conclusion,” Journal of Experimental Social
Psychology 21: 195–211 (1985).
40. J. V. Wood, S. E. Taylor, and R. R. Lichtman, “Social Comparison in Adjustment to Breast Cancer,”
Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 49: 1169–83 (1985).
41. S. E. Taylor et al., “Social Support, Support Groups, and the Cancer Patient,” Journal of Consulting
and Clinical Psychology 54: 608–15 (1986).
42. A. Tesser and J. Smith, “Some Effects of Task Relevance and Friendship on Helping: You Don’t
Always Help the One You Like,” Journal of Experimental Social Psychology 16: 582–90 (1980).
43. A. H. Hastorf and H. Cantril, “They Saw a Game: A Case Study,” Journal of Abnormal and Social
Psychology 49: 129–34 (1954).
44. L. Sigelman and C. K. Sigelman, “Judgments of the Carter-Reagan Debate: The Eyes of the
Beholders,” Public Opinion Quarterly 48: 624–28 (1984); R. K. Bothwell and J. C. Brigham, “Selective
Evaluation and Recall During the 1980 Reagan-Carter Debate,” Journal of Applied Social Psychology 13:
427–42 (1983); J. G. Payne et al., “Perceptions of the 1988 Presidential and Vice-Presidential Debates,”
American Behavioral Scientist 32: 425–35 (1989); and G. D. Munro et al., “Biased Assimilation of
Sociopolitical Arguments: Evaluating the 1996 U.S. Presidential Debate,” Basic and Applied Social
Psychology 24: 15–26 (2002).
45. R. P. Vallone, L. Ross, and M. R. Lepper, “The Hostile Media Phenomenon: Biased Perception and
Perceptions of Media Bias in Coverage of the Beirut Massacre,” Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology 49: 577–85 (1985).
46. C. G. Lord, L. Ross, and M. R. Lepper, “Biased Assimilation and Attitude Polarization: The Effects
of Prior Theories on Subsequently Considered Evidence,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 37:
2098–109 (1979).
47. It is no consolation that in subsequent studies, both established scientists and scientists in training
showed the same tendency to favor techniques that produced favored conclusions. See J. J. Koehler, “The
Influence of Prior Beliefs on Scientific Judgments of Evidence Quality,” Organizational Behavior and
Human Decision Processes 56: 28–55 (1993).
48. T. Pyszczynski, J. Greenberg, and K. Holt, “Maintaining Consistency Between Self-Serving Beliefs
and Available Data: A Bias in Information Evaluation,” Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin 11:
179–90 (1985).
49. P. H. Ditto and D. F. Lopez, “Motivated Skepticism: Use of Differential Decision Criteria for
Preferred and Nonpreferred Conclusions,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 63: 568–84
(1992).
50. Ibid.
51. T. Gilovich, How We Know What Isn’t So: The Fallibility of Human Reason in Everyday Life (New
York: Free Press, 1991).
52. This tendency can have disastrous consequences. For example, in 2004, the U.S. Senate Intelligence
Committee concluded that the CIA had provided the White House with incorrect information about Iraq’s
weapons of mass destruction, which led the United States to invade Iraq. According to that report, the
tendency to cook facts “led Intelligence Community analysts, collectors and managers to both interpret
ambiguous evidence as conclusively indicative of a WMD program as well as ignore or minimize evidence
that Iraq did not have active and expanding weapons of mass destruction programs.” K. P. Shrader,
“Report: War Rationale Based on CIA Error,” Associated Press, 9 July 2004.
53. Agence-France-Presse, “Italy: City Wants Happier Goldfish,” New York Times, 24 July 2004, A5.
Chapter 9: Immune to Reality
1. T. D. Wilson, Strangers to Ourselves: Discovering the Adaptive Unconscious (Cambridge, Mass.:
Harvard University Press, 2002); and J. A. Bargh and T. L. Chartrand, “The Unbearable Automaticity of
Being,” American Psychologist 54: 462–79 (1999).
2. R. E. Nisbett and T. D. Wilson, “Telling More Than We Can Know: Verbal Reports on Mental
Processes,” Psychological Review 84: 231–59 (1977);D. J. Bem, “Self-Perception Theory,” in Advances in
Experimental Social Psychology, ed. L. Berkowitz, vol. 6 (New York: Academic Press, 1972), 1–62; M. S.
Gazzaniga, The Social Brain (New York: Basic Books, 1985); and D. M. Wegner, The Illusion of
Conscious Will (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 2003).
3. E. T. Higgings, W. S. Rholes, and C. R. Jones, “Category Accessibility and Impression Formation,”
Journal of Experimental Social Psychology 13: 141–54 (1977).
4. J. Bargh, M. Chen, and L. Burrows. “Automaticity of Social Behavior: Direct Effects of Trait
Construct and Stereotype Activation on Action,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 71: 230–44
(1996).
5. A. Dijksterhuis and A. van Knippenberg, “The Relation Between Perception and Behavior, or How to
Win a Game of Trivial Pursuit,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 74: 865–77 (1998).
6. Nisbett and Wilson, “Telling More Than We Can Know.”
7. J. W. Schooler, D. Ariely, and G. Loewenstein, “The Pursuit and Assessment of Happiness Can Be
Self-Defeating,” in The Psychology of Economic Decisions: Rationality and Well-Being, ed. I. Brocas and J.
Carillo, vol. 1 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2003).
8. K. N. Ochsner et al., “Rethinking Feelings: An fMRI Study of the Cognitive Regulation of Emotion,”
Journal of Cognitive Neuroscience 14: 1215–29 (2002).
9. D. M. Wegner, R. Erber, and S. Zanakos, “Ironic Processes in the Mental Control of Mood and MoodRelated Thought,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 65: 1093–104 (1993); and D. M. Wegner,
A. Broome, and S. J. Blumberg, “Ironic Effects of Trying to Relax Under Stress,” Behaviour Research and
Therapy 35: 11–21 (1997).
10. D. T. Gilbert et al., “Immune Neglect: A Source of Durability Bias in Affective Forecasting,” Journal
of Personality and Social Psychology 75: 617–38 (1998).
11. Ibid.
12. D. T. Gilbert et al., “Looking Forward to Looking Backward: The Misprediction of Regret,”
Psychological Science 15: 346–50 (2004).
13. M. Curtiz, Casablanca, Warner Bros., 1942.
14. T. Gilovich and V. H. Medvec, “The Experience of Regret: What When, and Why,” Psychological
Review 102: 379–95 (1995); N. Roese, If Only: How to Turn Regret into Opportunity (New York: Random
House 2004); G. Loomes and R. Sugden, “Regret Theory: An Alternative Theory of Rational Choice Under
Uncertainty,” Economic Journal 92: 805–24 (1982); and D. Bell, “Regret in Decision Making Under
Uncertainty,” Operations Research 20: 961–81 (1982).
15. I. Ritov and J. Baron, “Outcome Knowledge, Regret, and Omission Bias,” Organizational Behavior
and Human Decision Processes 64: 119–27 (1995); I. Ritov and J. Baron, “Probability of Regret:
Anticipation of Uncertainty Resolution in Choice: Outcome Knowledge, Regret, and Omission Bias,”
Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes 66: 228–36 (1996); and M. Zeelenberg,
“Anticipated Regret, Expected Feedback and Behavioral Decision Making,” Journal of Behavioral
Decision Making 12: 93–106 (1999).
16. M. T. Crawford et al., “Reactance, Compliance, and Anticipated Regret,” Journal of Experimental
Social Psychology 38: 56–63 (2002).
17. I. Simonson, “The Influence of Anticipating Regret and Responsibility on Purchase Decisions,”
Journal of Consumer Research 19: 105–18 (1992).
18. V. H. Medvec, S. F. Madey, and T. Gilovich, “When Less Is More: Counterfactual Thinking and
Satisfaction Among Olympic Medalists,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 69: 603–10 (1995);
and D. Kahneman and A. Tversky, “Variants of Uncertainty,” Cognition 11: 143–57 (1982).
19. D. Kahneman and A. Tversky, “The Psychology of Preferences,” Scientific American 246: 160–73
(1982).
20. Gilovich and Medvec, “The Experience of Regret.”
21. T. Gilovich, V. H. Medvec, and S. Chen, “Omission, Commission, and Dissonance Reduction:
Overcoming Regret in the Monty Hall Problem,” Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin 21: 182–90
(1995).
22. H. B. Gerard and G. C. Mathewson, “The Effects of Severity of Initiation on Liking for a Group: A
Replication,” Journal of Experimental Social Psychology 2: 278–87 (1966).
23. P. G. Zimbardo, “Control of Pain Motivation by Cognitive Dissonance,” Science 151: 217–19 (1966).
24. See also E. Aronson and J. Mills, “The Effect of Severity of Initiation on Liking for a Group,”
Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 59: 177–81 (1958); J. L. Freedman, “Long-Term Behavioral
Effects of Cognitive Dissonance,” Journal of Experimental Social Psychology 1: 145–55 (1965); D. R.
Shaffer and C. Hendrick, “Effects of Actual Effort and Anticipated Effort on Task Enhancement,” Journal
of Experimental Social Psychology 7: 435–47 (1971); H. R. Arkes and C. Blumer, “The Psychology of
Sunk Cost,” Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes 35: 124–40 (1985); and J. T. Jost et
al. “Social Inequality and the Reduction of Ideological Dissonance on Behalf of the System: Evidence of
Enhanced System Justification Among the Disadvantaged,” European Journal of Social Psychology 33: 13–
36 (2003).
25. D. T. Gilbert et al., “The Peculiar Longevity of Things Not So Bad,” Psychological Science 15: 14–
19 (2004).
26. D. Frey et al., “Re-evaluation of Decision Alternatives Dependent upon the Reversibility of a
Decision and the Passage of Time,” European Journal of Social Psychology 14: 447–50 (1984); and D.
Frey, “Reversible and Irreversible Decisions: Preference for Consonant Information as a Function of
Attractiveness of Decision Alternatives,” Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin 7: 621–26 (1981).
27. S. Wiggins et al., “The Psychological Consequences of Predictive Testing for Huntington’s Disease,”
New England Journal of Medicine 327: 1401–5 (1992).
28. D. T. Gilbert, and J. E. J. Ebert, “Decisions and Revisions: The Affective Forecasting of Changeable
Outcomes,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 82: 503–14 (2002).
29. J. W. Brehm, A Theory of Psychological Reactance (New York: Academic Press, 1966).
30. R. B. Cialdini, Influence: Science and Practice (Glenview, Ill.: Scott, Foresman, 1985).
31. S. S. Iyengar and M. R. Lepper, “When Choice Is Demotivating: Can One Desire Too Much of a
Good Thing?” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 79: 995–1006 (2000); and B. Schwartz, “SelfDetermination: The Tyranny of Freedom,” American Psychologist 55: 79–88 (2000).
32. J. W. Pennebaker, “Writing About Emotional Experiences as a Therapeutic Process,” Psychological
Science 8: 162–66 (1997).
33. J. W. Pennebaker, T. J. Mayne, and M. E. Francis, “Linguistic Predictors of Adaptive Bereavement,”
Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 72: 863–71 (1997).
34. T. D. Wilson et al., “The Pleasures of Uncertainty: Prolonging Positive Moods in Ways People Do
Not Anticipate,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 88: 5–21 (2005).
35. B. Fischoff, “Hindsight =/= foresight: The Effects of Outcome Knowledge on Judgment Under
Uncertainty,” Journal of Experimental Psychology: Human Perception and Performance 1: 288–99 (1975);
and C. A. Anderson, M. R. Lepper, and L. Ross, “Perseverance of Social Theories: The Role of Explanation
in the Persistence of Discredited Information,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 39: 1037–49
(1980).
36. B. Weiner, “ ‘Spontaneous’ Causal Thinking,” Psychological Bulletin 97: 74–84 (1985); and R. R.
Hassin, J. A. Bargh, and J. S. Uleman, “Spontaneous Causal Inferences,” Journal of Experimental Social
Psychology 38: 515–22 (2002).
37. B. Zeigarnik, “Das Behalten erledigter und unerledigter Handlungen,” Psychologische Forschung 9:
1–85 (1927); and G. W. Boguslavsky, “Interruption and Learning,” Psychological Review 58: 248–55
(1951).
38. Wilson et al., “Pleasures of Uncertainty.”
39. J. Keats, letter to Richard Woodhouse, 27 October 1881, in Selected Poems and Letters by John
Keats, ed. D. Bush (Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1959).
Chapter 10: Once Bitten
1. D. Wirtz et al., “What to Do on Spring Break? The Role of Predicted, On-line, and Remembered
Experience in Future Choice,” Psychological Science 14: 520–24 (2003); and S. Bluck et al., “A Tale of
Three Functions: The Self-Reported Use of Autobiographical Memory,” Social Cognition 23: 91–117
(2005).
2. A. Tversky and D. Kahneman, “Availability: A Heuristic for Judgment Frequency and Probability,”
Cognitive Psychology 5: 207–32 (1973).
3. L. J. Sanna and N. Schwarz, “Integrating Temporal Biases: The Interplay of Focal Thoughts and
Accessibility Experiences,” Psychological Science 15: 474–81 (2004).
4. R. Brown and J. Kulik, “Flashbulb Memories,” Cognition 5: 73–99 (1977); and P. H. Blaney, “Affect
and Memory: A Review,” Psychological Bulletin 99: 229–46 (1986).
5. D. T. Miller and B. R. Taylor, “Counterfactual Thought, Regret and Superstition: How to Avoid
Kicking Yourself,” in What Might Have Been: The Social Psychology of Counterfactual Thinking, ed. N. J.
Roese and J. M. Olson (Hillsdale, N.J.: Lawrence Erlbaum, 1995), 305–31; and J. Kruger, D. Wirtz, and D.
T. Miller, “Counterfactual Thinking and the First Instinct Fallacy,” Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology 88: 725–35 (2005).
6. R. Buehler and C. McFarland, “Intensity Bias in Affective Forecasting: The Role of Temporal Focus,”
Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin 27: 1480–93 (2001).
7. C. K. Morewedge, D. T. Gilbert, and T. D. Wilson, “The Least Likely of Times: How Memory for Past
Events Biases the Prediction of Future Events,” Psychological Science 16: 626–30 (2005).
8. B. L. Fredrickson and D. Kahneman, “Duration Neglect in Retrospective Evaluations of Affective
Episodes,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 65: 45–55 (1993); and D. Ariely and Z. Carmon,
“Summary Assessment of Experiences: The Whole Is Different from the Sum of Its Parts,” in Time and
Decision, ed. G. Loewenstein, D. Read, and R. F. Baumeister (New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 2003),
323–49.
9. W. M. Lepley, “Retention as a Function of Serial Position,” Psychological Bulletin 32: 730 (1935); B.
B. Murdock, “The Serial Position Effect of Free Recall,” Journal of Experimental Psychology 64: 482–88
(1962); and T. L. White and M. Treisman, “A Comparison of the Encoding of Content and Order in
Olfactory Memory and in Memory for Visually Presented Verbal Materials,” British Journal of Psychology
88: 459–72 (1997).
10. N. H. Anderson, “Serial Position Curves in Impression Formation,” Journal of Experimental
Psychology 97: 8–12 (1973).
11. D. Kahneman et al., “When More Pain Is Preferred to Less: Adding a Better Ending,” Psychological
Science 4: 401–5 (1993).
12. J. J. Christensen-Szalanski, “Discount Functions and the Measurement of Patients’ Values: Women’s
Decisions During Childbirth,” Medical Decision Making 4: 47–58 (1984).
13. D. Holmberg and J. G. Holmes, “Reconstruction of Relationship Memories: A Mental Models
Approach,” in Autobiographical Memory and the Validity of Retrospective Reports, ed. N. Schwarz and N.
Sudman (New York: Springer-Verlag, 1994), 267–88; and C. McFarland and M. Ross, “The Relation
Between Current Impressions and Memories of Self and Dating Partners,” Personality and Social
Psychology Bulletin 13: 228–38 (1987).
14. William Shakespeare, King Richard II, act 2, scene 1 (1594–96; London: Penguin Classics, 1981).
15. D. Kahneman, “Objective Happiness,” in Well-Being: The Foundations of Hedonic Psychology, ed.
D. Kahneman, E. Diener, and N. Schwarz (New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1999), 3–25.
16. See “Well-Being and Time,” in J. D. Velleman, The Possibility of Practical Reason (Oxford: Oxford
University Press, 2000).
17. E. Diener, D. Wirtz, and S. Oishi, “End Effects of Rated Quality of Life: The James Dean Effect,”
Psychological Science 12: 124–28 (2001).
18. M. D. Robinson and G. L. Clore, “Belief and Feeling: Evidence for an Accessibility Model of
Emotional Self-Report,” Psychological Bulletin 128: 934–60 (2002); and L. J. Levine and M. A. Safer,
“Sources of Bias in Memory for Emotions,” Current Directions in Psychological Science 11: 169–73
(2002).
19. M. D. Robinson and G. L. Clore, “Episodic and Semantic Knowledge in Emotional Self-Report:
Evidence for Two Judgment Processes,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 83: 198–215 (2002).
20. M. D. Robinson, J. T. Johnson, and S. A. Shields, “The Gender Heurristic and the Database: Factors
Affecting the Perception of Gender-Related Differences in the Experience and Display of Emotions,” Basic
and Applied Social Psychology 20: 206–19 (1998).
21. C. McFarland, M. Ross, and N. DeCourville, “Women’s Theories of Menstruation and Biases in
Recall of Menstrual Symptoms,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 57: 522–31 (1981).
22. S. Oishi, “The Experiencing and Remembering of Well-Being: A Cross-Cultural Analysis,”
Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin 28: 1398–1406 (2002).
23. C. N. Scollon et al., “Emotions Across Cultures and Methods,” Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology
35: 304–26 (2004).
24. M. A. Safer, L. J. Levine, and A. L. Drapalski, “Distortion in Memory for Emotions: The
Contributions of Personality and Post-Event Knowledge,” Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin 28:
1495–1507 (2002); and S. A. Dewhurst and M. A. Marlborough, “Memory Bias in the Recall of Pre-exam
Anxiety: The Influence of Self-Enhancement,” Applied Cognitive Psychology 17: 695–702 (2003).
25. T. R. Mitchell et al., “Temporal Adjustments in the Evaluation of Events: The ‘Rosy View,’ ”
Journal of Experimental Social Psychology 33: 421–48 (1997).
26. T. D. Wilson et al., “Preferences as Expectation-Driven Inferences: Effects of Affective Expectations
on Affective Experience,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 56: 519–30 (1989).
27. A. A. Stone et al., “Prospective and Cross-Sectional Mood Reports Offer No Evidence of a ‘Blue
Monday’ Phenomenon,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 49: 129–34 (1985).
Chapter 11: Reporting Live from Tomorrow
1. J. Livingston and R. Evans, “Whatever Will Be, Will Be (Que Sera, Sera)” (1955).
2. W. V. Quine and J. S. Ullian, The Web of Belief, 2nd ed. (New York: Random House, 1978), 51.
3. Half of all Americans relocated in the five-year period of 1995–2000, which suggests that the average
American relocates about every ten years; B. Berkner and C. S. Faber, Geographical Mobility, 1995 to
2000: (Washington, D.C.: U.S. Bureau of the Census, 2003).
4. The average baby boomer held roughly ten jobs between the ages of eighteen and thirty-six, which
suggests that the average American holds at least this many in a lifetime. Bureau of Labor Statistics,
Number of Jobs Held, Labor Market Activity, and Earnings Growth Among Younger Baby Boomers:
Results from More Than Two Decades of a Longitudinal Survey, Bureau of Labor Statistics news release
(Washington, D.C.: U.S. Department of Labor, 2002).
5. The U.S. Census Bureau projects that in the coming years, 10 percent of Americans will never marry,
60 percent will marry just once, and 30 percent will marry at least twice. R. M. Kreider and J. M. Fields,
Number, Timing, and Duration of Marriages and Divorces, 1996 (Washington, D.C.: U.S. Bureau of the
Census, 2002).
6. B. Russell, The Analysis of Mind (New York: Macmillan, 1921), 231.
7. The biologist Richard Dawkins refers to these beliefs as memes. See R. J. Dawkins, The Selfish Gene
(Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1976). See also S. Blackmore, The Meme Machine (Oxford: Oxford
University Press, 2000).
8. D. C. Dennett, Brainstorms: Philosophical Essays on Mind and Psychology (Cambridge, Mass.:
Bradford/MIT Press, 1981), 18.
9. R. Layard, Happiness: Lessons from a New Science (New York: Penguin, 2005); E. Diener and M. E.
P. Seligman, “Beyond Money: Toward an Economy of Well-Being,” Psychological Science in the Public
Interest 5: 1–31 (2004); B. S. Frey and A. Stutzer, Happiness and Economics: How the Economy and
Institutions Affect Human Well-Being (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 2002); R. A. Easterlin,
“Income and Happiness: Towards a Unified Theory,” Economic Journal 111: 465–84 (2001); and D. G.
Blanchflower and A. J. Oswald, “Well-Being over Time in Britain and the USA,” Journal of Public
Economics 88: 1359–86 (2004).
10. The effect of declining marginal utility is slowed when we spend our money on the things to which
we are least likely to adapt. See T. Scitovsky, The Joyless Economy: The Psychology of Human Satisfaction
(Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1976); L. Van Boven and T. Gilovich, “To Do or to Have? That Is the
Question,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 85: 1193–202 (2003); and R. H. Frank, “How Not
to Buy Happiness,” Daedalus: Journal of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences 133: 69–79 (2004).
Not all economists believe in decreasing marginal utility: R. A. Easterlin, “Diminishing Marginal Utility of
Income? Caveat Emptor,” Social Indicators Research 70: 243–326 (2005).
11. J. D. Graaf et al., Affluenza: The All-Consuming Epidemic (New York: Berrett-Koehler, 2002); D.
Myers, The American Paradox: Spiritual Hunger in an Age of Plenty (New Haven: Yale University Press,
2000); R. H. Frank, Luxury Fever (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 2000); J. B. Schor, The
Overspent American: Why We Want What We Don’t Need (New York: Perennial, 1999); and P. L. Wachtel,
Poverty of Affluence: A Psychological Portrait of the American Way of Life (New York: Free Press, 1983).
12. Adam Smith, An Inquiry into the Nature and Causes of the Wealth of Nations (1776), book 1 (New
York: Modern Library, 1994).
13. Adam Smith, The Theory of Moral Sentiments (1759; Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,
2002).
14. N. Ashraf, C. Camerer, and G. Loewenstein, “Adam Smith, Behavorial Economist,” Journal of
Economic Perspectives 19: 131–45 (2005).
15. Smith, The Theory of Moral Sentiments.
16. Some theorists have argued that societies exhibit a cyclic pattern in which people do come to realize
that money doesn’t buy happiness but then forget this lesson a generation later. See A. O. Hirschman,
Shifting Involvements: Private Interest and Public Action (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press,
1982).
17. C. Walker, “Some Variations in Marital Satisfaction,” in Equalities and Inequalities in Family Life,
ed. R. Chester and J. Peel (London: Academic Press, 1977), 127–39.
18. D. Myers, The Pursuit of Happiness: Discovering the Pathway to Fulfillment, Well-Being, and
Enduring Personal Joy (New York: Avon, 1992), 71.
19. J. A. Feeney, “Attachment Styles, Communication Patterns and Satisfaction Across the Life Cycle of
Marriage,” Personal Relationships 1: 333–48 (1994).
20. D. Kahneman et al., “A Survey Method for Characterizing Daily Life Experience: The Day
Reconstruction Method,” Science 306: 1776–80 (2004).
21. T. D. Wilson et al., “Focalism: A Source of Durability Bias in Affective Forecasting,” Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology 78: 821–36 (2000).
22. R. J. Norwick, D. T. Gilbert, and T. D. Wilson, “Surrogation: An Antidote for Errors in Affective
Forecasting” (unpublished manuscript, Harvard University, 2005).
23. Ibid.
24. Ibid.
25. This is also the best way to predict our future behavior. For example, people overestimate the
likelihood that they will perform a charitable act but correctly estimate the likelihood that others will do the
same. This suggests that if we would base predictions of our own behavior on what we see others do, we’d
be dead-on. See N. Epley and D. Dunning, “Feeling ‘Holier Than Thou’: Are Self-Serving Assessments
Produced by Errors in Self- or Social Prediction?” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 79: 861–
75 (2000).
26. R. C. Wylie, The Self-Concept: Theory and Research on Selected Topics, vol. 2 (Lincoln: University
of Nebraska Press, 1979).
27. L. Larwood and W. Whittaker, “Managerial Myopia: Self-Serving Biases in Organizational
Planning,” Journal of Applied Psychology 62: 194–98 (1977).
28. R. B. Felson, “Ambiguity and Bias in the Self-Concept,” Social Psychology Quarterly 44: 64–69.
29. D. Walton and J. Bathurst, “An Exploration of the Perceptions of the Average Driver’s Speed
Compared to Perceived Driver Safety and Driving Skill,” Accident Analysis and Prevention 30: 821–30
(1998).
30. P. Cross, “Not Can but Will College Teachers Be Improved?” New Directions for Higher Education
17: 1–15 (1977).
31. E. Pronin, D. Y. Lin, and L. Ross, “The Bias Blind Spot: Perceptions of Bias in Self Versus Others,”
Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin 28: 369–81 (2002).
32. J. Kruger, “Lake Wobegon Be Gone! The ‘Below-Average Effect’ and the Egocentric Nature of
Comparative Ability Judgments,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 77: 221–32 (1999).
33. J. T. Johnson et al., “The ‘Barnum Effect’ Revisited: Cognitive and Motivational Factors in the
Acceptance of Personality Descriptions,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 49: 1378–91
(1985).
34. Kruger, “Lake Wobegon Be Gone!”
35. E. E. Jones and R. E. Nisbett, “The Actor and the Observer: Divergent Perceptions of the Causes of
Behavior,” in Attribution: Perceiving the Causes of Behavior, ed. E. E. Jones et al. (Morristown, N.J.:
General Learning Press, 1972); and R. E. Nisbett and E. Borgida, “Attribution and the Psychology of
Prediction,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 32: 932–43 (1975).
36. D. T. Miller and C. McFarland, “Pluralistic Ignorance: When Similarity Is Interpreted as
Dissimilarity,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 53: 298–305 (1987).
37. D. T. Miller and L. D. Nelson, “Seeing Approach Motivation in the Avoidance Behavior of Others:
Implications for an Understanding of Pluralistic Ignorance,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology
83: 1066–75 (2002).
38. C. R. Snyder and H. L. Fromkin, “Abnormality as a Positive Characteristic: The Development and
Validation of a Scale Measuring Need for Uniqueness,” Journal of Abnormal Psychology 86: 518–27
(1977).
39. M. B. Brewer, “The Social Self: On Being the Same and Different at the Same Time,” Personality
and Social Psychology Bulletin 17: 475–82 (1991).
40. H. L. Fromkin, “Effects of Experimentally Aroused Feelings of Undistinctiveness Upon Valuation of
Scarce and Novel Experiences,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 16: 521–29 (1970); and H.
L. Fromkin, “Feelings of Interpersonal Undistinctiveness: An Unpleasant Affective State,” Journal of
Experimental Research in Personality 6: 178–85 (1972).
41. R. Karniol, T. Eylon, and S. Rish, “Predicting Your Own and Others’ Thoughts and Feelings: More
Like a Stranger Than a Friend,” European Journal of Social Psychology 27: 301–11 (1997); J. T. Johnson,
“The Heart on the Sleeve and the Secret Self: Estimations of Hidden Emotion in Self and Acquaintances,”
Journal of Personality 55: 563–82 (1987); and R. Karniol, “Egocentrism Versus Protocentrism: The Status
of Self in Social Prediction,” Psychological Review 110: 564–80 (2003).
42. C. L. Barr and R. E. Kleck, “Self-Other Perception of the Intensity of Facial Expressions of Emotion:
Do We Know What We Show?” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 68: 608–18 (1995).
43. R. Karniol and L. Koren, “How Would You Feel? Children’s Inferences Regarding Their Own and
Others’ Affective Reactions,” Cognitive Development 2: 271–78 (1987).
44. C. McFarland and D. T. Miller, “Judgments of Self-Other Similarity: Just Like Other People, Only
More So,” Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin 16: 475–84 (1990).
Afterword
1. Actually, it is a bit unclear just what Bernoulli meant by utility because he didn’t define it, and the
meaning of this concept has been debated for three and a half centuries. Early users of the term were clearly
talking about the ability of commodities to induce positive subjective experiences in those who consumed
them. For instance, in 1750 the economist Ferdinando Galiani defined utilità as “the power of a thing to
procure us felicity” (F. Galiani, Della moneta [On money] [1750]). In 1789 the philosopher Jeremy
Bentham defined it as “that property in any object, whereby it tends to produce benefit, advantage, pleasure,
good, or happiness” (J. Bentham, in An Introduction to the Principles of Morals and Legislation, ed. J. H.
Burns and H. L. A. Hart [1789; Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1996]). Most modern economists have
distanced themselves from such definitions—not because they have better ones but because they don’t like
to talk about subjective experiences. As such, utility has become a hypothetical abstraction of which choices
are the measure. If that seems like sleight of mouth to you, then welcome to the club. For more on the
history of the concept, see N. Georgescu-Roegen, “Utility and Value in Economic Thought, New Dictionary
of the History of Ideas, vol. 4 (New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 2004), 450–58; and D. Kahneman, P. P.
Wakker, and R. Sarin, “Back to Bentham? Explorations of Experienced Utility,” Quarterly Journal of
Economics 112: 375–405 (1997).
2. Most modern economists would disagree with this statement because economics is currently
committed to an assumption that psychology abandoned a half-century ago, namely, that a science of
human behavior can ignore what people feel and say and rely solely on what people do.
3. D. Bernoulli, “Exposition of a New Theory on the Measurement of Risk,” Econometrica 22: 23–36
(1954) (originally published as “Specimen theoriae novae de mensura sortis” in Commentarii Academiae
Scientiarum Imperialis Petropolitanae, vol. 5 [1738], 175–92).
4. Ibid., p. 25.
A NOTE ABOUT THE AUTHOR
DANIEL GILBERT is the Harvard College Professor of Psychology at Harvard University. He
has won numerous awards for his teaching and research, including the Phi Beta Kappa
Teaching Prize, a Guggenheim Fellowship, and the American Psychological Association’s
Distinguished Scientific Award for an Early Career Contribution to Psychology.
His scientific research has been covered by The New York Times Magazine, Forbes, Money,
CNN, U.S. News & World Report, The New Yorker, Scientific American, Psychology Today,
and others. His short stories have appeared in Amazing Stories and Asimov’s Science Fiction
Magazine, as well as in other magazines and anthologies.
He lives in Cambridge, Massachusetts.
PERMISSIONS ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Excerpt from the song lyric “Whatever Will Be, Will Be (Que Sera, Sera),” words and music by Jay
Livingston and Ray Evans. Copyright © 1955 by Jay Livingston Music, Inc. and St. Angelo Music.
Copyright renewed. International copyright secured. All rights reserved. Reprinted by permission of Jay
Livingston Music, Inc. and Universal Music Publishing Group.
ILLUSTRATION CREDITS
Figures 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22, 23, and 24 created by Mapping Specialists,
Ltd.
Figure 3 reprinted from J. M. Harlow, “Recovery from the Passage of an Iron Bar Through the Head,”
Publications of the Massachusetts Medical Society 2: 327–47 (1868).
Figure 12: Animal Crackers cartoon by Fred Wagner. Copyright © 1983 by Tribune Media Services.
Reprinted by permission of Tribune Media Services.
Figure 14 reprinted from C. Walker, “Some Variations in Marital Satisfaction,” in R. Chester and J. Peel,
eds., Equalities and Inequalities in Family Life (London: Academic Press, 1977), 127–39. Copyright ©
1977. Reprinted by permission of Elsevier.
Figure 19 adapted with permission from the American Psychological Association from D. T. Gilbert, E. C.
Pinel, T. D. Wilson, S. J. Blumberg, and T. P. Wheatley, “Immune Neglect: A Source of Durability Bias in
Affective Forecasting,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 75: 617–38 (1998).
Figure 20 reprinted with permission from the American Psychological Association from T. D. Wilson, D.
B. Centerbar, D. A. Kermer, and D. T. Gilbert, “The Pleasures of Uncertainty: Prolonging Positive Moods
in Ways People Do Not Anticipate,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 88: 5–21 (2005).
Figure 22 adapted with permission from Guilford Publications, Inc. from T. D. Wilson, J. Meyers, and D. T.
Gilbert, “How Happy Was I, Anyway? A Retrospective Impact Bias,” Social Cognition 21: 407–32 (2003).
THIS IS A BORZOI BOOK
PUBLISHED BY ALFRED A. KNOPF
Copyright © 2006 by Daniel Gilbert
All rights reserved. Published in the United States by Alfred A. Knopf, a division of Random
House, Inc., New York, and in Canada by Random House of Canada Limited, Toronto.
www.aaknopf.com
Knopf, Borzoi Books, and the colophon are registered trademarks of Random House, Inc.
Owing to limitations of space, all acknowledgments to reprint previously published material
may be found at the end of the volume.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Gilbert, Daniel Todd.
Stumbling on happiness / by Daniel Gilbert.
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references.
1. Happiness. I. Title.
BF575.H27G55 2006
158—dc22 2005044459
This title may be purchased for business or promotional use or for special sales. For
information, please write to Special Markets Department, Random House, Inc., 1745
Broadway, MD 6-3, New York, NY 10019, or e-mail specialmarkets@randomhouse.com.
eISBN: 978-0-307-26530-2
v3.0